IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 s ^^ 
 
 «r 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 11.25 
 
 
 lU 
 
 I 
 
 4,0 
 
 M 
 1.8 
 
 U I (.6 
 
 P 
 
 /a 
 
 <? 
 
 /^ 
 
 ^. 
 
 A 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 ^> 
 
 >^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 >P1 
 
 c^ 
 
 
 '^."'v-.^^ '^)P 
 
 //, 
 
 -V' 
 
 PhoiDgiaphic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST V.AIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 iV 
 
 iV 
 
 <r 
 
 \\ 
 
 ^ 
 
 v 
 
 -v 
 
 >^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 \ 
 
 
 % 
 
 ^' 
 
 "% 
 
4^ *<i- 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiqucs 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 n 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 nn Covers damaged/ 
 
 Couverture endommagie 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaurde et/ou pelliculAe 
 
 Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes giographiques en couleur 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Reiii avec d'autres documents 
 
 □ 
 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 La re liure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distorsion le long de la marge int^rieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela itait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas M filmdes. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppldmentaires: 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a 6t6 possible da se procurer, Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exigee une 
 modification dans la mithode normale de filmage 
 sont indiquAs ci-dessous. 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured pages/ 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 r~n Pages damagad/ 
 
 Pages endommagdes 
 
 Pages restored and/oi 
 
 Pages restaur^es et/ou pelliculdes 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxe; 
 Pages ddcolories, tachetdes ou piqudes 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages ditachdes 
 
 I I Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 r^ Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 I I Pages detached/ 
 
 ryi Showthrough/ 
 
 Transparence 
 
 Quality of prir 
 
 Quality inigale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary materti. . 
 Comprend du materiel supplementaire 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 r~lf Quality of prmt varies/ 
 
 I I Includes supplementary matertal/ 
 
 rn Only edition available/ 
 
 □ Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont 6t6 filmies i nouveau fie facon d 
 obtenir la meiileure image possible. 
 
 This item is filmed at tne reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est film* au tsux de reduction indiqud ci-dessous. 
 
 10X UX 18X 22X 
 
 26X 
 
 30X 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 McLennan Library 
 IVIcGiil University 
 IVIontreal 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quali^ 
 possible considering the conditio i and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract soecifications. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 fi/st page with a printec^ or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol -^-(meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V {meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Maps, platts, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The foiloving diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 L'exemplaire filmt fut reproduit grAce A la 
 g4n4rosit6 de: 
 
 McLennan Library 
 McGili University 
 Montreal 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 4t* reproduites avec i« 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettet« de l'exemplaire film«, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmagt'. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprimte sont fiimts en commenqant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit pur la 
 derniire page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autras exemplaires 
 originaux sont filmte en commen^ant par la 
 premiere page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dernit&re page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un dee symboles suivants apparattra sur la 
 derni^re image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbols — ^ signifie "A SUIVRE ". le 
 symbole ^ signifie "FIN". 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc.. peuvent dtre 
 filmte d dee taux de rMuction diff6rents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seui cliche, ii est fiimi d partir 
 de i'angle sup^rieur gauche, de gauche d droita, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images nicessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 iilustrent la m^thode. 
 
 1 2 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 IN FO TIR PARTS. 
 
 }8T— BbTNO a OnBMIOXL ANALT8I8 OF TH« KLKMKNT8 WHICH 
 
 ABB FOUND TO BXIST IN THB B17MAN FRllIB — THUI 
 
 feHOWINO TBB NATURAL ORIGIN OF MAN. 
 
 2aD— Also thb anatomical and physiological btruotwri o 
 
 THE HUMAN FBAUB. 
 JBD-ThB POWBRS OF THB 0B3ANS OF THB BRAI», PHRBKOLO- 
 
 allt c0n8idbbbd. 
 
 4th— With thb strbmgth and power of bxpaksiom of thb 
 
 immortal mind. 
 
 BY R. DeCOURCEY, 
 
 8MITHVILLE, Ct)UNTy OF LINCOLN C. W. 
 
 imilto: 
 
 PUBLISHED HT SAMUEL MORRISON, JOHN STREET- 
 
 1857. 
 
 M 
 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 -•-♦-•- 
 
 A great outcry has frequently been made by 
 those who profess to be pious persons, about 
 the vanity of human scieice. Certain preach- 
 ers, in their pulpit declamations, not unfrequent- 
 ly have attempted to embellish their discourses 
 by contrasting the truths of Scripture, with 
 what they are pleased to call " the perishable 
 treasures of scientific knowledge ;" and there- 
 by magnify the truths of the former, by showing 
 the vanity of the latter. The knowledge we 
 derive from Scripture, say they, "is able to 
 make us wise unto salvation ;" all other know- 
 ledge is but comparative folly. The knowledge 
 of Christ and him crucified will endure forever ; 
 but all human knowledge is transitory, and will 
 perish forever when this world comes to an end. 
 Men weary themselves with diving into human 
 science, while all that results to them is vanity 
 and vexation of spirit. Men may become the 
 greatest philosophers, and have their minds re- 
 plenished with every kind of human knowledge, 
 and yet perish forever. What have we to do 
 with the planets and the stars, whether they are 
 
MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 peopled m\\\ human beinga liko ourselves, 
 whether they are peopled with the spirits of the 
 departed of this '.>rorld, or whether they are 
 merely composed of a thin luminous matter, 
 placed in the firmament to give light to the 
 inhabitants of this earth. Our business is to 
 save our souls, and if we attend to that it is all 
 that is necessary. 
 
 Now, although some of the above and similar 
 expressions, when properly modified and ex- 
 plained, iiaay bo admitted s^s strictly true, the 
 greater part of them, along with hundreds of 
 others of like nature, are either ambiguous or 
 fals?. But, although they are all admitted as 
 true, what effect can the frequent reiteration of 
 such comparisons have on the mass of the peo- 
 ple to whom they are addressed, but only to 
 make them think that such studies arc useless; 
 and it is to be regretted that many are already 
 too much inclined to think so, without receiving 
 encouragement from such sources ; nay, some 
 even think it dangerous to acquire a knowledge 
 of some of the sciences, on account as they sup- 
 pose, that a knowledge of them are opposed to 
 the truths of Revelation. And what is the 
 knowledge which the great majority of those 
 who have acquired all their knowledge from the 
 pulpit and by studying the contents the of sacred 
 
I 
 
 Ti 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 5 
 
 oracles ? It, is too often, I foar, vague, confused 
 and superficial ; owing, in a great measure to 
 the want of those habits of mental exertion 
 which a moderate prosecution of useful science 
 would have induced. 
 
 Such declamations as those to which I have 
 now adverted, obviously proceed from a very 
 limited sphere of information, and a contracted 
 range of thought. It is rather a melancholy 
 reflection, that any persons should attempt to 
 apologize for their own ignorance, by endeavor- 
 ing to undervalue what they acknowledge they 
 have never acquired, and therefore, cannot be 
 supposed to understand and appreciate. For, 
 although several well informed and judicious 
 ministers of religion, have been influenced by 
 custom, and from copying the expressions of 
 others, to use a phraseology which has a tenden- 
 cy to detract from the utility of scientific know- 
 ledge, yet it is generally the most ignorant, those 
 \7hosereading and observation have been con- 
 fined within the narrowest range, who are most 
 forward in their bold and vague declamations on 
 this topic. We never find in the sacred records, 
 such comparisons and contrasts as those to 
 which I allude. The inspired writers never 
 attempt to set the word of God in opposition to 
 his works, nor attempt to deter men from the 
 
6 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 study of the wonders of Creation, on the ground 
 that it is of loss importance than the study of 
 bis Word. On the contrary, they talie every 
 opportunity of directing the attention to the 
 mechanism and order, the magnificence and 
 grandeur of the material world ; and their de- 
 votional feelings are kindled into rapture by 
 such contemplations. 
 
 When the Psalmist had finished his survey of 
 the different departments of Nature, as described 
 in the 104th Psalm, he broke out in the follow- 
 ing devotional strain : •' How manifold are thy 
 works, Lord ! in wisdom hast thou made them 
 all : the earth is full of thy riches, so is this 
 great and wide sea. * =* * The glory of tho 
 Lord shall endure forever, the Lord shall rejoice 
 in all his works. I will sing unto the Lord as long 
 as I live ; I will sing praises to my God while 
 I have my being." For the visible works of 
 God display the same essential attributes of 
 Deity, and of his superintending Providence, as 
 the revelation of his word ; and it is one great 
 design of that word to direct man to a rational 
 and devout contemplation of these works in 
 which his glory is so magnificently displayed. 
 And, therefore, to attempt to magnify the word 
 of God by degrading his works, or to set the 
 one in opposition to the other, is to attempt to 
 
\ 
 
 INTRODUCTION. f 
 
 set the Deity in opposition to himself, and to 
 prevent manldnd from offering a certain portion 
 of that tribute of adoration and thanksgiving 
 which is due to his name. 
 
 It is true, indeed, that the mere philosopher 
 has frequently been disposed to contemplate 
 the universe as if it were a self-acting and an 
 independent machine. He has sometimes walked 
 through the magnificent ecenes of creation, and 
 investigated the laws which govern the motions 
 of the celestial orbs, and the agencies which 
 produce the various phenomena of our sublu- 
 nary system, without offering up that tribute of 
 thanksgiving and praise which is due to the 
 great First Cause, or feeling those emotions of 
 adoration and reverence which svich studies have 
 a tendency to inspire. But it is no less true, 
 that the me- theologian has, likewise, not un- 
 frequently, ^^alked through the field of revela- 
 tion, studied its doctrines and facts, and moral 
 requisitions, written volumes in support of its 
 heavenly origin and defended its truths against 
 the cavils of its adversaries, without feeling 
 that supreme love to God and affection to his 
 neighbor which it is the great object of the 
 Scriptures to produce, and displaying a disposi- 
 tion and conduct directly repugnant to its holy 
 precepts. 
 
8 
 
 MAN DISPLAYUD. 
 
 ft 
 
 An argument founded on the impiety of cer- 
 tain pretended philosophers, to dissuade us from 
 the study of the material world would, there- 
 fore, be equally powerful to deter us from the 
 study of divine revelation, when we consider 
 that many who profess to receive its doctrines, 
 live in open defiance of its most sacred requi- 
 sitions. In both cases, such examples merely 
 show, that man is a frail, inconstant bein'7, and 
 too frequently disposed to overlook his '^Veator, 
 and to wander from the source of happiness. 
 
 It is a very vague, and in many points of 
 view, a false assertion, which has so frequently 
 been reiterated, — that what is generally termed 
 human knowlodge or science, has no connexion 
 with an immortal existence, and, consequently, 
 will be of no utility whatever, when this world 
 comes to an end. Truth is, from its very 
 nature, eternal and unchangeable ; and it cannot 
 be supposed a preposterous opiuion that the 
 established principles of several of our sciences 
 will be the basis of rea«oning and action in a 
 future state as well as in this present. That 4 
 whole is greater than any of its parts ; that the 
 angles of a triangle are equal to two right 
 angles ; that the sides of a plain triangle are to 
 one another as the sines of the angles opposite 
 to them : these and m&ny similar propositions 
 
 i 
 
INTRODUCTrON. 
 
 1 
 
 are equally true in heaven aa on earth, and may 
 probably be as useful truths there as in our 
 present abode. 
 
 OBJECT OF SCIENTIFIC INVESTIGATION. 
 
 In order to avoid misconception on this subject 
 it may not be improper to define and illustrate 
 what is meant by the term Science. 
 
 Science, in it? most general acceptation, 
 denote, kno"'ledge of every description; in a 
 more restricted sense, it denotes that peciea of 
 knowledge which is acquired chiefly by the 
 exercise of the human faculties, and in a still 
 more restricted sense, it denotes that systematic' 
 species of knowledge which consists of rule and 
 order, such as Geometry, Algebra, Chemistry, 
 Natural Philosophy, Astronomy, Geography, &c. 
 
 By means of scientific investigation the powers 
 of the mind have been strengthened, and our 
 knowledge of the operations of the Creator 
 extensively enlarged. Science has enabled us 
 to transport ourselves across the pathless ocean 
 from one continent to another, and to survey all 
 the variety of scenery which the terraqueous 
 globe displays ; it has taught us to mount 
 upwards towards the clouds, and even to rise 
 far above them, and soar beyond the eagle's 
 most towering hight, and to penetrate into the 
 
il! 
 
 10 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 m 
 
 i 
 
 depths of the earth, and explore the changes it 
 has undergone siuc^ thp period of its creation ; 
 it has laid open to our view the nature and con- 
 stitution of the atmosphere, the principles of 
 which it is composc^d, and its agency in sup- 
 porting fire, and vegetable and animal life. On 
 the principles which Science has established we 
 have been enabled to ascertain the distances of 
 many of the heavenly bodies, to compute their 
 magnitudes, and to determine the periods of 
 their revolutions j and by means of the instru- 
 ments it Ibas invented, we have been enabled 
 to take a nearer survey of distant worlds—to 
 contemplate new wonders of creating power in 
 the regions of the sky which lie far beyond the 
 utmost stretch of the natural vision— and to 
 explore those invisible regions, where myriads 
 of living beings are concentrated within the 
 compass of a visible poinc. In consequence of 
 such discoveries we have been enabled to acquire 
 more clear and ample conceptions of the amaz- 
 ing energies of Omnipotence, of the inscrutable 
 depths of infinite wisdom, of the over-ruling 
 providence of the Almighty, of the benevolent 
 care he exercises over all his creatures, and of 
 the unlimited extent of those dominions over 
 which he eternally presides. 
 The faculties by which man has been enabled 
 
 
 
i 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 If 
 
 to make the discoveries to which I have alluded, 
 were implanted in his constitution by the hand 
 of his. Creator ; and the objects on which these 
 faculties were exercised, are the works of the 
 Creator, which, the more minutely they are 
 investigated the more stnkingly do they display 
 the glory of his character and his perfections. 
 Consequently, it must nave been the intention 
 of the Creator that man should employ the 
 powers he has given him in scientific researches ; 
 otherwise he would not have opened to his view 
 so large a portion of his empire, nor endowed 
 faim with such noble faculties. Scientific inves- 
 tigations, therefore, are to be consider h1 as 
 nothing less than enquiries into the plans o'the 
 Eternal, in order to unfold the attributes of ois 
 nature, his providential procedure in the goven 
 ment of his creatures, and the laws by which he 
 directs the movements of universal nature. It 
 is true, indeed, that every one who calls himself 
 a philosopher may not keep this end in view in 
 the prosecution of his scientific acquirements. 
 He may be actuated, perhaps, by a principle of 
 curiosity, by a love of worldly gain, or by a 
 desire to acquire a reputation among the learned, 
 by the discoveries he may bring to light— just 
 a« vriv ottiiid \iraj,- tts cuijiu iiieuiugiuua are actu- 
 ated in prosecuting the studies of the Christian 
 
12 
 
 MAi\ DISPLAYED. 
 
 1 
 
 system. But the discoveries which have been 
 made by such persons are, notwithstanding, real 
 developments of the plans of the Deity, and open 
 to a devout mind a more expansive view of the 
 power and wisdom of Him who is " wonderful 
 in counsel, and excellent in working." It is our 
 own fault if we do not derive useful instruction 
 from the investigations and discoveries of philoso- 
 phy ; it is owing to our want of intelligence to 
 discriminate between the experiments of men 
 and the operations of God, and to the want of 
 that reverence, humility and devotion, which 
 ought to accompany us in all our studies and 
 contemplations of nature. 
 
 Science; therefore, from whatever motives it 
 
 may be prosecuted, is, in effect, an enquiry after 
 
 God: it is the study of angels and other 
 
 superior intelligences, as the scriptures plainly 
 
 inform us ; and we cannot suppose there is a 
 
 holy being throughout the universe that is not 
 
 employed, in one way or another, in scientific 
 
 research and investigation ; unless we can sup- 
 
 pose that there are moral intelligences who are 
 
 insensible to the displays of the divine glory, 
 
 and altogether indifferent whether or not they 
 
 make progress in the knowledge of their Creator. 
 
 If, then, the study of the sciences be of such 
 
 vast imnnrffinna in ihex K.i»^ — .•- j t 
 
INTRODUCTION, 
 
 13 
 
 to augment their eternal as well as their present 
 felicity, are we not guilty of a wrong by omitting 
 to improve every opportunity that presents itself 
 of informing the mind of the wonders of creative 
 power ? And if, as before remarked, God is the 
 author of nature as well as revelation, is it not 
 our bounden duty to investigate every scientifio 
 subject, so far as we are able, that will enable 
 us to form just conceptions of thejwisdom, power 
 and majesty of the Almighty, as displayed 
 throughout every part of the wonderful ma- 
 chinery, aud organization of animate and inani- 
 mate nature ? And although we may, by the 
 aid of the telescope, scan the starry vault of 
 heaven, and assist the vision to range through- 
 out the vast regions of space, and contemplate 
 the nature, size, and revolution, as well as the 
 distance from the sun, and also from the earth, 
 of many of the heave-^ly orbs, and by the aid of 
 numbers calculate the length of time it will take 
 for the light of the sun to travel down to this 
 earth ; and penetrate into the bowels of the earth, 
 and by the aid of mineralogy disclose to the 
 enquiring mind the riches which have lain con- 
 cealed in its bosom ; though we may by the aid 
 of mechanical skill and the science of navigation, 
 be enabled to circumnavigate the globe, and 
 range from clime to clime, and l>om shore to 
 
14 
 
 MA\ niSPLAVEI). 
 
 shore, and feast the mind on the beauties and 
 grandeur of the tropical vegetation, and all the 
 various scenes that may attract our attention ; 
 and though they n'ay be each and all of them in 
 themselves useful and interesting; yet, they are 
 void of that interest whicli may be derived from 
 the study, and investigation, and contemplation 
 of the wonderful structure and mechanism of the 
 human frame. The beauty, symmetry, elegance 
 and wisdom displayed throughout every part of 
 its organization present to us one of the most 
 complicated pieces of mechanism that can any- 
 where meet the eye— whether we consider tho 
 immense number and variety of its parts, the 
 numerous functions they perform, the rapid 
 movements which are incessantly going forward 
 throughout every part of this system, the amaz- 
 ing force exerted by the heart and muscles, the 
 processes of digestion and respiration, the system 
 of veins and arteries, tho articulation of the 
 bones, the structure and course of the lymphatics, 
 the ramifications of the nerves, the circulation of 
 the blood, the wonderful changes, dissolutions, 
 and combinations going on, the chemical appa- 
 ratus adapted for effecting these purposes, the 
 organs of sense, by which an intercourse is 
 maintained with the external world,— or the 
 harmonious correspondence of all its parts and 
 functions with the agencies of the surrounding 
 elements. 
 
 
MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 OUTLINES OF ANATOMY. 
 
 PART I 
 
 From the researches of the anatomist and 
 physiologist we learn that there are in the 
 human body two hundred and forty-five bones, 
 variously articulated, each of them having above 
 forty distinct scopes or intentions; and four 
 hundred and forty-six muscles of \arious figures 
 and magnitudes, connected with the bones, for 
 producing the numerous movements of the animal 
 frame— that more than one hundred of these 
 muscles are employed every time we breathe- 
 that there arc thousands of veins and arteries 
 distributed throughout every part of this won- 
 derful system— that the whole mass of blood 
 rushes with iinmenae velocity through these 
 vessels, and through the heart, fourteen times 
 every hour— that respiration is nothing less than 
 a species of combustion, in which the oxygen of 
 the a :» '.osphere is absorbed by the blood, and 
 
16 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 r N 
 
 diffuses heat and vigor throughout the system — 
 that the lungs are composed of an infinite num- 
 ber of membranous air cells, variously figured, 
 and communicating on all sides with one another, 
 and that their number amounts to at least 
 1,700,000,000— that there are above 300,000,- 
 000,000 of pores in the glands of the skia 
 \7hich ( over the body of a middle-sized man, 
 through which the sweat and insensible perspi- 
 ration are continually oozing — that thousands 
 of lacteal and lymphatic tubes are absorbing 
 and conveying nutriment to the blood — that the 
 heart, in the centre of the system, is exerting an 
 immense muscular force, and giving ninety-six 
 thousand sirokes every twenty-four hours ; — and 
 that all this complicated system of mechani:^m, 
 and hundreds of other functions of which we are 
 ignorant, must be in constant action, in order to 
 preserve us in existence, and secure our enjoy- 
 ment. This subject frequently engaged the 
 attention of the pious Psalmist. With an eye 
 of intelligence and devotion he surveyed the 
 curious organization of the human frame, from 
 the rude en.bryo in the womb, to the full devel- 
 opment of all its parts and functions : and struck 
 with the wisdom and goodness divsplayed in its 
 formation, ho raised his thoughts to G^d in 
 cra.fHfnl julnratinn. and eYcljiiiiTi.rl " T w!Il pvoic.^ 
 
OrTM.NKS OK ANATOMY. 
 
 17 
 
 Wk 
 
 I 
 
 thee, for I am feaiiVilly and wonderfully made ; 
 marvellous are thy works! How i.reJious are 
 thy wonderful eonlrivancey in relation to nie, O 
 God!- How great is the sum of Ihem ! Jf I 
 should count ihem, they are more in number than 
 the sand." This body, however, wonderful as 
 its structure is, is liable to decay, and must soon 
 be dissolved in the grave. Bi t wc are assured 
 that a period is approaching, when all that are 
 in their graves shall hear the voice of the Son 
 of God, and come forth ; - when this mortal 
 frame shall put on immortality," and when that 
 which was sown in corruption - shall be raised 
 ingJory." If the human body, even in its present 
 state of degradation, excited the pious admiration 
 of the Psalmist, much more will it appear worthy 
 of our admiration when it emerges from darkness 
 and corruption to participate in the glories of 
 an immortal life. But if we are startled or led 
 to wonder at the display of omnipotent wisdom 
 and power, as shown by the organization of the 
 human frame, from our present birds-eye . stance 
 at Its v.>,nder8, what will be our emotions' when 
 we have more minutely investigated each part, 
 and considered the various functions of each 
 part, m connection with the other organs of the 
 physical frame ? For as yet, we have only been 
 

 
 18 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 introduced into tlie portico of this amazing 
 temple. 
 
 Having now given the reader some idea of 
 the greatness and l)eauty of the subject, we in- 
 tend to discuss in ihe following pages, we pass 
 to notice the origin and formation of man in 
 connection with the other parts of the material 
 universe. With regard to the origin of man 
 the sacred writers inform us, that " God made 
 him out of the dust of the earth, and breathed 
 into his nostrils the breath of life, and he be- 
 came'a living soul." Thus we find man com- 
 posed of a part of two natures : from his 
 being formed of the dust of the earth, he 
 partakes fully of the animal or earthy nature ; 
 from his receiving the breath of life into his 
 nostrils, he partakes of a sufficiency of the di- 
 vine nature which enables his mind or spirit to 
 run parallel to the Creator throughout eternity. 
 In whatever light or character we view man, 
 whether as a mortal or an immortal being, we 
 find every state holding an undisputed pre-emi- 
 Dence over every other part of animate or in- 
 animate nature. If we take into consideration 
 only his physical organization, we discover the 
 texture of the skin to be of a finer cast than 
 that of any other of the animal species — the 
 
 f f 
 I I 
 
OUTLINES OF A.VATOMY. I9 
 
 «anio oh.servatian is equally true, if we examine 
 «very other part of the animal frame thus • if 
 wo examine the muscular system, the arrange- 
 ment of each set as they are disposed through 
 the body, they are of a decidedly closer and 
 more compact nature than those of the horse 
 or ox : the nervous system of man is also far 
 more sensitive than that belonging to the brute 
 ■creation ; hence, if, in this light only, we inves- 
 tigate man, we shall find bis physical organiza- 
 tion to bo the most complicated piece of ma- 
 cbmery the mind can contemplate. But to 
 extend our investigation still further and con- 
 sider his immortality, his intimate connection 
 with his Creator, the relationship existing be- 
 tween man and those higher order of intelli- 
 gences which surround the throne of the 
 Eternal, and reflect that after a few short years 
 of probation on this earth he is destined to enjoy 
 the^ companionship of angels and archangels 
 during an immortal state of existence ; or else 
 to dwell in the regions of darkness and despair 
 forever. When we contemplate the whole sub- 
 ject of the origin and design of man's creation, 
 the present power and faculties of his mind, the 
 almost unlimited power of expansion of which 
 tuey are possessed, and the eternal state of 
 —— WHicu ne IS destined to endure, con- 
 
20 
 
 MAN DISPLAYlil). 
 
 tribute to excite our admiration at the wonder- 
 ful display of omnipotent wisdom as manifested 
 in man's creation ; and in this position we be- 
 hold him the great masterpiece of creation, and 
 by his receiving a portion of the immortal es- 
 sence of the Deity, is stamped with the insignia 
 of royalty, and is amply qualified to become the 
 Lord of all animate nature. 
 
 Thus we have glanced at the different parts 
 of the subject under consideration in order to 
 give the reader some idea of the merits of it at 
 the ohset, which will be discussed at consider- 
 uble length in the following pages : 
 
 OKICIIN OF THE EARTH. 
 
 From Genesis, 1st chapter, we are informed 
 that the Almighty created man out of the 
 dust of the earth ; and many supposed from 
 this that when the signal moment, which was 
 predestined from all eternity, had arrived, 
 that without any preparatory measures being 
 adopted, or any circuit of means required, 
 the Almighty rose in his might, clothed himself 
 with the panoply of uncreated power, with one 
 effort of his omnipotency spoke at once into ex- 
 istence that *' noble creature, man," endowed 
 
 Vrin» ..11 +k/> f«^n1<^I-'" r.v,;j .-Ul, Al, - r.,n .i? 
 
 it! 
 
ORIGIN- OP THE KARTIf. 
 
 21 
 
 i-onson of Nvi.id^ we soo him now po^....Hecl. 
 Ami nob only n.on, but also our earth with 
 all animate an,I inanimate nature which ap- 
 pears upon ils .snrf.ee; with the entire solar 
 systeuN having the sun fur it.s common center 
 (for it is «aid in Genesis i. lo. He made the 
 stars also,) and in connection with these all 
 that vast retinue of worlds, and systems of 
 world., which revolve around their own center 
 -having suns of their own-far beyond our 
 system, in the boundless regions of space, and 
 for aught wo know to the contrary, many of the 
 wor ds may be like this ea.th-the abodes of 
 intellectual life. We hope the reader will ex- 
 cuse us hero for asking the question : Are we 
 to suppose that all this grand machinery of the 
 universe, of which we have any conceprion, was 
 created in the short space of dx days ? Be th^'s 
 as It may, we are certain that at the present 
 time the Almiglity works by means, and that 
 every part of the works of nature are under the 
 control of certain fixed and unchangeable laws; 
 that these laws are fixed and unchangeable, 
 both scripture and nature furnish .s with unmis- 
 akeable evidence. The promise to the hus- 
 bandman is, that "seed time and V^west shall 
 
 continue to the very end of all 
 rotary motion of the earth and 
 
 C' The 
 iieavenly 
 
22 
 
 MAN DIBVLAYKD. 
 
 ; 
 
 i fit 
 
 ri* 
 
 bodies ; tho construction of the human frame ,• 
 fhe growth of vegetables; and hundreds of 
 other examples might be quoted in proof of our 
 position. 
 
 We learn from the scripture that God is an 
 unchangeable being, and from this we infer that 
 as he does now permit these laws to exist «nd 
 govern the works of nature, by those same laws 
 nature's works were formed. Hence, Uien, if 
 the works of nature were formed upon estab- 
 lished principles, it is but reasonable to suppose 
 that there was some means employed to bring 
 those principles into requisition. For there can 
 be but two ways by which the universe could 
 have been created, namely, either by miracle, or 
 upon natural fixed principles ; and as we have no 
 positive proof of the farmer we must give credit 
 to the latter until that proof can be produced. 
 God is a being who always works upon reason- 
 able principles ; and can wo suppose any reason 
 why he should create all nature in the short 
 space of six literal days ? Surely he was not 
 wanting time, for he was from everlasting to 
 everlasting tbe same. Again, '"'one flay with 
 the Lord is as a thousand yoar^, and a thousand 
 years is as one day," implying that with the 
 Almighty there is no reckoning of time. It 
 
 could not have bft(>n for tlio nnmnaa rjf cU^T^;^^ 
 
ORIGIN OF THK KARTH. %, 
 
 to man his mighty powrr, for this he has already 
 don( : every biade of grass; every flower of the 
 field ; every leaf of the forest ; and every star 
 that decks the vault of night, proclaim the 
 >^orlfs of an almighty hand. It could not im- 
 part instruction to any of his intelligent crea- 
 tures ; on the contrary, an instantaneous creation 
 would involve the whole work in one impen- 
 etrablo maze and would be far above the com- 
 prehension of any created intelligence. Hence, 
 we can assign no good reason why the world 
 should be created in six literal days. But not 
 only so, the idea of an instantaneous creation 
 seems to be in opposition to the established 
 laws of nature; if the works of nature were 
 formed upon the principle of these unchangeable 
 laws, there must have have been a nuch greater 
 length of time elapsed than six literal days be- 
 fore all the works of nature could arrive at that 
 state of perfection to which they do at the ores- 
 e^^ day. Upon the present established principle, 
 It would be impossible for the little twig to be- 
 come a large tree-and so with every o^her . 
 part of the works of nature. 
 
 I am aware that the Bible informs us that in 
 SIX days God created the heavens and tho earth, 
 but It should be remembered that the term day 
 
 in aCrinfnro Anne *>^4. ->1 . .,. 
 
 ---r---- "--vo iiui> aiwiiys sigmiy a term of 
 
ff 
 
 II 
 
 I; : 
 
 24 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 twenty-four hours duration, but it sometimes 
 represents a long period of time, and is a term 
 frequently used in all languages. See Luke 
 xvii. 24, John viii. 5G, Job yiv. 16. iJence, we 
 see that we are not doing such vast injustice to 
 the sacred scriptures by supposing that the 
 works of creation were not performed in six 
 literal days. But we will treat upon this more 
 at largo in another place. 
 
 Upon no principle then of logic, nature, or 
 scripture can we see any reason for supposing 
 that the work of creation was performed in 
 six days of 'twenty-four hours each in duration. 
 Let us now examine the proof in favor of our 
 position. 1st. We take it for granted that the 
 laws of nature were in existence long before the 
 creation of the material universe, and that these 
 laws are unchangeable, and that these laws re- 
 quired the existence of certain material proper- 
 ties, and also their employment, to produce 
 those tft'kiGts which we discover in every depart- 
 ment of nature's works. 
 
 Our reason for coming to ibis conclusion is, 
 that as God is unchangeable and does now work 
 by means or create a cause to produce an effect, 
 it is evident that in all his works he has ob- 
 served the same rule. The elements of light, 
 heat, and moisture are the agents employed to 
 
 .m. 
 
ORIGIAf OF THE EARTH. 
 
 25 
 
 produce vegetation ; without the aid of these 
 elements vegetation could never arrive at ma- 
 turity ; and if it cannot do so now, it is proba- 
 ble it never could, unless we suppose these laws 
 liave changed since the creation ; and if so, the 
 Almighty has also changed his plan of opera- 
 tions—and this supposition no one will be will- 
 ing to admit for one moment. 
 
 Having, then, as we bbiieve, fully established 
 our position upon reasonable and tenable 
 grounds, we proceed to notice what these agents 
 were, that were employed by the Almighty in 
 the formation and construction of the material 
 universe. 
 
 In making our selection of the materials or 
 essences, of which the universe is formed, it Is 
 necessary to find some property, or properties, 
 which pervade all bodies or particles of matter; 
 and in order to make this discovery we must 
 analyze all material substances, and the compo- 
 nent parts of which they are formed. In mak- 
 ing this research we have become acquainted 
 with the following elementary substances which 
 pervade all bodies and particles of matter, 
 namely, Heat, or Caloric. Electricity, Galvan- 
 ism. Attraction, and the Gases, which are : Ox- 
 ygen, Nitrogen, Hydrogen, and Carbon ; and as 
 
 these elnmpn<« iiva an ,,^U, n,. I'.rf 1 
 
 I 
 
^i ? 
 
 26 
 
 MA\ DISPLAYED. 
 
 throughout all the works of nature, the respect^ 
 ive property and office of each element will 
 receive particular attention in its proper place. 
 As heat is the principal cause of tlie germina- 
 tion and growth of animals and vegetables, and 
 without which no animal or vegetable could ex- 
 ist, no matter however favorably circumstanced 
 in every other respect ; it will be the first element 
 which will receive our particular attention. 
 Heat 13 the sensation which one feels when he 
 touches a body hotter than his hand ; and this 
 sensation is caused by the passage of caloric 
 into the hand. Thus caloric is the cause of the 
 sensation wo call heat, and heat is the efl^ct of 
 the passage of caloric into the hand. Caloric. 
 then, is the matter, or principle of heat,, while 
 heat IS the sensation of the transfer of this prin- 
 ciple to the system. 
 
 Hi i 
 
 ELEME>TTAIiY rillNCIPLES OF THE EAliTH. 
 
 ^ Heat. This principle is present in all bo- 
 dies, nor is there any process by which it can 
 be separated from any substance,- for, since 
 heat constantly passes from the hotter to the 
 colder body, until every thing in the same vicin- 
 ity becomes of an equal temperament. For 
 instance, if a piece of ice of 32 degrees of tern- 
 
KLEMENTARY PKINCIPLES OF THE EARTH. 21 
 
 perature, could be transported to any place, as 
 in Siberia, where the temperature is 60 degrees 
 below 32 ® , then this piece of ice will continue 
 to emit caloric until its temperature becomes 
 only equal to that of the surrounding atmo- 
 sphere, and it will give out 60 degrees of heat. 
 Heat and cold are, therefore, merely relative 
 terms, and so far as our sensations are concerned, 
 depend upon circumstances. Thus we call a 
 body cold when its temperature is lower than 
 our own, and it has at the same time, the power 
 of conducting heat rapidly. On the contrary, we 
 say a body is warm or hot, when it imparts heat to 
 the hand more or loss rapidly. But this sensation, 
 to a certain degree, also depends on circum- 
 stances, and is connected with the relative tem- 
 perature of the hand, and the conducting power 
 of the substance touched. This principle is 
 illustrated by the different sensations which men 
 feel when transported from a cold or hot climate 
 to one more temperate. A Eussian would con- 
 sider our coldest Canadian winter a comfortable 
 and pleasant one, while an inhabitant of Suma- 
 tra or Borneo would tremble at the cold of our 
 September. The same may be said in regard 
 to animals; a white bear from Greenland, or a 
 dog from Kamschatka, would conj^tantly suffer 
 ixv.x. .i.c ueat, wDiiu uu eiepflaut or a naked dog 
 
 I 
 
../ 
 
 28 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 f: i 
 
 from Africa, would need to be covered to protect 
 them from the cold. 
 
 Natuue of Heat. Of the nature of this univer- 
 sal and most important agent,there have been sug- 
 gestfdtwoopinions.viz.: 1st. That it is material, 
 or composed of particles of matter, so nearly im- 
 ponderable as not to be weighed by any means 
 in our power. 2nd. That it consists in nothing 
 more than a quantity of matter pervading all 
 space, and that its effects are produced by un- 
 dulations. Wo can not now notice these theo- 
 ries, but merely mention them that the reader 
 may hate some idea of its nature. 
 
 AiMMAL Heat. The real cause of animal 
 temperature has notyet been explained, although 
 the subject has excited considerable attention- 
 has been an object of experiment among physi- 
 ologists in all ages, and many ingenious, and 
 some plausible theories have been invented and 
 detailed, in order to give satisfactory explana- 
 tion of its cause. Among those who have given 
 the subject their fittention, may be noticed Dr. 
 Crawford, Dr. Davy, Dr. Turner, and Mr. Bro- 
 die. Among tho.se theories, that invented by 
 Dr. Crawford was, perhaps, the most plausible, 
 and certainly the most beautiful. But that, as 
 well as the others, have been shown to be in 
 some respects incorrect in its leading facts, and 
 
EI.EMEXTARY PRINCIPLES OF THE EARTH. 29 
 
 consequently, the theory itself cannot stand. 
 That the oxygen of the atmosphere is one of the 
 principal causes of animal heat, can not be 
 doubted, from the fact, that no animal can live 
 without it, and that the heat of animals is in 
 some proportion to the quantity of this principle 
 consumed. This fact is shown by birds that 
 respire most frequently, and consequently con- 
 sume the greatest amour.t of this gas, have a 
 temperature of from 106 to 117 degrees, while 
 man and the horse, which respire a less number 
 of times, have only 98. (Liebeg's Chemistry.) 
 But, as this principle can have no eifect, except 
 through the lungs, if it is admitted that heat is 
 evolved there, there is still much difficulty, either 
 why the lungs are not at a higher temperature 
 than the other parts of the system ; or if they 
 were, how the heat could be conveyed to the 
 other parts of the system, from its fountain. 
 
 On the whole, it appears that 'the cause of 
 animal heat is one of the arcana of nature, into 
 which man has not yet been permitted to look, 
 and therefore, we must be contented at present 
 to attribute it to the vital principle. 
 
 Sources of Heat. The sources of heat may 
 be reduced to six causes, namaly, the Sun, Com- 
 bustion, Electricily, the bodies of living animals, 
 Chemical action, and Mechanical action. The 
 
 I 
 
i f 
 
 ■Ui I 
 
 I ? 
 
 30 
 
 MAN DISPLAVKD. 
 
 sun constantly radiates lieat to the earth, and is 
 also the great source of heat to the whole solar 
 system. Combustion ; this suppMes the heat 
 •employed in the arts, and for culinary purposes. 
 In this process the caloric is extracted from the 
 oxygen of the atmosphere, as it unites with the 
 burning body, and supports its combustion. 
 Electricity : whenever two bodies in opposite 
 electrical states are m:ule to approach each 
 other, so as to produce a discharge through the 
 air, or along a non-conductor, there attends a 
 iiash of light accompanied by heat. By the 
 action of galvanism, which is only a modification 
 of electricity, the most intense heat hitherto dis- 
 covered has been produced. Vital Action : The 
 bodies of air-breathing animals are a continual 
 source of heat. 
 
 Internal Heat. That heat has the pG,;v3r 
 of liquifying all particles of matter, is a fact 
 every one conversant with chemistry is acquaint- 
 ed with. And by referring to geology, we are 
 informed that the internal matter of which the 
 earth is composed is in a fluid state ; this fact 
 is demonstrated by the melted lava which is 
 emitted from time to time from the diiferent 
 volcanic mountains on the earth. 
 
 Another proof of this fact is the increase of the 
 temperature of the atmosphere,experienced when 
 
rLEMBNTARY PRI>fCII'LK.S OF THK RARTir. 31 
 
 we descend into wells and other subterranean 
 vaults. Again, if we examine the crust of the 
 earth, we find it composed of layers one nbove the 
 other,which shows that at some period of creation 
 the whole mass of matter comprising the body of 
 the earth was in this fluid state, and that this fluid 
 mass has been cooled through tne influence of 
 somoelement of an opposite nature acting upon it; 
 and the force of cohesive attraction and gravi- 
 tation acting upon these cooling particles, has 
 brought the crust of the earth to its present 
 consolidated form. The further we descend into 
 the bowels of the earth towards the center, the 
 higher the temperature becomes. The average 
 increase of heat throughout the world, so far as 
 the experiment has been tried, has been found 
 to be about 45 feet for each degree ; then sup- 
 posing the temperature on the surface to be 
 50 degrees, a heat sufiicient to boil water would 
 be found, at the depth of one mile ; at the same 
 rate a heat of 7000 degrees would be obtained 
 at the depth of 48 miles, and continuing the 
 preceding ratio, the heat at the center of the 
 earth would amount to 757,000 degrees. A 
 heat far greater in intensity than we have any 
 conception of. We have been thus particular 
 m describing the nature, property, and source 
 ■ot this universal and useful eleaient, from the 
 
I>l 
 
 II' 
 
 11 
 
 1 5' 
 
 iiil: 
 
 32 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 important ofTice it performs in every part of 
 creation. Its influence upon the growth of men, 
 animals, and vegetation, is illustrated by com- 
 paring the products of the animal and vegetable 
 kingdoms of the frigid zones with those of the 
 torrid. Where its invigorating influence is 
 withheld the diminutive size of the object is im- 
 mediately perceived ; men instead of possessing 
 that vivacity and that mental and muscular 
 prowess that characterize those who live in the 
 torrid zone, are of a dull, sluggish disposition, 
 and totally incapable of performing any noble 
 action, dwarfish in size, and in every way dis- 
 gusting in their appearance. The same remark 
 is equally true with respect to the animals of 
 the difi'erent zones ; and if we compare the veg- 
 etable kingdoms of the two places together, the 
 difference bet^veen them is more perceivable. 
 Instead of the magnolia, the bannian, and the 
 beautiful palm trees of the torrid zone, nothing 
 but a few stinted birches and some s^catteriDg 
 pines, appear as signs of vegetation to cheer the 
 weary traveler in his toilsome jouiiiey over 
 those lonely hills. 
 
 ELECTinciTv. That electricity is une of the 
 principal agents employed in the construction of 
 the material world, is certain. Vrom the re- 
 searches of geologists we learn that the er,r this 
 
 |j[ 
 
THEOKIKS OP BLECTIIIIITV. 33 
 
 the great reservoir of eloctricity. By investi- 
 gating tlio properties of tliis element, wo find 
 Us nature '0 be eold, and passing witi, innnense 
 velocity through all (he work of nature, at the 
 rate of238,000 miles per second. Electricity is 
 considered as an exceedingly subtle fluid ,» 
 
 hght as not to eirecl the most delicate balan'ces" 
 Md pervading all substances. It is. therefore 
 w Us oifects on other bodies only, which it is i„ 
 our power to explain. The ancients know 
 «oth,ng of this element as a science. The! 
 know indoed. that amber and glass when rubbed 
 wu aUract light substances : and about t ! 
 miud le or the eighteenth century, it was di.cov- 
 
 hne when heated, would attract feathers and 
 hai . aud that some precious stones, when rubbed 
 wou d do the same. As an important science, 
 irZt"' no higher date than the age of 
 
 TiiKoRiEs 01.' Klecthicity. Dr. Franklin 
 supposed .bat all terrestrial things had a Jl 
 ral quantity of Electricity, but that its eifecL 
 becam, ^ „„,^ ^^^^ ^ substance co! 
 
 tamed more or less than the natural quantity 
 which condition is effected by the friction of an 
 electric Thus, when a piece of glass is rubbed 
 by the hand, the equilibrium is lost, the electri- 
 
 c 
 
 I 
 
m i 
 
 m 
 
 34 
 
 MAN Dr»LAYED. 
 
 cal fluid passing from the hand to the glass, so 
 that now the hand contains less, and the glass 
 more than their ordinary quantities. These two 
 states he called positi e and negative, implying 
 the presence and absence of the electrical fluid. 
 But if the conductor 1)0 made to touch a negative 
 body, then the conductor will impart a shaie of its 
 own natural quantity of the fluid to that body, and 
 consequently will contain le^ Uhan ordinary; also, 
 when one body, positively, and the other nega- 
 tively electrified, are connected by a conducting 
 substance, then the fluid rushes from the posi- 
 tive to the negative side, and the equilibrium is 
 restored. 
 
 There is another theory, that of Dufay which 
 is embraced by some writers. He concludes 
 tbat electricity consists of two distinct fluids, 
 which exist together in all bodies : that these 
 two fluids attract each other, but that they are 
 separated by the exoiiatioA of an electric, and 
 that when thus separated, and transferred to 
 non electrics, the mutual attraction of the two 
 electricities causes light substances to rush to- 
 ward each other. Electricity may be excited 
 by several modes : 1st. By friction, called fric- 
 tional electricity; 2nd. By chemical action, 
 called galvanic electricity ; 3rd. By the action 
 of heat, called thermo electricity ; 4th. By 
 
ATTRACTIO.V. 
 
 35 
 
 mesmerism. The following substances are good 
 conductors of electricity, namely, living animals, 
 metals, amber, charcoal, and caloric. 
 
 Attraction. Another important agent em- 
 ployed in the construction of the material uni 
 verse, is Attraction. By attraction is meant 
 that property in bodies which gives them a ten- 
 dency to approach each otiier, whether they ex- 
 ist in atoms.orin masses. A i traction has received 
 various names,according to , he circumstances un- 
 der which it is observed to uct. Thus,that kind of 
 attraction that extends to all kinds and quanti- 
 ties of matter, and to all distances, is called the 
 attraction of gravitation. This attraclion ex- 
 tends reciprocally from one planet to another 
 and from all the planets to the fixed stars, and 
 IS the cause of the orbicular motion of the hea- 
 venly bodies. It also extends to all terrestrial 
 masses of matter,and is the cause of their weight 
 and their tendency to approach each other, and to' 
 draw toward the center of the earth. The force 
 0/ gravitation is directly as the quantity of mat- 
 ter, and inversely as the square of the distance, 
 liius, If one body attracts another at the dis- 
 tance of two feet with a force equal to thirty-six 
 pounds, then, at the distance of four feet will 
 ^nly be nine pounds, and so on in this ratio, as 
 the distance may be. Cohesive Attraction is 
 
fi 
 
 i! 
 
 j! 
 
 !| 
 
 t '! 
 
 Ii 
 
 il 
 
 ( 
 
 36 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 that property which tends to preserve bodies in 
 masses by acting on the particles of which they 
 are composed. 'J'his attraction is supposed to 
 act only at insensible distances, as when the 
 bodies of matter touch each other. Chemical 
 Attraction is that power which forces the par- 
 ticles of matter of different kinds to approach 
 each other, and form a compound. It differs 
 from cohesive attraction by acting upon parti- 
 cles of difforent kinds of mutter. From the pre- 
 ceding facts we can form some idea of the im- 
 portant office which attraction performs in the 
 formation of the earth : first, By drawing those 
 particles of matter of which it is composed to- 
 gether; and, secondly, by causing them to adhere 
 together after thuy had come in contact with 
 each other. 
 
 Oxygen Gas.. Another agent, which we 
 believe was employed by the Divine Architect, 
 in the great work of Creation, is Oxygen Gas. 
 The term oxygen, is derived from two Greek 
 words, and signifies the generator of acids, and 
 was formerly considered the only acidifying 
 principle in nature. It was discovered by Dr. 
 Priestly, in 1774. Its specific gravity is 1.11, 
 air being 1. It is a non-conductor of electricity, 
 like common air. Its electrical state is always 
 aegative, and when suddenly and forcibly cum- 
 
SOrfRCES OP OXYUEN. 
 
 37 
 
 bodies in 
 hich they 
 iposfeil to 
 Nhen the 
 Cliemical 
 the par- 
 approach 
 It dllTers 
 >on parti- 
 n the pre- 
 f the im- 
 QS in the 
 v'lng those 
 posed to- 
 to adhere 
 tact with 
 
 rhich we 
 Architect, 
 gen Gas. 
 wo Greek 
 icids, and 
 acidifying 
 ed by Dr. 
 ;y is 1.11, 
 electricity, 
 is always 
 ;ibly cuiii- 
 
 pressed, emits light and heat. It is an invisible 
 transparent ll.ml, like air, and has neither taste 
 noi s.neri. It is sparingly absorbed by water- 
 100 cubic inches will take up three or four 
 inches of the gas. Oxygen has the most uni- 
 versal affinity of any known substance; it unites 
 with all simple substances, and especially with 
 all metals forming an extensive class of com- 
 pounds, known under the name of oxides 
 
 SoLRCEs or OxYGE.v. It appears from ex- 
 penment that vegetation is a source from which 
 oxygen may be obtained. Growing plants 
 during the day, absorb carbonic acid from the 
 atmosphere, decompose the gas, emit the oxy- 
 gen of which it is in part composed, and retain 
 the carbon to increase its growth. 
 
 Hydrogen. Another important element to 
 be found in the material universe, in connection 
 with those already noticed, is Hydrogen The 
 name of this gas is derived from two Greek 
 words, signifying the generator of water, be- 
 cause it enters largely i^to the composition of 
 that fluid. It was discovered by Mr. Canen- 
 dish m 1776. Its specific gravity is 0.069, air 
 being 1 It is 14 times lighter than water, and 
 2Tl^ ^;^f lighter than oxygen gas, and is 
 
 the lightest of all known nnn^a.oKL. U^a:.. 
 
 electricity is positive. 
 
 Ti._ 
 
38 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 Hydrogen may be obtained by several pro- 
 cesses, but nev^r without the presence of water, 
 it being evolved only by the decomposition of 
 that fluid. 
 
 Nitrogen. Nitrogen Gas is likewise one of 
 the elementary substances which pervades 
 every part of the material universe, and conse- 
 quently, its properties and office will receive a 
 passing notice in this place. 
 
 This gas was formerly called azote, which 
 signifies life-destroyer, because no animal can 
 live in it. The atmosphere is composed of 
 about four-fifths of this gas. It is destructive 
 to animal life, and is a non-supporter of combus- 
 tion. A lighted candle when plunged into it, 
 is immediately extinguished — any animal soon 
 dies when confined in it. Yet it exerts no inju- 
 rious influence on the lungs, the privation of 
 oxygen being the sole cause of death. Its spe- 
 cific gravity is a little less than that of atmo- 
 spheric air, nitrogen being 0.9722, air being 
 1000, One hundred cubic inches weigh 29.7 
 grains. Nitrogen exists in all animal substances 
 and in such vegetable substances as emit ani- 
 mal odor during their decomposition. 
 
 Carbon. The last general principle or ele- 
 ment, whose properties and office we shall ex- 
 amine, in connexion with our subject, is Carbon. 
 
CARBON. 
 
 39 
 
 Nature furnishes carbon in its purest state in the 
 form of that precious gem the diamond. That 
 the diamond is nothing more than pure carbon 
 is proved by chemical analysis. Carbon may 
 be also produced from charcoal. . This gas is 
 unodorous, colorless, and elastic. It extinguish- 
 es burning substances of all kinds, and is so 
 poisonous that according to M. Halle, it mil 
 destroy animal life in the space of two minutes. 
 It is this gas which destroys the life of a person 
 in consequence of warming close rooms with 
 open vessels,containing burning charcoal. In such 
 cases the air becomes noxious, from two causes ; 
 the charcoal, by abstracting the oxygen from the 
 atmosphere, leaving only the nitrogen, which, as 
 we have already seen,will not support animal life. 
 The mere absence of the oxygen would, there- 
 fore, be the negative means of destroying life , 
 But this is not the most active cause of destruc-' 
 tion. The air is not only deprived of its oxy- 
 gen by the burning charcoal, but the oxygen 
 uniting with the charcoal becomes an absolute 
 poison ; this is indeed of so deleterious a nature, 
 that, \7hen pure, causes death by producing a 
 spasm of the glotis, those closing entirely the 
 passage to the lungs, ; and when mixed with 
 the atmospheric air. in snph pr^«r.».<^u>,« 
 
 be taken into the lungs, it then acts 
 
 l-rsi Liuua ao m 
 
 as a nar- 
 
40 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 cotic poison, producing dimness of sight, loss 
 of strength, difficulty of breathing, then entire 
 suspension of respiration, and finally, insensi- 
 bility, apoplexy, and death. M. Foder states, 
 that in the year 1806, a family consisting of 
 seven persons, residing at Marseilles, were all 
 rendered apoplectic in consequence of inhaling 
 carbonic acid, which was extracted from an 
 oven in the yard of the house where limestone 
 was burning. The gas came into the house 
 throug^ the doors and windows ; by some means 
 it was ifound, during the night, that the family 
 were in danger, and the alarm was given, but 
 not in time for any one to escape. In the morn- 
 ing all the seven were found in different places, 
 with lamps in their hands in the attitude of es- 
 cape—but the deleterious gas had taken away 
 -iheir strength, and put out their lights. They 
 all appeared to have fallen down of apoplexy, 
 while attempting to escape death by flight. 
 Five were dead beyond recovery, but the other 
 two were brought to life. Some people, who 
 are perfectly aware of the doletorious effects of 
 the air arising from ignited charcoal, which is 
 prepa d in coal pits, still, unaccountably, be- 
 lieve that the coals from a common fire are in- 
 nocent. But there is no difference in the 
 poisonous effects of this gas, whether prepared 
 
CARBON. 
 
 41 
 
 from the coal charred in a pit or on a common 
 hearth. 
 
 The specific gravity of this gas is 1-52 — air 
 being 1 — so that it is about one-half heavier 
 than common air. It may be poured from one 
 vessel to another, like water ; and as it instantly 
 extinguishes flame, lights may be put out with 
 it in a manner which will astonish and puzzle 
 those who are not acquainted with the secret. 
 
 The large quantities of this acid which are 
 formed by combustion and respiration, it might 
 be supposed would increase the quantity in the 
 atmosphere, particularly in crowded cities, so 
 as to make the air poisonous. But the wisdom 
 of Omnipotence has prevented the accumula- 
 tion of this gas in particular places, in conse- 
 quence of its specific gravity ; for experiment 
 shows, that notwithstanding the great difference 
 existing among them, they all mix uniformly. 
 Hence, by this wonderful provision, or exception 
 to the general law of gravity, this gas, though 
 extricated in immense volumes in the open air, 
 soon diffuses itself on all sides, and mixes with 
 the surrounding atmosphere, so as seldom to 
 prove deleterious by local accumulation. 
 
 Atmosphere. The Atmosphere which we 
 breathe is composed of 20 parts of oxygen and 
 
m : m 
 
 ii m 
 
 42 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 80 parts of nitrogen, to every hundred by vol- 
 ume. 
 
 These proportions are found never to vary, 
 except from local causes. Gay Lussac, in an 
 aerial voyage, carried with him an exhausted 
 bottle, closely corked, and when at the height of 
 nearly 22,000 feet from the earth, he uncorked 
 the bottle and let in the air. It was then closely 
 corked again, and brought to the earth. On 
 examination, this air was found to contain pre- 
 cisely the same proportions of the two elements 
 as that taken from the surface of the earth. 
 Specimens of air have also been brought from 
 Chimborazo, Mount Blanc, from the deserts of 
 Africa, and from the midst of the ocean, and 
 on analysis they have all been found to con- 
 tain the same proportion of the two gases. 
 
 These proportions are found by experiment 
 to form the most agreeable air for respiration, 
 and to be the best fitted for the support of ani- 
 mal life. Animals confined in air, containing 
 more than the ordinary proportion of oxygen, 
 have their respiration hurried and become fever- 
 ish by over excitement ; while those confined to 
 air containing a less proportion of that gas be- 
 come languid and faint from the want of its 
 stimulating effects. 
 
ATMOSPHERE. 
 
 43 
 
 ui 
 
 Besides these *wo gases, the atmosphere con- 
 tains variable portions of carbonic acid gp.s and 
 aqueous vapor. Saussuro found it in the air 
 of Mount Blanc, taken from the height of six- 
 teen thousand feet above the level of the sea. 
 Its proportions never exceed one part in 100 in 
 freely circulating air. 
 
 The oxygen of the atmosphere being the 
 principle which supports life and flame, it is ob- 
 vious that large quantities of it must be con- 
 sumed every day, and therefore that its quantity 
 must diminish, unless there exist some source 
 from which it is replaced. The quantity con- 
 sumed, however, must be exceedingly small, in a 
 definite period of time, when compared with 
 the whole, for the atmos^phere not only surrounds 
 the earth, but it extends above it, at every 
 point, about forty-iivo miles. Now when we 
 consider how small a portion of this immense 
 mass comes into contact with animals or fire.s 
 at any one time, and that it is only these small 
 portions that become vitiated, we may suppose 
 that ages would elapse before any difference 
 could be detected in the quantity of oxygen, 
 even were there no means of replenishment 
 provided. 
 
 But the wisdom of the Deity is manifestly 
 displayed in providing for the replenishment of 
 
illlll 
 
 I 
 
 ■ 
 
 '^i 
 
 
 i 
 
 (1 
 
 
 i i 
 
 '''\ 
 
 
 ; IF 
 
 '•' 11 
 
 1 
 
 j 1 
 
 * 
 
 ! 
 
 1 
 
 ,i 
 
 
 Li 
 
 
 : 
 
 44 
 
 MAN DrSPLAYED. 
 
 this universal element which is ordained to pro- 
 mote the happiness of mankind, by causing it to 
 originate from vegetation. (See Oxygen). 
 
 When wood or carbon is burned, oxygen is 
 thereby r^r^Yerted. iuto carbonic acid gas, and a 
 greater 3ser portion of this gas contained 
 
 in the abuiosphere may bo attributed to this 
 source. Here, then, we are able to trace another 
 instance of the order and design of Omnipo- 
 tence. The destruction of plants by burning, 
 while the process absorbs oxygen from the air, 
 furnishes carbonic acid, which, in its turn, is 
 decomposed by growing vegetables, the carbon 
 being again converted into wood, while the oxy- 
 gen goes to replenish the loss created by the 
 burning and to purify the atmosphere for the 
 use of man. 
 
 Water. We will next notice the chemical 
 proi:erties of that useful element, Water. The 
 purest water, not having undergone distillation, 
 is that which is obtained from the clouds. 
 It is transparent, and without either taste or 
 smell ; and being perfectly bland and neutral, it 
 is to all animals the most agreeable of drinks. 
 
 The weight of water is the standard by 
 which the weight of all solids and liquids are 
 estimated. The weight of a cubic foot of pure 
 water is 62h pounds avoirdunnis. At a t8ai= 
 
VEGETABLE CHEMISTRT. 
 
 45 
 
 perature of 60 degrees, oxygen and hydrogen 
 unite in proportion of 1 to 8 to form water. 
 The effect of temperature upon liquid water is 
 distinguished by a peculiarity of a very striking 
 Idnd, and exhibits a departure from the general 
 laws of nature, for a purpose so obviously wise 
 and beneficent, as to afford one of the strongest 
 and most impressive of those endless proofs of 
 design and omniscience in the frame of creation, 
 which it is the most exalted pleasure of the 
 chemist and naturalist to trace and admire. 
 
 Water, in its natural state, always contains a 
 quantity of air. This may be shown by placing 
 it under the receiver of an air pump, for as the 
 air is removed from the receiver, bubbles 
 will be seen to rise from the water. The 
 air in water is found to contain a larger 
 quantity of oxygen than the common air of the 
 atmosphere. The lives of all such fishes as live 
 entirely under water depend on the quantity of 
 oxygen it contains, as no animal can exist with- 
 out it. Although water contains a considerable 
 quantity of air in its natural state, amounting to 
 2 cubic inches to 100 of the fluid ; yet it absorbs 
 some of the artificial elastic fluids with great 
 avidity, and a few of them in great quantities. 
 
 Vegetable Chemistry. Notwithstanding 
 the great diversity of plants existing in the 
 
 < 
 
ii 'm 
 
 46 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 vegetable creation, the elements of which they 
 are composed are exceedingly few in number, 
 therefore, the great variety which we observe in 
 plants, and their different parts, must arise from 
 the different proportions in which these few 
 elements unite. 
 
 The constituents of vegetables are carbon, 
 hydrogen, and oxygen, and the great variety 
 which we observe in the texturo, color, taste, 
 smell, hardness, &c., as well as their several 
 parts, such as flowers, seeds and fruits, arise 
 from the dilTorent composition of these elements. 
 From the account given by a great Swedish 
 naturalist there aro 100,000 diffMi-ent species of 
 •plants growing out of the earth. The essential 
 organs of plants are, the root, stem, leaves, 
 flowers, and seeds. The root serves to attach 
 the plant to the soil. The stem which is usually 
 erect, serves to elevate the leaves, flower and 
 fruit from the ground, by which they are ex- 
 posed to air and light. The leaves are the res- 
 piratory organs of the plant, and the flower 
 performs the important office of giving rise and 
 nourishment to the seeds, by which the plant is 
 reproduced. 
 
 Vegetation. Gormination of seeds. The 
 circumstances necessary for a healthy germina- 
 tion and gro^sth of plants is a proper access to 
 
VKGETATION. 
 
 47 
 
 Air and temperature above 32 degrees, and below 
 100 deg., with sufficient moisture. Seeds will 
 not vegetate without the aid of these agents, as 
 has been proved by experiment. Seeds planted 
 at a temperature below 32 will not germinate, 
 though not absolutely killed by the frost. Nor 
 will seeds vegetate without the contact of air, 
 though both heat and air be present. This is 
 known by burying seeds in the earth, where 
 they have been known to lie for years, and even 
 for ages, in a torpid state, for want of the germi- 
 nating power of oxygen. Experiments have 
 proved that seeds will not grow under any cir- 
 cumstances without the presence of oxygen, 
 although it appears that a very small portion 
 of this gas is necess ry for this purpose. It 
 being thus certain that seeds will not germinate 
 without the aid of oxygen, it need hardly be 
 stated that the future growth of the plant must 
 require the presence of the same principle. The 
 fact that plants absorb carbonic acid was first 
 discovered by Dr. Priestly. But subsequent 
 experiments have shown that pure carbonic acid 
 stops the growth of plants, but that a small 
 quantity is absolutely necessary to healthful 
 vegetation. If a growing plant be exposed to the 
 sun in a glass vessel filled with water, it con- 
 stantly emits from its leaves small bubbles ot 
 
48 
 
 MAN DISPLAYKP. 
 
 air, which, on examination, are found to be 
 oxygen gas. 
 
 Plants, during the night, or when the light of 
 the sun is withdrawn, absorb oxygen, tnd form 
 with it carbonic acid, a part of which they einit, 
 and a part is retained. According to experi- 
 ments made by Dr. Hales, a cabbage during the 
 day will transmit a (luantity of water nearly 
 equal to half its weight. The great effect of 
 dew or sprinkling water has upon flowers, is a 
 proof that the leaves imbibe moisture. In 
 addition to heat, moisture, oxygen and carbonic 
 acid; healthy vegetation requires a certain 
 amount of light. This is proved by the dispo- 
 sitioL plants have to incline towards the light, 
 when it is stronger in one direction than another. 
 
 RECAP1TULAT10^ OF VEGETABLE CHEMISTRY. 
 
 — Vegetable substances are chiefly composed of 
 carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, but sometimes 
 certain portions of nitrogen. 
 
 Healthy germination does not proceed without 
 the combined presence of heat, water, and 
 oxygen. 
 
 Seeds will not germinate in a vacuum, or in 
 any gas which does not contain oxygen, though 
 heat and moisture be present. 
 
 Plants receiv J nourishment from the air as 
 well as from the earth. In the day-time plants 
 
VKGKTATION. 
 
 49 
 
 absorb the carbonic acid, retain the carbon, and 
 emit the oxygen. In the night they absorb 
 oxygen, and give out carbonic acid. Plants do 
 not live without they are permitted to absorb 
 oxygen during the night ; nor will they live 
 unless they absorb a portion of carbonic" acid 
 during the day. 
 
 Vegetation will continue for some time, either 
 in carbonic acid or oxygen gas. 
 
 Healthy vegetation absolutely requirt^ the 
 agency of light. Plants which grow in the dark 
 are white. They show their propensity to 
 enjoy the light by leaning or creeping toward it. 
 Plants growing in the dark do not absorb and 
 decompose, but emit carbonic acid, and hence 
 they contain a deficiency of carbon. 
 
 Observation. We have now briefly noticed 
 the elementary principles of which the atmos- 
 phere and water is composed, and by chemically 
 analyzing the body of matter which composes 
 the surface of the earth we find these same prin- 
 ciples existing there in abundance. This fact is 
 also demonstrated by Vegetable Chemistry, from 
 the circumstance thatas the whole vegetable cre- 
 ation is alone composed of these gases ; and as 
 each seed germinates in the earth, and each plant 
 proceeds from the earth, and receives its nour- 
 ishment from it and the surrounding elements 
 
 D 
 
'i 
 
 60 
 
 MAN DFSPLAYRI). 
 
 ''( ' 
 
 4' i 
 
 \i III: 
 
 It is evident, I say, from this oonsidoration, 
 that all earthy matter is composed of the 
 same principles which form the surrounding ele- 
 ments. 
 
 Animal Ohemi.strv. In relation to Chemis- 
 try the circumstances which distinp^uiah animal 
 from vegetable substances are the large quantity 
 of nitrogen which the former always contain, 
 their strong tendency to putrefaction, and the 
 offensive produ(;ts which tliev exhale during de- 
 composition. 
 
 Animal substances are essentially composed 
 of carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, and nitrogen ; and 
 in addition to these they sometimes contain 
 sulphur, phosphorus, iron, and small f[uantities 
 of saline nuitter. 
 
 FiHRi.v. — The lean part of animals consists 
 •chiefly of fibrin, which is composed of IS parts 
 of carbon, 14 of hydrogen, 5 of oxygen, and 3 of 
 nitrogen. 
 
 The fat of animals i^* veiy analogous in its 
 composition and proportions, to the fixed veget- 
 able oils, its ultimate principles being carbon, 
 hydrogen, and nitrogen. 
 
 There is a considerable variety in the appear- 
 ance and generalities of the fatty principle con- 
 tained in different animals. The solid fat of 
 land anisnals is called tallow, while the covres- 
 
 ri| 
 
WHY MAN WAS CREATED OF DUST. 61 
 
 ponding substances from fish, which is fluid at 
 common temperaturo, is called oil. 
 
 All these substances agree very nearly in 
 respect to composition, the principal difference 
 being in respect to form and appearance. 
 
 Ohsrrvalion. From the preceding analysis 
 we find that not only the atmosphere, and water, 
 and vegetable substances .-.re composed of these 
 elementary principles wh;.h we have before 
 noticed; but also the e,;,th, and the animal 
 organization of the miman frame is composed of 
 the same agencies. Perlups the enquiry may 
 suggest itself to the mind of the reader, What 
 IS the necessity of investigating all the properties 
 and offices of these Elementary Principles, as 
 you are pleased to call them, merely for the 
 sake of discovering Ihe origin of man ? I admit 
 that it may at first appear rather a strange course 
 of procedure, but a little reflection upon the 
 subject will justify \he course we have taken. 
 
 ''^^''' r'.n^f Tn?^" WHY UA^ WAS CREATED 
 I liOM THE DUST OP THE EARTH. 
 
 From the Scriptures we learn that God 
 made man out of the dust of the earth ; but of the 
 manner of the creation, the length of time 
 required to perform that creation, or the agencies 
 
 — .j'i^/jcu lu pruuuCG tn 
 
 e work, 
 
 the 
 
 sacred his- 
 
MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 torian does not inform us. Hence, if we desire 
 information upon this subject, we must obtain it 
 from some other source. The Almighty having 
 seen fit in his wisdom to endow man with the 
 power of investigating natural subjects, and 
 judging of cause and eflfect ; and in order to 
 elevate him still higher in the scale of intellec- 
 tual existence, the Almighty also granted him 
 the desire to search after and obtain a knowledge 
 of the wisdom, power, and wonders of creation 
 by investigating the works of nature. Hence, 
 man having the power, and desire, and the means 
 of obtaining a knowledge of his Creator, all 
 placed within his reach, he has become a secon- 
 dary cause of his own moral and intellectual 
 elevation, not only here in time, but also in 
 eternity. For it is evident that as these desires 
 originate in our moral nature, and proceed from 
 a good source, they will not only accompany us 
 to a higher state of felicity, but will also attend 
 our immortal principle or spirit throughout the 
 rounds of eternity, where they will enjoy a 
 boundless range of space for their expansion, 
 and undoubtedly an endless variety of objects 
 and scenes for their contemplation, untram- 
 meled by those natural weaknesses and impedi- 
 ments which continually retard our intellectual 
 march in this world. Upon this principle of 
 
WHV AIAN WAS CREATED OK DUSl . 53 
 
 pro.2:re?sion who can contemplate the boundless 
 extent of spiice over which the immortal mind 
 will range, while, enjoying the eternal felicity 
 which can he obtained from no other source, save 
 of a continual companionship of angels, archan- 
 gels, " and the spirits of those who have washed 
 their robes and made them white in the blood of 
 the Lamb." Thus we find a reason why the 
 Almighty adopted this course which we have 
 supposed in the construction of the material 
 universe, in order that man, either by revelation 
 or nature, or by both combined, may have a 
 perfect knowledge of the wisdom, power, and 
 beneficence of the Creator, in his dealings to 
 man, so far as the moral and the intellectual 
 enjoyment of man is promoted, either in time or 
 eternity, by being in possession of this knowledge. 
 Who, then, can go through the field of scien- 
 tific knowledge, as it lies open before him, and 
 not wonder at the power, goodness, and conde- 
 scension of the Creator, in bringing the system 
 and order, as well as the agencies employed by 
 which, and with which, the mighty fabric of 
 creation was formed, to the comprehension of 
 his finite creature, man ; and for no other reason 
 that we know of, only that man might be per- 
 
 petuallv hannv in co«^"»^«i"f''"- +1- -•' 
 
 of his Creator. 
 
t , .1; il:;S- 
 
 54 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 W 
 
 Hi ,'. 
 
 But another reason why we think Ihis course 
 was adopted by the Almighty in creating the 
 universe : Man has ever been prone to scepti- 
 cism wherever he imagined the least shadow of 
 a doubt to exist, and more particularly with 
 regard to the truths of revelation than almost 
 any other subject. The history of the ancient 
 Jewish nation is an illustration of this fact in 
 that age of the world ; and at a still later period 
 the French have shown to the world that the 
 same principle still exists. Even in this hemis- 
 phere, antl in the present day, notwithstanding 
 the light which modern travellers and historians 
 have thrown upon many passages of scripture, 
 we see many who affect to discredit many of the 
 truths contained in the sacred pages. If, then, 
 there can still be found a lurking place for the 
 sceptic concerning the authenticity of the scrip- 
 tures, what room might they not have had for 
 caviling if the works and operations of nature 
 did not prove the existence of a great First 
 Cause. But by the present arrangement the 
 works of nature become a key to revelation, so 
 that though man were ever so much disposed to 
 doubt the truths of the latter, the operations of the 
 former are so comprehensible in all their parts, and 
 every plant, tree, shrub, and animal is produced 
 and brought to maturity by such a regular and 
 
WHY MAN WAS CREATED OF DUST. 
 
 DO 
 
 systematic course, that all scepticism concern ing 
 the existence, power and wisdom of Jehovah, 
 must inevitably come to naught ; for h is certain 
 that Chance could never have formed such a mag- 
 nificent, yet complicated structure as the matt-rial 
 universe. 
 
 Again, the Alrai.rhty designed that man 
 should become a responsible being, and in order 
 that man s'lould be an accountable creature to 
 his Creator for the improvement or rnisimprove- 
 ment of the time allotted to him here, it was 
 necessary tiiat he should be so situated as to 
 have the opportuiiity of obtainir.g all the need- 
 ful knowledge concerning the attributes of 
 Jehovah, and man's dependence upon His 
 bounty, as should call forth the warmest expres- 
 sions of gratitude from the creature, and the 
 most humble at;d devout submission to the 
 divine will and government. x\nd yet, after 
 all the Almighty has done for the present and 
 future happiness of his intelligent creatures, 
 and the convincing proof they have so often had 
 of their own utter helplessness, and of the benefi- 
 cence of the Creator; still in the day oi' pros- 
 perity how quick tliey are to forget all his bene- 
 fits, and betake themselves to the giddy and 
 vain things of time and sense, and boast of their 
 
ill 
 
 56 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 M 'I 
 
 si ^ 1 
 
 '1 
 
 1 hi 1 
 
 . jj. 
 
 I! 1 1 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 own strength, rather than acknowledge the 
 goodness of God. 
 
 If man will then be so ungrateful still to his 
 Creator, after all these proofs of Omnipotent 
 goodness and power, and of his own accounta- 
 bility for his conduct here on earth, who dare 
 set bounds to the dt^mands of retributive justice, 
 or say to the Almighty, "Thus long shalt thou 
 punish such ingratitude, and no longer ?" If 
 man is so unwise, and exhibits such unprece- 
 dented folly by his conduct with regard to what 
 most teiids to promote his future happiness, he 
 is certainly equally incompetent to judge of the 
 amount of punishment due him for his ingrati- 
 tude to his Creator ; and as the laws of nature 
 can furnish us with no means of judging of its 
 extent, all conjectures concerning its duration is 
 imperfect, except drawn from revelation alone. 
 
 Again, the Almighty is a reasonable being ; 
 and he has given abundance of proof of this by 
 the works of creation. By this we know that 
 he who created all is Lord of lords, and King of 
 kings ; and by this, too, we know that it is no 
 vain thing to serve God, that he is before all 
 things, and by hiiu all things exist. 
 
 Hence we discover, by thus tracing the works 
 of creation from their original essences to that 
 
WHY MAN WAS CREATED OF DUST. 
 
 57 
 
 Doble creature, man, that God is a God of order, 
 and not of confusion, which illustrates the truth 
 of that remark that God is *' too wise to err." 
 From the preceding facts and reasons we come 
 to the conclusion that considering the attributes 
 of Jehovah, as displayed by revelation and the 
 works of nature, that the position we have under- 
 taken to prove with regard to the construction 
 of the universe, is the only one that will corre- 
 spond to the account or description of his char- 
 acter :.nd attributes as described by the sacred 
 writers. We see that in order that there may 
 be left no room for scepticism with regard to 
 the existence of Jehovah, that the Scriptures 
 and nature exactly coincide in establishing the 
 fact beyond all controversy ; and the works of 
 nature teem with evidences that he fully pos- 
 sesses every attribute of power, wisdom, order 
 and beneficence which the Scriptures ascribe to 
 him ; and the whole mystery, so far as our hap- 
 piness can be thereby promoted, brought to the 
 level of human comprehension. 
 
 Time will not permit us to carry our investi- 
 gations and reasonings any further. Enough 
 has already been said to convince the reader 
 that the ground we first took was not altogether 
 untenable. In conclusion, let us enquire which 
 looks or appears to be the most reasonable and 
 
jp: 
 
 liii 
 
 68 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 I I 
 
 ill 
 
 systematic course for the Alniighty to proceed, 
 as we have supposed, in the conatrnction of the 
 universe, or to speak it at once into existence. 
 He brought those different elements into 
 existence, and by his wisdom brought them 
 together to form the different elements which 
 compose the material universe. We do not 
 wish to be understood to denv that God is able 
 to create the world from nothing; but we dis- 
 believe that he adopted this cours*-', as it seems 
 incompatible with his wisdom. Again, it seems 
 unreasonable to us that those elements which we 
 have before noticed should be in existence before 
 the work of creation was commenced, and per- 
 vade all particles of matter, and yet not be 
 instrumental in producing any part of the 
 Almighty's works. Again, as we have before 
 remarked, that it was not for the want of lime 
 that caused the Creator to hasten on his work 
 — for he was before all things, and eternity itself 
 was at his disposal — it would not promote his 
 glory by forming the work instantaneously ; 
 neither would it make any of his creatures adore 
 and wonder at his power and miglit, by being 
 thus kept in ignorance of his plan of creation. 
 Neither does Geology give us any intimation of 
 any instantaneous creation ; but, on the con- 
 trary, givco every evidence against such a course 
 
WHY MAN WAS CREATED OP DUS'i" 
 
 59 
 
 being pursued. From Geology we find the 
 earth bolow the surface is composed of layers or 
 portions of its matter, which have at some time» 
 some period or another, been once in a fluid 
 state; and by the power of radiation this fluid 
 matter, which was made to by heat, has been 
 cooled off, and become solid caith ; but by no 
 known principle of radiation at the present day 
 could this fluid mass be cooled off instan- 
 taneously ; neither was this the case, for if it 
 had been so, the earth would have presented 
 the same appearance as the ground around ihe 
 summit of a volcano, after the melted lava 
 which it has emitted has been cooled off ; but 
 that it has been cooled by a slower process is 
 evident from the regular succession of layers of 
 earth which compowo its body. Hence from no 
 source or argument that wo can adduce from 
 nature can wo find any proof that the world was 
 created in the short ^^pace of six days, each of 24 
 hours duration ; and not only this earth, but like- 
 wise every Ihiug pertaining to it, with the solar 
 system, and the numerous host of worlds which 
 are spread out in that broad expanse of space 
 which are stretched far beyond the power of the 
 most powerful telescope to discover, for it is said 
 in Scripture that he made the stars also. I am 
 aware that the Scripture informs us that in six 
 
'•' i 
 
 60 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 days God made the world, but how long those 
 days were we are not told, and from this fact 
 many have supposed that the days mentioned in 
 the Bible were of the same length as they are 
 now; but this could not have been, for it was 
 not until the beginning of the fourth day that 
 the sun was put in the firmament, to rule the 
 day ; hence time was measured by some other 
 mode, which we find to be light and darkness, 
 and how often these divisions succeeded each 
 other we are not informed. From these con- 
 siderations, then, we cannot see in what way we 
 are doing any injustice to the Scriptures, or the 
 writers of them, to suppose that the world was 
 not created in six literal days. 
 
 Having, as we think, satisfied the objector as 
 to the probability and plausibility of the tru. of 
 our position, in supposing that the universe was 
 created out of those elements which we have 
 before noticed, we will now notice those days of 
 creation called the Demiurgic days. 
 
 DAYS OP CREATION. 
 
 As we have before observed, the term day, in 
 Scripture, does not always signify a period of 
 time of 24 hours duration, but sometimes a much 
 longer period. See Luke xvii. 24, and several 
 other passaRes, as proofs. 
 
DAYS OF CREATFON. 
 
 61 
 
 Bishop Horsely and Professor Jameson sug- 
 gest that the revolution of the earth on its axis 
 was at first iDconceivably slow, and that it did 
 not acquire its present rate until the fourth day, 
 so that the first four days was of vast duration. 
 (Philosophical Magazine, vol. 46, |)age 287 ; also 
 vol. 243.) Still more recently this theory has 
 been ably elucidated by Dr. Keith, in his 
 Demonstrations of the Truths of Christianity, 
 page 147. Others, as Professor Hensler, in 
 Germany, and Professor Bush, in the United 
 States, suppose that each of the days of creation 
 called the demiurgic days, as the representation 
 of distinct periods of time, and perhaps of 
 unequal lengths. (Biblical Repository, vol. 6, 
 page 236.) 
 
 That there was some other division of time 
 beside day and night is certain, from the fact 
 that it was not until the fourth day that the 
 Almighty placed the sun in the firmament. 
 Moses tells us that the division of time adopted 
 was light and darkness, and how often these 
 periods succeeded each other he does not inform 
 us. These interpretations agree very well 
 with the cosmogonies of many heathen nations— 
 as the Etruscans and Hindoos; their ancient 
 traditionary tales represent these demiurgic days 
 as immense periods, whinii 00,70 •D..^f,.„„„„ 
 
62 
 
 MAN UISIM^AYKD. 
 
 Jameson and others, developes a striking coin- 
 cidence between tlie epochs of creation, as 
 described l)y ^Moses, and Geologists. (Blalce- 
 well's Geology, page 450.) For a fuller investi- 
 gation of the preceding- theory consult Faber's 
 Treatise on Providential and Christian DispeD- 
 sation; DeLuc's Letters on the Physical History 
 of the Earth ; Blakewell's Geology, by Professor 
 Sillinian, page 43G ; American 13iblical Reposi- 
 tory, for October, 1835 ; P>uckland's IJridge- 
 water Treatise, vol. 1, 2d edition, page 59V. 
 Some suppose that the Mosaic account of the 
 creation is a pictorial reprcseJitation, having 
 truth for its foundation, but not to be taken as 
 exactly and literally true. (Knapp'."3 Theology, 
 vol. 1.) It is maintained by sonio able waters, 
 such as Dathe, Doederlin, &c., in Germany, 
 Milton in England, and Professor Push, in the 
 United States, that the langrage employed by 
 Moses in the first chapter of Genesis does not 
 mean a creation of the world out of nothing, but 
 only a renovating or remodelling of pre-existing 
 materials. Such writers admit the existence of 
 the globe during an indefinite period, before the 
 six demiurgic days. The Scripture phrase, ''In 
 the beginning," is certainly indefinite as to time ; 
 and therefore Moses, in Genesis, does not fix the 
 time of tbe original creation, and therefore it is 
 
HAYS OF rRF;>TION 
 
 63 
 
 H 
 
 doing no violence to his language to admit this 
 long intervening period Ijetween the creation of 
 the universe and the creation of man. This 
 view of" tlio account of the time p iveu in Genesis 
 has been adopfed in essence ])y many christian 
 writers, both ancient and modern, among whom 
 may he reckoned, Angus! ine, Theodoret Rosen- 
 muiler, sen., Bishop Patrick, Buffon, Hamilton, 
 Dolomiew, Faujas D. Bt. Fond, and others. If 
 such an interval be admitted, it is entirely suf- 
 ficient to reconcile the Scripture and geological 
 accounts, becausf* during that interval all the 
 fossiliferous rocks, except the alluvia, might have 
 been formed. 
 
 Astronomy sliows tliat probably some of the 
 planets undergo similar changes, to become 
 habitable globes, so that the universe Itself is 
 ai!ect..d by the change. Dr. Jobn P. Smith, 
 late head of a Theological Seminary, in Homer- 
 ton, near London, supposes that the first verse 
 of the first cha})ter of Genesis only refers to the 
 collecting together of the materials or elements, 
 and that the formation is only of a small part 
 of the present habitable globe. That the parts 
 of the earth fitted for the abode of intellectual 
 life, lying between the Caucassian mountains, 
 on the Caspian sea, and Tartary on the north, 
 and the Persian and the Indian seas on the 
 
,«p^ 
 
 64 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 ! 1 
 
 * 
 
 •outh, and the high mountain ridges which run 
 at considerable distance on the eastern and 
 western flank. That thn Noachean deluge was 
 limited to that part of the world then inhabited, 
 and, consequently, we need not look any farther 
 
 for its effects. 
 
 We have been thus careful to give the author 
 from whom we have taken the above extracts 
 for the ^ason that some may think these ideas 
 were somt, wild speculation of the author's own 
 iuvention ^ but if it be known that they originated 
 in the minds of those theologians who are 
 admired for their profound reasoning on the 
 truths of revelation, the ideas and arguments 
 would receive that weight which Ihey deserve. 
 However, be this as it may, certain it is that 
 some of the above arguments look quite as 
 reasonable as the supposition that the world was 
 made in six literal days, axid especially so, if 
 we take the works of nature for our guide ; 
 for if we descend into the bowels of the earth we 
 shall find facts that will argue strongly against 
 the supposition of an instantaneous creation. 
 That the land is increasing in extent m many 
 parts of tbe globe, on the shores of many of the 
 seas and rivers, is certain. From the accounts 
 of travellers we learn that along the river Nile, 
 and the coast of the Mediterranean, cities that 
 
DAYS OF CHKATION. 
 
 66 
 
 formerly stood by the water side aro now aeverU 
 mileH fi'otn it. A^ain, many islands liavo rideu 
 out of tiio midst of tlio ocean, of s<!veral miles in 
 circumferfnco; als^o fossil retiiains aro found 
 several feet below the surface of the earth ; the 
 remains of cities and fortifications, and monu- 
 ments of art, have been excavated fron. Iho 
 earth, which has collected upon them even since 
 profane history has received an authentic shape. 
 All of thes^ facts go to prove that the surface of 
 the earth has not yet received all the additions 
 cf land which may yet belong to it; or in other 
 words, that the land on the surface of the earth 
 has not reached its utmost extent. If, then, 
 such changes have occurred in the formation of 
 the land on the surface of the earth, within a 
 few centuries, or a couple of thousand years, 
 upon the same principle of progression what 
 might not have been those changes which proba- 
 bly took place during a period of several thousand 
 years that the world was probably in existence 
 bf fore it became fit for the abode of man. That 
 there have been great changes in the animals, or 
 in the climate, Is certain; whether that change 
 was the effect of the deluge, or produced from 
 some other cause, h not known. As proof cf 
 this, the remains of the carcases and tuaks of 
 
 K 
 
 
;?^W" 
 
 66 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 elephants have been found in a fossil state oa 
 the shore of the White Sea, in the northern part 
 of Russia ; these tusks have been found in such 
 abundance that the principal part of the ivory 
 used by the inhabitants of Moscow and St. 
 Petersburg was brought from that place. 
 Again, the fossil remains of the Hyena have 
 been found in England, and it is well known 
 that neimer of these animals can exist at the 
 present day in either of these places, nor have 
 they been able to do so, from their diiierence of 
 constitution, or in other words the temperature 
 of these places would not admit of the existence 
 of these animals there, in a wild state : hence, 
 the change in one or the other must have been 
 ▼ery great ; and as these and similar changes 
 are still going on, they probably have been since 
 the first particles of matter were brought into 
 existence. 
 
 Having chemically analyzed the body of 
 matter of which the earth is composed, we have 
 found that the earth and surrounding elements 
 are all formed of the same universal principles, 
 from the circumstance that these principles 
 pervade all particles of matter ; we have thereby 
 shown that the world was not formed out of 
 nothing, as many have supposed. But it may 
 
 .ili!- 
 
 \ieA 
 
DAYS OF CREATION. 
 
 67 
 
 be asked, What does it signify to us to know 
 whether the world spoken into existence at once 
 by the power of God, or whether those agents 
 were employed ? In reply we would ask if it 
 is of no consequence to us whether we believe 
 in truth or error ? If one is as good as the 
 other, then we have labored in vain. Upon the 
 same principle, then, the labc.rs of the missionary 
 are vain ; and all efforts to moralize the world 
 are equally vain, but as it is admitted that 
 error is productive of evil, ig it not a matter of 
 great consequence to us wliether we believe in 
 truth or in error ? But the evil of ignorance is 
 progressive, and one error always Jeads to 
 another ; hence it is that we often see discord 
 and strife abroad in the world, the peace of 
 society destroyed, nay. even civil war and blood- 
 shed itself originating from one single error. 
 In the present case, however, the error may not* 
 it is true, lead to such events ; yet it leads to 
 the evil of supposing that the plan and works of 
 creation are all beyond our comprehension, and 
 consequently involved in mystery; and we 
 thereby deprive ourselves of the possession and 
 enjoyment of a fund of useful knowledge that 
 we might have obtained had we believed other- 
 wise, and investigated the works of nature as we 
 
68 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 ought and probably would have donp. Another 
 position wo have proved in that the works of 
 nature are governed by certain fixed and un- 
 changeable laws, which were established upon 
 reasonable principles, and accounts for many of 
 the wonders and phenomena of nature which to 
 the ancients were nothing short of miracles. 
 It also demonstrates the truth of the Scripture 
 declaration that God is a God of order, and not 
 of confusion. By these investigations we are 
 able to form higher conceptions of the attributes 
 of Jehovah than we would otherwise do were we 
 ignorant of these f^jcts. Our minds, too, are 
 freed from the apprehensions of evil that would 
 frequently take possession of them at some 
 strange appearance of the sky, of a comet, or an 
 ecli[>se, if we did not know that all these appear- 
 ances and changes were produced by the opera- 
 tions of these laws, and consequently these 
 change's were productive of good instead of evil. 
 It is a well known fact that fear produces tor- 
 m.^nt ; then if the study of the works of nature 
 were productive of no other good, it would 
 dispel many of the groundless fears that fill the 
 minds of the ig orant. 
 
 Again, wo liave shown that in all the works 
 of creation there has been throughout the whole 
 
DAYS OF CREATION. 
 
 69 
 
 plan a rogfular Rystematic course of progression, 
 which sliow.s us that the Creator not only pos- 
 sessed unlimited power, but also matclih^ss ^<klll 
 and wisdom ; and, therefore, Cliance lias had 
 nothinj,^ to do in the work. Hence, as we have 
 before remarked, all scepticism concerning the 
 existence of the Deity, in reality, must be for- 
 ever silenced, and the christian can have the 
 consolation of knowing that he is acting forever 
 under the eye of an all-wise and beneficent 
 Creator, who watches over his life and protects 
 bim from all harm ; and he has also an inward 
 assurance that after a few years of probation in 
 this world have come to an end, he has inward 
 principles, an immortal mind, a strange myste- 
 rious something, within this earthly tenement, 
 implanted there by his Creator, that will be 
 transplanted to a higher state of intellectual 
 felicity, where he will forever wonder and adore 
 the glories of creating power. 
 
 With regard to the time of the creation, and 
 the length of time it took to perform it, all we 
 Lave to say is. that the reader has been pre- 
 sented with suppositions respecting it, and the 
 causes or theories upon which these supposi- 
 tions were founded, and he is nnw left to form 
 his own opinion concerning their merits : if they 
 
70 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 will coincide with the laws and regulations of 
 nature, they will certainly deserve some credit ; 
 if not, they will receive their deserts by being 
 oast aside as wild and chimerical speculations. 
 Having now traced all the works of nature, 
 as well as man, to its original essence, and given 
 our reasons for doing so, we will endeavor to 
 investigate the structure of the animal frame, as 
 that is the casket of the immortal mind, by 
 which an intercourse is held with the material 
 world. 
 
PART II. 
 ANATOMY OF THE HUMAN BODY. 
 
 GENERAL REMAKES. 
 
 Anatomy is a description ot the organs or 
 parts of a body. 
 
 The teeth, stomach, and heart are some of the 
 organs of the human body. 
 
 Physiology is a description of the functions or 
 use of the organs. Anatomy and Physiology 
 are divided into two kinds — Animal and Vege- 
 table. 
 
 Animal Anatomy and Physiology are again 
 divided into Human and Comparative. 
 
 Human Anatomy and Physiology describe the 
 structure and functions of the organs of man. 
 
 Comparative Anatomy and Physiology de- 
 scribe the structure and functions of the organs 
 of other animals than man. 
 
 Hygiene is the art of preserving health, or that 
 department of medibine which treats of the pres- 
 ervation of health. 
 
 The Bones.— The bones are firm and hard, 
 and of a dull white color. la 
 
 «1I 4.U. 
 
 _1 
 
 ail tUU iiigUCr 
 
72 
 
 MA\ DISPLAYEP. 
 
 order of animals, among which is man, they aro 
 in the interior of the body; while in lobsters, 
 crabs, &c., they are on the outside of the body, 
 forming a case, which protects the movable 
 parts from injury. 
 
 Anatomy of the Bo\e«. — Th^re are two 
 hunf're 1 and forty-five bones in the body of man, 
 besides the teeth. These, for convenience, are 
 divided into four parts, viz. : Tie bones of the 
 Head, the bones of the Trunk, the bones of the 
 Upper Extremities, and the bones of the Lower 
 Extremities.! The bones of the head are divided 
 into those of the skull, ear, and face. The skull 
 is formed of eight bones ; these are joined to- 
 gether by ragged edges called sutures. 
 
 Ohservaiion. The sutures stop, in a measure, 
 the jars caused by external blows. Children 
 should never strike each othv-r upon the head, 
 as the bones in the skull are then softer than ia 
 adults. 
 
 In the ear aro four small bones— they aid 
 in hearing. In the face are fourteen bones 
 —they support the sofier parts outside of them. 
 The trunk contains fifry-four bones, twenty- 
 four ribs, twenty-four bones in the spinal col- 
 umn, (back-bone), four in the pelvis, sternum, 
 or breast-bone, and one at the root of the tongue. 
 
ANATOMY OP THE BOXES. 
 
 73 
 
 All ibo ribs are joinec! to the spinal column. 
 I'liere are twelve on each side. 1 no sevea 
 upper ribs are uiutecl in front to the sternum by 
 a yieldinj^ substance called a cartilage — gristle; 
 the remaining five are not attached directly to 
 the sternum — three are joined to each other by 
 cartib'ge, two are not confined ; hence they are 
 calleci «' flciting ribs." The cavity -formed by 
 the sternum, rib.'?, and spinal column is called 
 the cheM.. It contains the heart, lungs, and 
 large ■>b)od vessels. The shape of the chest is 
 conical, or like a sugar loaf. 
 
 Ohi^cr ration. The lower part of the chest is 
 broader and fuller than the upper part, unless 
 It IS made smaller by tight lacing. 
 
 The spinal column is com})osed of twenty- 
 four pieces of bone. Each piece is called a 
 vertebra. Between the vertebra is a thick 
 piece of cartilage, which springs like India rub- 
 ber ; this not only unites the vertebra, but per- 
 mits them to move in different ways. There 
 is an opening in each vertebra ; by a union of 
 these openings a canal is formed the whole length 
 of the spinal column, in which the spinal cord, 
 or pith of the back-bone is placed. 
 
 Ohscrvalion. A good idea of the structure of 
 
 the verlebra may be obtained bv examining the 
 
 _ ,-, — 
 
 ipinal column of a domestic animal. 
 
u 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 
 The spinal column is a very curious and per- 
 fect piece of mechanical art ; by its structure 
 great strength and flexibility are combined. 
 The vertt^bra are so firmly joined together that 
 they are seldom dislocated without fracture. 
 
 The pelvis is composed of four bones. They 
 are so arranged as to form a long basin The 
 spinal column rests on these bones, and they 
 also serve to support the lower extremities. In 
 the sides of these bones is a deep, round cavity, 
 called ace-tabulum, in which the head of the 
 thigh-bone is placed. 
 
 The upper extremities contain sixty-four 
 bones—the scapula, or shoulder-blade; the 
 clavicle, or collar-bone ; and the bones of the 
 arm, fore-arm, wrist, and hand. The scapula 
 is a broad, irregular bone, situated upon the 
 upper and back part of the chest. The clavicle 
 is a thin bone at the base of the neck ; it is 
 joined at one extremity to the sternum, at tt« 
 other to the scapula. 
 
 Observation. The use of the clavicle is to 
 keep the arms from sliding toward the breast. 
 Children she M frequently throw their arras 
 backward, as this exercise would increase the 
 length of this bone, and also enlarge the chest. 
 The arm is formed by a single bone, this is 
 caiied the fiu-mer-us. 
 
ANATOMY OP THE BONES. 
 
 75 
 
 The fore-arm is formed of two bones — *he 
 ulna and the radius— the one on the inside and 
 the other on the outside, on which the thumb is 
 placed By a beautiful arrangement of these 
 bones the hand is made to turn, and permits its 
 varied movements. 
 
 The wrist is formed of eight irregular bones, 
 which move but little upon each other. 
 
 The hand consists of nineteen bones — five in 
 the palm, and fourteen in the fingers and thumb. 
 Each finger consists of three bones, of different 
 lengths ; the thumb has but two. Proofs of a 
 divine and all-wise Creator are nowhere more 
 visible than in the formation of the human hand. 
 
 The lower extremities contain sixty bones — 
 the femur, or thigh-bone ; the patella, or knee- 
 pan ; the tibia, or shin-bone ; the fibula, or small 
 bones of the leg ; and the bones of the foot. 
 
 The femur is the longest bone in the body. 
 It supports the weight of the head, trunk, and 
 upper extremities. The tibia and fibula are 
 situated between the knee and ankle. The foot 
 is formed of twenty-six bones — seven in the 
 instep, five in the middle of the foot, and four- 
 teen toe-bones. 
 
 Observation. The bones of the foot are so 
 
 nniti^d flS to trivA \t ^\\(* fnrm nf an arnh nnnxri^'^ 
 
76 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 hill 
 
 on its upper surface, and concave on the lower 
 
 sai-fuce. 
 
 The bones consist of animal and earthy 
 matter, the earthy matter being pho:^|ihate and 
 carbonate of lime. To show the animal w thouk 
 the earlhy matter of the bones, immfrse a 
 Blender hone for a few days in ; weak a^id, one 
 part muriatic, and six parts water; it can then 
 be bent in any direction. To show th« earthy 
 without the animal matter, burn a bone in clear 
 fire for a short time, and it will become white 
 and brittle. ; 
 
 Joints form an interesting part of the body. 
 They are composed of the extren)ities of two or 
 more I Jnes, cartilages, synovial membrane, and 
 ligaments. 
 
 Cartilage is a smooth, solid, elastic substance 
 that covers the ends of the bones ihat form a 
 a joint. It prevents the <-nds of the bones from 
 wearing off, and also diminishes the jar that the 
 joints receive in walking or leaping. 
 
 The synovial membrane is a thin membranous 
 layer which covers the cartilages, and is thence 
 bent back upon the inner surface of the jiga- 
 ments which surround and enter into the com- 
 position of t AQ joints. This membrane forms a 
 closed sac. 
 
PHYSIOLOGY OP THE BONES. 
 
 77 
 
 The ligaments are strong unelastic substances ; 
 they serve to connect and bind together the 
 bones of the body. 
 
 Observation. Tue joints of the domestic ani- 
 mals are similar iu those of r.an in their con- 
 struction. To illustrate this {)art of the body a 
 fresh J 'irit of a caif luay be r id. 
 
 Physiologv op the Bo.\es. The bones are 
 the frame v.ork of the body. They support all 
 the soft part-s of i., as the lesh and vessels, and 
 likewise aflford a firm surface for the attachment 
 of the ligaments. The use of the various bones 
 is difterei M some protect O'^^ans, as those of 
 the h>,\\\\ and chest ; whi' others are used when 
 we move, as those of the spinal column The 
 bones are covered with a firm skin called perios- 
 teum. This membrane and the bones, when 
 healthy, give but little pain ; but if wounded, as 
 in *' felons," ihe pain is very aevere. The joints 
 are supplied with h flud synovia. This acts 
 like oil upon a machine. T^y the smooth car- 
 tilages and synovia the j. int • are enabled to 
 bear all their motions durl - a great number of 
 years. The joints vary in their functions • some 
 are movable, other.^ ar** immovable. The rnion 
 of the spinal column with ihe skull is one of the 
 most ingenious contrivauces to be met w' in 
 
78 
 
 MAN DISPLAYKD. 
 
 the body, permitting its motion of nodding, bow- 
 ing and turning the head from side to side. 
 This admirable piece of mechanism affords great 
 protection to the spinal cord at the top of the 
 necif, this being, perhaps, the most vital portion 
 of the whole body ; injury to it, or pressure upon 
 it, is instantly fatal. Some joints move but in 
 one direction, like the hinge of a door, these are 
 called hinge joints ; others move in different 
 directions, like a ball in a socket, as the shoulder 
 and hip joint. 
 
 Observation, The more movable the joint 
 the leas firm it is, and the more easily dislocated. 
 It is for this reason that the shouldei* joint is 
 more frequently put out than any other in the 
 body. 
 
 The Muscles. All the great motions of the 
 body are caused by the movement of some of the 
 bones which form the frame work of the body ; 
 but these, independently of themselves, have not 
 the power of motion, and only change their posi- 
 tion through the action of the other organs 
 attached to them, which, by contracting, draw 
 the bones after them. These moving organs are 
 the muscles. 
 
 Anatomy of the Muscles. A muscle is 
 composed of many little strings called fibres. 
 
ANATOMY OF THB MUSCLES. 
 
 79 
 
 Some of these fibres run in straighc lines, others 
 spread hke a fan. while some are inclined like 
 the fr. M^ part of a, quill. Towards the 
 extren). muscle the fibres unite, and form 
 
 a subn;,.. of a whitish color, harder and 
 toughof ♦>: -, the muscle; this is called a ten- 
 don, or cinew. 
 
 Observation. A piece of boiled beef, or the 
 leg of a fowl, will illustrate the structure of the 
 fibres and tendons of a muscle, with the attach- 
 ment of the tendons to the bones. 
 
 Tendons have different shapes. Sometimes 
 they are long, slender strings ; sometimes they 
 are short and thick ; again, in other situa- 
 tions they are thin and broad. They serve to 
 fasten the muscles to the bones and to each 
 other. 
 
 Observation, When the synovial membrane, 
 which forms the sheath of the tendons, is rup- 
 lured, and the synovial fluid escapes, it is called 
 a weeping sinew ; on horses it is called a wind 
 gall. 
 
 In some parts of the body there is bat one 
 layer of muscle over the bones ; in other parts 
 there are five or six layers, one above the other. 
 They are separated by a thin whitish membrane, 
 called fascia. In general the muscles form two 
 
ill 
 
 80 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 layers about the bones, called the external and 
 deep f^ealed, or those nearest the bone. There 
 * *bur hundred and forty-six musclea in the 
 . body; to these, and the fat that sur 
 ! :i;i»ds and fills the spaces in the muscles, we 
 are indebted for the roundness of our limbs. 
 
 Observation. "When we are sick, and cannot 
 take food, the body is fed with this fat; the 
 removal of ir. into the blood causes the sunken 
 cheek, hollow eye, and prominent appearance of 
 the bones after a severe sickness. 
 
 When we Jook at this •' harp of a thousand 
 strings," and mark the rapid, complicated, yet 
 accurate movements it performs in a day, our 
 thoughts are lost in wonder in contemplating 
 this superb and intricate machine, framed by the 
 divine Architect. 
 
 Physiology of the Mi:scles. Every motion 
 of the body is made by the contraction of the 
 muscle;-, from the firm and steady step of the 
 soldier, to the light and fairy-like step of the 
 dancer. 
 
 Illustration. The muscles are to the bones 
 what the ropes are to the sails of the ship; by their 
 action the sails and yards are changed ; so, by the 
 action of the ntiuscles, the position of the bones of 
 the body is changed. Each fibre of the several 
 
 ai 
 
AN'ATOMY OF THE MUSCLES. 
 
 81 
 
 muscles receives from the brain, through the 
 nervous filament appropriated to it, a certain 
 influence called nervous fluid. It is this that 
 induces contraction ; they are full, hard, and 
 more prominent when they are contracted than 
 when they are relaxed. It is a suspension of 
 this fluid that causes relaxation of the fibres. 
 The eyebrows are elevated or raised by the 
 contraction of the muscles on the forehead. 
 The eyes are closed by the contraction of the 
 muscle thatsurrounds them. The spinal column 
 is kept erect by the muscles at the lower and 
 back part of iho trunk. The body is bent for- 
 ward and the ribs brought down by the con- 
 traction of muscles on the front and lower part 
 of the trunk. The muscles that bend the lower 
 limbs, at the hip, are situated at the lower and 
 front part of the trunk, and the upper and front 
 part of the thigh. 
 
 The lower limbs are extended at the hips by 
 the muscles on the lower and back part of the 
 trunk, and the upper and oack part of the thigh. 
 
 Ohscrmtion. It would weary the patience of 
 the reader, and be uninteresting to him, to 
 know the location of each muscle that governs 
 every motion of the body. It, howeve,-, would 
 be a profifable exercise for pupils to press their 
 fingers upon prominent muscles, and at the same 
 
 F 
 
82 
 
 MAi\ DISPLAYED. 
 
 fc'i 
 
 li!f 
 
 time vigorously contract them, not only to learn 
 their situations, but their use ; as the one that 
 bends the arm. 
 
 Digestive Orga\s. The food, whether ani- 
 mal or vegetable, h: s no resemblance to the 
 bones, muscles, or other parts of the body to 
 which it gives sustenance. It must undergo 
 certain essential alterations before it; can become 
 ft part of the different stru'ctures of the body. 
 The first change is t^ffected by the action of the 
 digestive organs. 
 
 Anatomy o^' the Diosstfye Organs. The 
 digestive organs are tbe mouth, teeth, salivary 
 glands, pharyn, esophagtis, or gullet; stomach, 
 intestines, lactaels, thoracic duct, liver, and 
 pancreas, or sweet bread. 
 
 The mouth is an irregular cavity which con- 
 tains the teeth and the organs of taste. 
 
 The salivary glands are six in number : three 
 m each side of the jaw. They are called the 
 parotid, the submaxillary, and the sublingual. 
 
 The pharynx is a muscular membranous sao 
 that leads to the esophagus. 
 
 The esophagus is a large membranous tube, 
 through which the food and drink pass into the 
 stomach. 
 
 The stomach is in the left side of the body, 
 below the lungs and heart; it is composed of 
 
ANATOMV OF THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 83 
 
 three coats or membranes, which are thin and 
 yielding; Ihe external iscalledsironx; the mid- 
 dle, muscular ; the inner, mucas. 
 
 Illmtration. The three coats of the stomach 
 resemble tripe, which is a preparation of the 
 largest stomach of the cow or ox ; the outer 
 coat js smooth and highlv polished ; the middle 
 coat IS composed of min, o threads which are 
 arranged in two layers; tb- fibres of these layers 
 cross each other ; the in, .r coat is soft, andpre- 
 sents many folds usual;.v called the "honey 
 
 The intestines are divided into two parts, the 
 smal am, the large ; the small intestine is about 
 twenty.five feet in length; the upper and mo!t 
 important division is called the duodenum ■ the 
 arge intestine is about five feet in length '• the 
 largest division is called the colon. The duo 
 denum or second stomach, is the most essential' 
 part of the small intestine ; it is about twelve 
 mches in length, and commences at the lower 
 orifice of the stomach. 
 
 The lactaals are minute vessels which open 
 upon he mucous surface of the small intestine • 
 rom the intestine they pass through small glands 
 to the thoracic duct. 
 
 The thoracic duct commences behind the liv 
 er and ascends in front of the spinal column; 
 
Si 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 at the lower part of the neck it turns downward 
 and forward, and pours its contents into the 
 vein l)ehind the collar hone ; this duct is about 
 the size of a goose quill in diameter. 
 
 The liver it? on thu right side of the body, be- 
 low the right lung ; on tiie under side of this or- 
 gan is a small sac which contains a yellow, bit- 
 ter fi'iid called gall. 
 
 Ohscrration. The bile does not flow into the 
 healthy stomach, but in into the duod^'niim. — 
 With some persons the imagination is bilious 
 not the stomach. 
 
 The pancreas is a long flattened organ, situ- 
 ated bt'hind and below the stomach; from it there 
 flows a fluid into the duodenum, called the pan- 
 cratic juice. 
 
 The spleen or milt, so called, because the an- 
 cients supposed it to be the seat of melancholy, is 
 an oblong flattened organ, situated in the left 
 side in contact with the stomach and pancreas; 
 its use is not well understood. 
 
 The caul is composed of a depose matter, de- 
 posed between layers of sirous membrane; it is 
 attached to the stomach and lies on the anterior 
 surface of the intestines. In some persons of 
 gross habits, the caul is large. 
 
 Physiology of thk Digkstive Organs. — 
 Substances taken into the stomach as food, must 
 
 nil 
 
 I 
 
PHYSIOLOGY OF THE DIGKSTfVE ORGANS. 85 
 
 oecessarily nndergo many changes before they 
 can become parts of the animal frame ; the sol- 
 id portions are reduced to a fluid state, and those 
 parts that will nourish the body are separated 
 from the waste material. The first change in 
 the food is made in the mouth, by the action of 
 the teeth, and the saliva or spittle from the sal- 
 vary glands. The teeth divide, while the saliva 
 moistens the food, so that when carried into the 
 pharynx, it is passed with ease through the es- 
 ophagus into the stomach ; as soon as the food is 
 passed into the esophagus its muscular coat con- 
 tracts upon it successively from above down- 
 ward, and the alimentary ball is pressed onward 
 into the stomach. 
 
 Observation. The process of swallowing or 
 deglutition, is easily observed when a person 
 passes either fluid or solid food into the stomach. 
 The next change in \\\^ food is in the stomach ; 
 the coats of the stomach contract and the food 
 is moved round, while at the sa.ne time a pecu- 
 liar fluid is supplied by the stomach called gas- 
 trie juice, which mixes with the food, and re- 
 duces it to a soft, pulpy mass called chyme.— 
 This pulpy grayish substance is passed into the 
 d'lodenum, and by theactionof the bile and pan- 
 crcHtic juiceitis changed into two parts, a milk 
 
 I 
 
MAN DISPLAVBn. 
 
 lite substance called chyle, and residnum or 
 waste matter. 
 
 The chyle or residnum passes from the duode- 
 numm to the remainingportions of the small intes- 
 tine, and are moved along by a worm like action 
 of Its parts. As these two substances move 
 along the intestine, the chyle is sucked up by 
 the lacteal vessels that pass through the small 
 mtestmes, and the residnum is carried into the 
 large mtestine, and excreted from the system. 
 
 To Capitulate. The food passes through 
 five changes before it becomes a part of the hu- 
 Mian frame. 1st. It is changed iu the mouth 
 by the action of the teeth and saliva ; this is call- 
 ed mastication. 2d. I3y the action of the stom- 
 aoh and gastric juice ; it is changed into a pulpy 
 mass ; this is called chymification. 3d In the 
 duodenum, the bile and pancreatic juice chan-e 
 the chyme into chyle ; this is called chylification 
 4th. By the action of the lacteal vessels and 
 thoracic duct, the chyle is poured into a vein be- 
 hmd the collar bone and passes through the 
 heart to the lungs ,• here, by the action of the air 
 It becomes blood. 5th. The separation and ex- 
 cretion of the residnum. 
 
 Circulatory Organs. The blood is dis- 
 tributed to every part of the system ; there is 
 
ANATOMY OP THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 87 
 
 no part so minute that it does not receive this 
 circulating fluid; this distribution is effected 
 by the agency of the heart, arteries, veins and 
 capillaries. 
 
 Anatomy of the Circulatory Organs — 
 The heart is situated in the chest, betweea 
 the lungs; it is a double organ, or has two 
 sides, called right and left, which are separated 
 by a muscular septum or partition ; each side of 
 the heart has two cavities, the upper cavity is 
 called the auricle or deaf ear, the lower cavity 
 IS called the ventricle. These cavities are sep- 
 arated from each other by folds of membrane 
 called valves. 
 
 Between the auricle and the ventricle of 
 the right side of the heart, there arc three 
 valves, called tricuspid. Between the auricle 
 and ventricle of the left side of the heart, there 
 are two valves, called mitral. 
 
 Observation, The heart of the calf when ex- 
 amined, will give a correct idea of the situation 
 of these valves. The arteries are the vessels 
 that carry the blood from the heart. The right 
 ventricle of the heart gives rise to the pulmon- 
 ary artery; the left ventricle gives rise to the 
 aorta. At the commencement of both of these 
 vessels are valves, and from their shape they 
 are called semi-lunar. 
 
88 
 
 MAN DISPLAYRD. 
 
 
 Observation. The parts of the circulatory 
 organs most liable to disease, are the valves of 
 the heart, particularly the mitral. When these 
 membranous folds become ruptured the bl?od re- 
 gurgitates and causes great distress in breath- 
 ing- 
 
 The Pulmonary Artery commences in front of 
 the aorta. It ascends obliquely to the under 
 surface of the arch of the aorta, where it divides 
 into two branches, one of which passes to the 
 right, and the other to the left. This artery 
 conveys the vendus blood to the lungs, and with 
 Its corresponding veins establishes a pulmonic 
 circulation. 
 
 The aorta proceeds from the left ventricle of 
 the heart, and contains the pure or "arterial" 
 blood. This vessel gives off branches which di- 
 vide and subdivide as they advance, until they 
 are distributed to every part of the body. This 
 artery with its corresponding veins, establishes 
 the systemic circulation. 
 
 The veins are the vessels which return the 
 blood to the auricles of the heart, after it has 
 been circulaled by the arteries through the 
 lungs and other parfs of the body. At certain 
 intervals they are furnished with valves which 
 allow the blood to flow toward the heart only. 
 
CIRCULATORY OROANS. 
 
 89 
 
 In general, they are nearer the surface of the 
 body than the arteries. 
 
 The Capillaries constitute a microscopic net- 
 work, and are so distributed through every part 
 of the body, as to render it impossible to intro- 
 duce the smallest needle beneath the skin, with- 
 out wounding several of these fine vessels ; they 
 establish a communication between the termina- 
 tion of the arteries and the beginning of the 
 veins. 
 
 riiVSrOLOGV OF THE ClIfCULATOUV OrQAIVS. 
 
 —The walls of the cavities of theheart are com- 
 posed of muscular fibres, which are endowed 
 with the property of contracting and relaxing its 
 muscles. The contraction and relaxation of the 
 muscular fibres of the heart increase and dimin- 
 ish the size of its cavities. The two auricles di- 
 late at the same instant, and also contract at 
 the same instant. The two ventricles contract, 
 while the auricles dilate. Thus the blood is 
 forced to every part of the system, from the 
 the heart, and received again on its return. The 
 course of the blood through the heart, arteries 
 and veins, may be easily comprehended by at- 
 tention. The heart aids in forcing the blood 
 through the arteries to the dilferent parts of the 
 body. Every time the heart contracts, there is 
 a " pulse " in the arteries. 
 
90 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 ■ 
 
 Experiment. Apply the fingers upon the ar- 
 tery at the wrist at two different points, about 
 two inches apart ; if the pressure be moderately 
 made, the " pulse " will be felt at both points. 
 Let the upper point be pressed liriuly, and there 
 will be no pulsation at the lower point ; but 
 make strong pressure on the lower point only, 
 and the pulsation will continue at the upper 
 point, proving that the blood flows from the 
 heart in the arteries, to different parts of the 
 system. 
 
 The frequency of the pulse varies according 
 to the age. sex, and degree of health. In adults 
 it is usually from seventy to seventy five "beats," 
 in a minufce. There is no pulsation iu the veins, 
 and the return of the blood to the heart through 
 them, can be shown by the following experi- 
 ments. 
 
 Experiments. Press lirmly on one of 
 the veins upon the back of the hand, carrying 
 the pressure towards the fingers; for a moment 
 the vein will disappear. On removing the pres- 
 sure of the finger, it will reappear, from th® 
 blood rushing in from below. If a tape be tied 
 round the arm, above the elbow, the veins be- 
 low will become larger, and also a greater num- 
 ber will appear. At this time, apply the finger 
 at the wrist, and the pulsation of the arteries 
 
ABSOKPTION. 
 
 91 
 
 Still rmtlnnps, showing that the blood is con- 
 tinually flowiDfr from the heart, through the ar- 
 teries, in h i^ . and the increased size of 
 the vdns -ows that the pressure of the tape 
 prevents its flowing back to the heart. 
 
 iBSOKpfio.v. Absorption is the process 
 by which the nutrient portion of the food 
 is removed from the alimentary canal, to 
 be conveyed into circulatory vessels. It is 
 likewise th process by which the particles of 
 matter that have become 'ijurious or useless, 
 are removed from the ii iss of fluids and solids, 
 of which the body is composed. These removing 
 processes are performed by two sets of vessels. 
 Anatomy of the Ly.mpiiatic Vessels. The 
 vessels that act exclusively for the growth and 
 renovation of the system, are found only in the 
 alimentary canal. They are called lacteals.— 
 The vessels whose whole functions are to re- 
 move particles of matter already deposited, are 
 called Lymphatics. The radicals of the veins, 
 in many, and it may be in all parts of the body, 
 perform the office of absorption. 
 
 The Lymphatic vessels are very minute at 
 their commencement ; so much so that tl y can- 
 not be seen without the aid of a magnifying 
 glass ; as they proceed, they unite and form 
 larger trunks that open into the veins. 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 % 
 
 /. 
 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 l^|28 
 
 IL25 ill 1.4 
 
 |Z2 
 
 18 
 
 1.6 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 iV 
 
 .ci\^ 
 
 :i>^ 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 :\ 
 
 q>^ ^\ WrS 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 % 
 
 V 
 
 '%^ 
 
r 
 
 
■^■^Pi 
 
 92 
 
 MAN DISPLAYKD. 
 
 Lymphatic vessels are found in every part of 
 the body except the brain, yet it is supposed 
 they exist in this organ. The knotted appear- 
 ance of these vessels, is owing to the arrange- 
 ment of tjjeir internal coats to form valves. In 
 certain parts of the body, as in the neck, these 
 vessels pass through small, soft bodies, called 
 Lymphatic glands, which are to the vessels 
 what the mesentirce glands are to the lacteals. 
 
 Observation. Sometimes when we are afflic- 
 ted with a C0I4 these glands in the neck enlarge; 
 they are then usually called "kernels." 
 
 Physiology op the Lymphatic Vessels. 
 
 Though the lacteals and lymphatics resemble 
 each other in their structure and termination, yet 
 they differ as to the nature of »be fluids which they 
 convey, as well as the nature of their func- 
 tions. The lacteals open into the small intes- 
 tine, and possess the power of rejecting all sub- 
 stances in the passing of food but the chyle. The 
 Lymphatics on the contrary, not only imbibe or 
 suck up all the various constituents of the body, 
 both fluid and solid, when their vitality has 
 ceased, but they absorb extraneous matter when 
 presented to their mouth:^. 
 
 Observation. When little or no food is 
 taken info the stomach, life is supported by 
 the lymphatics imbibing the fat, and reconvey- 
 
SECHETION. 
 
 93 
 
 ing it to the circulatory vessels. It is the re- 
 moval of this substance which causes the emaci- 
 ation of the face and limbs of a person recover- 
 ing from a fever. In Consump;ion, the extreme 
 attenuation of the limbs is caused by the .bsorp. 
 tion, not only of the fat, but also of the muscles 
 and more solid parts of the body. Animals 
 which live in a half torpid state during the win- 
 ter, derive their nourishment from the same 
 source ; in other words, half starving animals 
 live for a time on themselves. The most absorb- 
 ing surfaces are the stomach, intestines, lungs 
 and skin ; through the lungs, absorption is not 
 only very great, but extremely rapid. 
 
 Illustration. In inhaling sulphuric ether, or 
 lethion, it is introduced into the vessels of the 
 lungs in the form of vapor, and through them 
 it is rapidly conveyed to the blood, and thus 
 influences the nervous system. 
 
 SECHETroN. In the human body are found 
 many fluids and solids of dissimilar appearance 
 and character. These are produced by the ac- 
 tion of the organs called secretory. Some of 
 these organs are of simple structure, while oth- 
 ers are very complicated in their arrangement. 
 
 AVATOMY OF THE SECRETORY OrGANS.— 
 
 The secretory o.^tans are of three kinds, name- 
 ly r—the exhalents, follicles and the glands. 
 
94 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 m 
 
 The exbalents are supposed to be the ter- 
 mination of the arterios ; they are of two kinds, 
 external and internal, the latter terminate on 
 the surfaces within the body, and the former on 
 the outside. 
 
 The follicles arci small bags in the deeper 
 layer of the skin and mucous membrane ; the 
 pores seen on the outside of the skin are the 
 outlets of these bodies, 
 
 'i'he glands are the chief agents of secretion 
 in the body. They are formed of minute arte- 
 ries, veins, and' tubes wound together; these or- 
 gans vary in size from a mustard seed to that of 
 the liver, which weighs from two to four pounus. 
 Every gland, however minute, has a small duct 
 for collecting and carrying off the secreted fluid. 
 
 PlIYSIOLOGV OF THE SeC'RETOHY OuGANS.— 
 
 Secretion is one of the most obscure functions 
 of the body; it has the same meaning as separa- 
 tion. Not only is the process by which substances 
 are separated from the blood, called secretion, 
 but the same terra is applied to substances thus 
 separated. All the fluids of the body are deriv- 
 ed from the blood, and this fluid when distribu- 
 ted to the different glands and follicles is similar 
 in composition ; but the fluid secreted by them, 
 varies in appearance in a remarkable degree.-— 
 The oflice of the glands is principally to form 
 
NLTRITIOX.— SERUM. 
 
 96 
 
 different secretionjthus the salivary glands secrete 
 the insipid saliva; the liver, the yellow ropy bile- 
 and the kidneys, the acrid urine. When any 
 substance which is not wanted for nutrition, or 
 does not give nourishment to the system, is taken 
 up by the lymphatic vessels and conveyed 
 into the blood ; it is discharged by secretions. 
 
 Illustration. A few years ago a poor inebri- 
 ate was carried to a London Hospital in a state 
 of intoxication; he lived but a few hours. On ex- 
 amining his brain, nearly half a gill of iuid 
 strongly impregnated with gin, was found in the 
 cavities of this organ; this was secreted from the 
 vessels of the brain. 
 
 Nutrition. The blood is the nutritive fluid 
 of animals. It is composed of two parts, a watery 
 fluid called serum, and a solid portion called 
 clot. In healthy blood, these two parts sepa- 
 rate spontaneously on standing; the crassamentum 
 or clot coagulates and forms a red solid mass, 
 while the serum surrounds it in the form of a 
 yellowish fluid. 
 
 Sekum. The serum contains a small quanti- 
 ty of soda in a free state, and is 29 parts in 
 1000 heavier than water; it consists in part of 
 albumen, and is coagulated by heat, acids and 
 alcohol. The crassamentum consists of two 
 parts, the fibrin and the coloring matter; the 
 
HBB- 
 
 96 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 fibrin does not differ, except in form, from that 
 obtained from lean fle-li. 
 
 Observation. Fibrin is the lean part nf the 
 flesh of animals. This may be separated and 
 observed in its pure state by removing the solu- 
 ble parts of lean beef, cut into small pieces, by 
 repeated washing-, and digestion in water. Fi- 
 brin is composed of 18 parts of carbon. 14 parts 
 of hydrogen, 5 of oxygen, and 3 or' nitrogen.— 
 Iron is found to exist in the rt'd globules of the 
 blood. It is infered from this, that it. is the pres- 
 ence of this metal which gives the blood its red 
 color, though ;t.s quantity is found to be only 
 half a grain to 100 grains of globule. The blood 
 is not necessaiily red; it may be white as in the 
 fish, transparent as in the insect, or yellowish 
 as in the reptile. There is no animal in which 
 the blood is red in all parts of the body. The 
 ligaments and tendons in man, are not supplied 
 with red, but with white blood. 
 
 Nutrition is the vital act by which the differ- 
 ent parts of the body renew the materials of 
 which they are composed. Digestion, circula- 
 tion, absorption and respiration, are but separate 
 links in the chain of nutrition, wiiich would be 
 
 destroyed by the absence of any one of them. 
 
 The nutritive process is a kind of secretion,, by 
 which panicles of matter are separated from 
 
MT.ITION.— SERLM. 
 
 97 
 
 th« blood, and conveyed wifh wonderful accura- 
 cy to the appropriate parts of the body The 
 functions of the nutrient vessels antagonize 
 those of absorption. While one system is con- 
 structing with beautiful precision the animal 
 frame, the other is diligently employed in pulling 
 down this complicated structure ; but amid this 
 simiultaneous renovation and decay, the form 
 and beauty of the organs are preserved. 
 
 Ohservation. This everchanging state of ihe 
 body IS shown, by giving animals colored mat- 
 ter mixed with their food, which, in a short time 
 tinges their bones with the same colour as tha 
 matter introduced. Let it be withdrawn, and in 
 a few days the bones will assume their former 
 color-evidently from the effects of absorption 
 The changeful state of the body is also shown by 
 the losses which it sustains-by the necessity of 
 aliment-by the emaciation which follows absti- 
 nence from food. 
 
 Th. oody loses 20 ounces of refuse matter 
 every 24 hours. The renewal of every part of the 
 body IS not perfected merely by the passage of 
 tbe blood through the arteries of the systLic 
 circulatmn, but by the smallest capillary vessels 
 called the vessels of nutrition. As the blood 
 goes the round of circulation, the nutrient capil. 
 Jary vessels select and secrete those parts which 
 
 G 
 
98 
 
 MAN DISi'LAVED. 
 
 are similar to the nature of stracturt', and the 
 others pass on, so that every part takes up and 
 converts to its own use the very principles which 
 it requires for its growth; or, in other words, 
 as the vital current approaches each organ, the 
 particles appropriate to it, feel its attractive 
 force — obey it — quit the ^^(reani, mingle with the 
 substance of its texture, and are changed into 
 its own true and proper nature. 
 
 Illustration. When a bont> is broken, or a 
 uerve wounded, minute vessol < shoot out from 
 the living parts, and immediately commenc(5» 
 their operation by depositing bony matter where 
 it is required to unite fractured bones, and ner- 
 vous substance to heal the wounded nerve. 
 
 Uespiiiatorv Organs, or Respiration. — 
 Respiration is the act of breathing, and consists 
 of nothing more than alternately drawing into 
 and throwing out of the lungs a quantity of at- 
 mospheric air,and it appears that this process,or 
 an equi\alent one, is necessary to f^upport ani- 
 mal life. 
 
 The atmosphere, as formerly shown, is com- 
 posed of 79 parts of nitrogen, 20 parts of Oxy- 
 gen, and 1 part of carbon, and it is found by ex- 
 periment,that no ether gaseous compound can be 
 substituted for respiration; nor can these pro| or- 
 tions be varied without injury to its qualities. — 
 
AN.TOMV OP TH. R«SP,«.T0HV „«„.^,. 99 
 
 The immediate effect, of respiration is to pro 
 dnco a change in the color of the blnL -l 
 passes through the ,n„g, thnl iL cX"h.' 
 It suffers some change in its properties -t 7. 
 
 blood seems to be produced entirely bvT 
 loss of carbon, which the firmer suffers whl 
 passmg through the lungs. The n,^r ' » 
 «onof the food is poure'd i to hVveS X 
 lower part of the neclc. and is carrifd to !h 
 nght cavities of the heart. The flu d i„ ,h 
 cavities consist, of the obvle mLd Jf J ,? 
 venous blood ; neither of tiesetw element ' 
 fitted to promote the growth or Z T ' '" 
 of the body. They r!:::teZZZi:r^ 
 cess, by which they can beconvertjt M^T 
 and the second freed fr»™ T • °'°'''»<'^' 
 bonic acid and water T- ' ""P"""'*'' ««- 
 BespiratoryOrgals '"'"'^*^*«*«'">y*'"' 
 
 Anatomy op thb Eesp.batorv o«(m», 
 Ihe organs of respiration are the lun^ t" 
 obea, bronchia, the air cells : d,aphra/m' K 
 and several muscles aid in the rlslTf ' 
 
 cess. The lungs are conical nXjL'''" 
 •ach side of the chest, embracing th! hi T "" 
 
100 
 
 MA;N DISPLAVKD. 
 
 li- 
 te:* ■; 
 
 They are composed of air chMm and air tubes, 
 besides many small blood ves«els. P^ach lung 
 is surrounded by a membrane ealled the pleura, 
 which not only nurrounda these organs, but is 
 reflected upon the walls of the ehest. The lungs 
 however, are on the outHi.je of tlie pleura, in the 
 same way as the head is on the outside of a cap 
 when doubled upon itself. 
 
 Obserrntion. When this membrane that cov- 
 ers thelungs.and also lines thechest,is inflam«d, 
 the disease is called pleurisy. 
 
 The trachea is situated iu the front part of 
 the neck, and extends from the mouth to the 
 lungs ; it is composed of cartilagenous rings, 
 which are very elastic. 
 
 The bronchia are the divisions of the trachea 
 at its lower extremity, behiod the upper part of 
 the heart; one part or branch passes to the right 
 lung, and the other to the left ; 1 heae branches, 
 upon entering the lung, divide info almost an 
 infinite number of smaller branches. 
 
 Illustration. — The trachea may be compared 
 to the trunk of a tree, the bronchia to two large 
 branches, the subdivision of the bronchia to the 
 branches,and twigs,the air cells to the buds seen 
 on the twigs in the spring. 
 
 Air Cells. These are very small bladders 
 at the end of the minute divisions of the bron- 
 
PHVSIOLOOY OP THE UKSIMRATOHY ORGANS. 101 
 
 ehia ; their walls are very thin, the interior of 
 wh.eh, as well as the trachea and bronchia, are 
 lm.^d by nmcons njembran© ; these cells are va- 
 riable in size, and are most numerous in the mid- 
 dle and lower part of the lungs. 
 
 Observation. When the mucous membrane 
 of a few of the larger branches of the wind 
 pipe is slightly inflammed, it is called a cold • 
 when the inflamation is greater, and extends to 
 the lesser air tubes, it is called brochitis ; cough- 
 ing is a violent expulsory effort, by which air is 
 suddenly forced through the bronchia and tra- 
 chea, to remove offending matter. 
 
 The diaphragm is a flexible, circular partition 
 that separate the respiratory from the digestive 
 organs, and the chest from the abdomen. Its 
 margin is attached to the spinal column, the 
 sternum, and the lower ribs. In a state of re- 
 pose, its centre rises into the chest in the form 
 of an arch. When air is forcibly expelled from 
 the lungs, its upper part reaches as high as the 
 fourth rib ; it is depressed as low as the seventh 
 nb, when air is drawn into the lungs. 
 
 Physiology op the Respiratoky Organs 
 When air is drawn into the lungs, the muscular 
 margm of the diaphragm contracts, which de- 
 presses its central portion ; the chest is then en- 
 larged at the expense of the abdomen. At the 
 
 . \ > t 
 
102 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 m i' 
 
 II' ') 
 
 •ametfmo that the diaphragm is depressed, the 
 ire thrust forward and upward by .tieans of 
 iL. .8 placed between and on them ; thua the 
 ohest is enlarged in every direction. The lungs 
 follow the variations of capacity in the chest, 
 expanding their air cells when the latter is on-' 
 larged, and contracting when the chest is dinin- 
 ished. Thus when the chest is expanded, the 
 lungs follow, and consequently a vacuum is pro- 
 duced in the air cells ; the air then rushes 
 through the mouth ^nd nose into the trachea and 
 itfl branches, and fills the vacuum as fast as it is 
 inaut>; this mechanical prcoass constitutes in- 
 spiration. After the expansion of the chest the 
 muscles that elevated the ribs, relax together 
 with the diaphragm. The elasticity of the car- 
 tilages of the ribs depresses them, and the cavi- 
 ty of the chest is diminished, attended by the 
 expulsion of a portion of the air from the lungs, 
 At the same time, the muscles that form the 
 front walls of the abdominal cavity, contract and 
 press the alimentary canal, stomach and liver 
 upward and against the diaphragm ; this, being 
 relaxed, yields to the presure, rises upward and 
 presses upon the lungs, which retreat before it, 
 and another portion of air is expelled from these' 
 organs; this process is called expiration. Thus 
 it is obvious that the enlargement of the chest 
 
PHVilOLOOV or THB RKSPIRATORV OI,«AN«. 109 
 
 or Inspiration, is produced in two way,:_i,t. 
 By (h« depression of the ««„tral arched portion 
 of the dmphragm. 2d. By the elevation of the 
 ribH. On the contrary.the contraction of the chest, 
 or exp,rat,„n, i, produced by the depression of 
 the ribs and elevation of the central part of tha 
 diaphragm. These n,oven,ents are successive 
 during life, and r-onstitute respiration 
 
 Experiment. Place the ear upon the chest 
 01 « person, and a murmuring sound will be 
 heard somewhat lil<o the soft sighing, „f the 
 wind through the forest trees. This sound is 
 caused by the air rushing in and out of the lungs, 
 «nd 18 peculiarly distinct in the child 
 
 As before mentioned, the dark impure blood, 
 that passes from the heart to the lungs, i, unfit 
 to sustain the vital action of the various organ, 
 of ho body. Its impurities must be removed. 
 When this IS done, the blood loses its blackish 
 red colour, and become o.' a bright scarlet red. 
 Th» dart color of the blood is owing to the 
 presence of carbonic aud gas, this is formed in 
 the blood vessels by the union of oarbon and 
 oiygen ; the carbon is the principal element of 
 ot ihe dead waste atoms. 
 
 Oh^ervalion. The presence of carbonic acid 
 and watery vaporin the expired air, can be proT- 
 od by the following experinents : 1st. Breathe 
 
104 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 into limewater,and in a few minutes it will become 
 of a millc white color ; this is owing to the car- 
 bonic acid of the breath uniting with the lime, 
 forming the carbonate of lime. Breathe upon a 
 cold dry mirror, for a few minutes and it will be 
 covered with moisture ; this is condensed va- 
 por from the lungs. In warm weather, this wa- 
 tery vapor is invisible in the expired air ; but,in a 
 cold dry morning in winter, the src-essive jets 
 of vapor issuing from the mouth and nose are 
 sufficiently obvious!. 
 
 We will now pass to the change which the 
 air eflfects when it comes in contact with the 
 blood in the lungs ; as the impure blood is pass- 
 ing in the minute vessels over the air cells, the 
 oxygen passes through the extreme thin coats 
 of the air cells and blood vessels, and unites with 
 the blood ; at the same time the carbonic acid 
 and watery vapor leave the blood, and pass 
 through the coats of the blood vessels and air 
 cells, and mix with the air in the cells, these 
 are expelled from the air cells every time we 
 breatht. This interchange of the gasses pro- 
 duces a change in the color of the blood. 
 
 Experiment, To show that gasses may be 
 interchanged through membranes: fill a 
 bladder with dark blood, tie the bladder 
 
 closely, and suspend it in the air. In 
 
 
ANATOMV OP THE VO.-'AL OltOANS. 105 
 
 hours. tl,e blood nozt the membrane will hare 
 become of a bright, red color, thi, is owing to 
 the oxygen fro„ the air through the bladder, 
 and .^,tmg w.th the blood, while the carbomc 
 acjd has escaped through the membrane. 
 
 The Vow,.. The beautiful mechanism of the 
 Tocal mstruinent. which produces every variety 
 of sound, from a harsh, unmelodious tone, to a 
 soft sweet, flute like sound ; can never be imi- 
 tated by art. It has been compared by many 
 phy...oI„g,sts to a wind. reed, and stringed ia^ 
 strument This i„i„,itable, yet sin,ple Ltru- 
 naent, is the Larynx. 
 
 Anatomy of the Vocal OROAN.s._.The 
 «be,wh,ch taken as a whole, has the general 
 
 "pward toward the tongue i. the shape of an 
 expanded triangle ; it is composed of several 
 p. ces of cartilege that not only connect w..h 
 each other but with the tongue, lower jaw, and 
 
 formed by these cartilages, fourfold, of mem 
 brane, two on each side, oalled vocal cords. 
 
 ca led the glottis, the cavity between the u^! 
 per and lower vocal cords is call„d »i.^ >— -= 
 cle of the larynx. Behind "" "" """" 
 
 the base of the 
 
106 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 tongue, is a piece of cartilage, resembling a leaf 
 of parsley, called the epigloths. The duty of this 
 sentinel is to keep the food and drink from 
 passing into the air-passage or trachea. 
 
 Physiology of thr Vocal Organs. In the 
 formation of the voice.each part already described 
 performs an important office; the cartilages 
 give form and stability to the larynx, and by 
 the action of the muscles attached to them, the 
 width of the glottis i« varied. When air is for- 
 cibly driven from the lungs through the glot!S» 
 it causes a vibration of the vocal cords, this 
 produces sound, and it is varied by the tongue, 
 teeth and the lips. The size of the larynx, the 
 capacity and health of the lungs, the condition 
 of the throat and nasal passages, the elevation 
 and depression of the chin and tongue, and the 
 state of the mind, influence the modulations of 
 the sound. 
 
 The Skin. The skin is a membranous cov- 
 ering, enveloping the bones and other parts of 
 the system. In youth, and in femties particu- 
 larly, it is smooth, soft and elastic. In middle 
 age, and in males it is firm and rough to the 
 touch. In old age, in persons who are emacia- 
 ted, and about the flexions of the joints, it is 
 
 fVi vrk rrrm ir\it\ fnl n a 
 
ANATOMY OF THK RKfN. 
 
 107 
 
 Anatomy of the Skin. The skin of the hu- 
 man body is composed of two layers of mem- 
 brane, namely : the cuticle, and the cutisveraor 
 fcrue skin. 
 
 The cuticle, or that part of the skin which is 
 seen by the eye, is at first a fluid thrown out by 
 the blood vessels over the internal layer of this 
 membrane. While layers of this fluid are con- 
 tinually forming on the upper surface of the true 
 
 ikin,theexternallayers of the fluid become dry, 
 aad resemble small scales. 
 
 Illustration. The cuticle is that part of the 
 skin which is raised by a blister. Sometimes 
 from disease, erysipelas, or fever it comes oflf 
 from the surface of the body in pieces ot con- 
 •iderable size. 
 
 The arrangement of the cuticle, in difl'erent 
 parts of the human body Js worthy of notice; 
 where feeling is most acute, the cuticle is deli- 
 cate and thin ; where it is in motion, as over the 
 Joints, it is lax and moveable ; where it is in 
 constant use, it becomes harder and thicker. 
 
 Illustration. The soles of the h^t and palms 
 of the hands afford good examples of the cuticle 
 thickened by use. 
 
 This part of the skin has no blood vessels or 
 nerves, consequently a needle may be passed 
 ., ,„ „„,,,^ catuiii, ana cause no pain, nor 
 
108 
 
 MAi\ DISPLAVKD. 
 
 W.II any blood ooze out. The cutiele.when clean, 
 look, 1, a th „ shaving „f soft, clear horn ; bu 
 when filled with dust and other foul n,att;r, it 
 becomes dark colored. 
 
 Observation. The hair, nail.,, also the hoofe 
 Of animals, are appendages of the skin ; they are 
 BO connected with the cuticle, that by scalding 
 they come off with this ti.ssue ^ 
 
 cuticle, there .3 a peculiar kind of paint; this 
 olored layer, in,:, Negro, is black; in the In 
 
 light, differing however, in different persons. 
 J^^T T'' "' '""' ^'"■"- '^ •'» <""'«<•- be- 
 of the skin. It contains several setts of vessels 
 
 Z:7 T'J^'"'' ""^ 'y^Phatics; besides 
 thse vessels, there are found both oil and per- 
 spiratorj- glands and nerves. 
 The arteries and veins form uet work upon 
 
 part of this layer of skin, and it will bleed By 
 the arteries, the skin is nourished. 
 
 Oiseroalum. When this layer of the skin is 
 
 destroyed by cuts or burns, it is never formed 
 
 •gain.and produces scars which never disappear. 
 
 1 he nerves, like the blood vessels are very 
 
 numerous, for no part of the skin can be pricked 
 
A.VATOMV OP THR «KIN. 
 
 109 
 
 a serpentine course. '""'''"•' 
 
 The lymphatics are tl„«e small vessel, whi , 
 "pen upon the ioner layer, of the oS Th 
 
 prevent small po^' "' "''" '" ''«"="•''«»>'. to 
 
 ^•■' spiral coil 'arc "tiS: ^n:,??"- 
 
 t-.-il.uponitselfi„J"f;;^-7- 
 
 an oval shaped ball called ,1, "■■" 
 
 gland ^"^ ""* Pe^Piratory 
 
110 
 
 MAN 0!SPLAYKD. 
 
 Observation, When there is an unnatural ae- 
 oumulation of oil in the tubes they cause the 
 grub or worni. 
 
 Physiologv of the Ski\. The skin invests 
 the whole of the external surface of the body, 
 following all its prominences and curves, and 
 gives protection to all the organs it encloses, 
 while each of its several parts has a distinct use. 
 
 The cuticle is insensible, and serves as a 
 sheath of protection to the highly sensitive skin, 
 situated beneath it ; the latter feels, but thj 
 former blunts the impression, which occasions 
 feeling. 
 
 The cuticle, also prevents disease, by imped- 
 ing the evaporation of the fluids of the trse skin, 
 and the absorption of thi^ poisonous vapor,which 
 necessai ily attend various employments. It how- 
 ever, affords protection to the system only when 
 unbroken, and then to the greatest degree, 
 when covered with a proper amount of oily se-' 
 oretion from the oil-glands. 
 
 The nerves of the skin are the organs of thu 
 sense of touch and feeling. Through them we 
 receive many impressions that increase our pleas- 
 ures ; as the grateful sensations imparted by 
 the cooling breeze in a warm day. In conse- 
 quence of their sensitiveness.we are individually 
 protected, by being warned of the nearness of 
 
P«Y»rol.0OY or THE SKIN. . i,j 
 
 iatroftsT?- ^ ''''' P'^P-""" of the 
 
 the kin ^^^ ""''"'' "'™"«'' '"« <>»"«*» of 
 
 sil ^^/''""'^""'■■""""'^^"^""'f-'.oth- 
 ers^.n the forn. of watery vapor and carbolic 
 
 The perspiratory g,a„ds separate from the 
 Wood the per.p,ration or sweat. Ther» are 
 more than 2000 of the.e gUnds in every nuare 
 
 onstan acfon, and the skin i, moist. When 
 th... n,o,,sture cannot be seen, it is called Ten 
 ».bIo perspiration ; when it can be seen n rop" 
 
 ^^eJ^reUd!:,- 
 
 twenty five ounce, of waste .ratter pass ont of 
 h body hrough the pore,, of the skin. If' 
 
 r :: rthi 'Tr:' '""" '"^°^''- «^ «- ^^ 
 
 2b ,f ^^'' "''' 'y''*^"' ''y ""« Wood, di,. 
 CT 01 gan,s. Many cases of chronic coughs, head 
 -he, dyspepsia and diarrh.a, originate 'in t t 
 
 weaken /IT"' "'""' "' '"" "'"''"^ ''»» been 
 weakened, tins „,.gan is more susceptible of dis 
 
 -^e than others. In persons whose lungs are" 
 
 :: i z r^i^i':,^ ".^■•■' ^"' ""-aiateiyfr: 
 
 ""■' ^"" ^^^f*-*' inflammation of these 
 
112 
 
 MAN DISPLAYBI». 
 
 I 
 
 organs. If an individual is predisposed to ^tiff- 
 ness of the joints and rli^'umatic poins, a chill 
 will affect these diseased parts. 
 
 Srnse of Touch. Sensation is an impression 
 made upon the mind, through the medium of 
 the senses. There are five sense, viz ; — Touch, 
 Taste, Smell, Hearing and Vision. 
 
 Touch is the sense that enables us to tell 
 whether a body is rough or sniooih, cold or hot, 
 sharp or blunt ; this sense and feeling reside 
 in the nerves of the skin. The nerves that con- 
 tribute to the sense of touch, proceed from the 
 anterior half of the spinal cord. Where sensa- 
 lion is most acute, we find the greatest num- 
 ber of nervous fillaments, and those of the larg- 
 est size, as at the end of tho fingers and lips. 
 
 Observation. The sense of touch varies in 
 different persons, and also in individuals of dif- 
 ferent ages ; this is modified by the condition of 
 the brain and nerves ; and by cultivation. Blind 
 persons, by whom the beauties of the external 
 world cannot be seen, cultivate this sense to 
 such a degree that they can distinguish objects 
 with great accuracy ; and the rapidity with 
 which they read books prepared for ihem, is a 
 convincing proof of the niueness and extent to 
 which the cultivation of this sens.^ can be car- 
 ried. 
 
SliSSIi OF TASTR. 
 
 113 
 
 SKiVSEoF Taste. Tastn i«, th 
 Which we perceive t„e flVvt f a' t 4""^ 
 ongueisthe principal organ of tatih . 
 
 Poiats the nerve of taJisXard '■*"""'" 
 Observation. — Hv «nnl«}«~ 
 
 This sense has been made to varr T„ j-o- 
 persons in civilized )if« M.f ^' '^"'"'' 
 
 ;;-ar<^-esthatat«rsfsLtVnt^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 chewing tobacco, &o.. these . ' f '"^^^^^'^ ^^^ 
 the seusibilitv of fT! ^^^^'^ ^°^"'g««ces lessen 
 
 Sra'sk op Smell. Smnl] i« ♦!, 
 -bles us to discern the "l ''' ^^"^^ *^^^ 
 
 ^'^'s sense is located in the 
 
 iiose. 
 
 or Ar On 
 
 !ento 
 
 Oi a lij 
 
 H 
 
 ing; 
 air passages of the 
 
114 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 Tho air passages or nostrils, are lined by mu- 
 cous membrane, wbich is continuous with the 
 skin externally, and with tho lining membrane 
 of other cavities which communicate with them. 
 To this membrane, the olfactory nerve is distri- 
 buted. To protect the delicate filaments of the 
 nerve of smell, thus freely exposed to the air, 
 and to the painful stimulus of sharp, pungent 
 oders, the membrane is kept continually moist 
 by a fluid, secreted by the glands with which it 
 is provided. When substances are presented to 
 the nose, the air that is passing through the nos- 
 trils brings the oderiferous particles of matter 
 in contact with the filaments of the nerve of 
 smell, that are spread upon the membrane that 
 lines the air passages, and the impression is then 
 carried to the brain. This sense is closely con- 
 nected with that of taste, and aids man, as well 
 as the inferior animals, in selecting proper food ; 
 it also gives us pleasure by the inhalation of 
 agreeable odors. The sense of smell, like taste 
 and touch, may be improved by cultivation ; thus 
 the North American Indians can easily distin- 
 guish different tribes, and different persons of 
 the same tribe, by the odor of their bodies. 
 
 Observation. Acuteness of smell requires 
 that the brain and nerve of smell be healthy, 
 and that the membrane that linns thA noaa ho 
 
 
SENSE OF VlSlOiV. jj^ 
 
 thin and moist Snuff f„i- 
 
 '"-b.ane, this Jek ,t fl""* 'r'"^ 
 obstructs the passage of a,Wh ^ "'«™l>rane 
 
 and thus obh^es 4 Jirit '''"""''- 
 mouths when they breathe "'"" "■*'■• 
 
 SkNSK of ViSinv rpi . 
 
 -retotheenJoy^eTtau XitoTSfr 
 any of the other senses • l,v ™'''f'»«»than 
 
 form, colour, size and p;,il' ^ T''''' »'><' 
 surround us. The LZT, "''•'*•"" ">«' 
 or sight, is the Eye '""""""-^^'"^ -Won, 
 
 eaWty i„ fr,„, „, ,,/2;' ""^ as placed in . 
 
 fbes are composed of Let " ^'^ 
 
 branes. The interinr „f ^^ ! , ' °' "em- 
 
 certain suhstan'ctlJatrr'Vr '''''■ 
 are three in number- 1st T^! « , ' ""*'« 
 
 Cornea, ad Th« rh / ®'"*™"« ai'd 
 -sa. lie Choroid, Iris «n,i n-i- 
 
 processes. 3d. The Retina. ^^'''^^ 
 
 The humors are a.Un ihv.^^ • 
 
 pal 
 
 with 
 
 support 
 e cornea 
 
 to this 
 
 rma ih^ 
 
 " ynnci' 
 
 this organ. This membrane" 
 in front of the 6Vfl« ® 
 
 the eyes 
 
nc 
 
 MAN DISI'LAVRD. 
 
 Ill 
 
 The cornea ia the tranwparpnt. pnrt of (ho eye 
 In front, which projects more than the rest of the 
 glohe. It is shaped like the crystal of a watch, 
 and, in iiealth, gives the eye its spurltling bril- 
 liancy. The choroid coat is of a dark colour 
 upon its inner siyfiice. It contains a great num- 
 ber of blood vessels, which give nourishment to 
 different [)arts of the eye. 
 
 The iris is siiiiatcd beiiind the cornea ; it is 
 the most delicate of all th« muscles of the body. 
 This part gives the blue, gray or black color of 
 the eye. In the centre of the iris is an open- 
 ing called the pupil. This word is derived from 
 the Latin, pupa, or babe, because it reflects 
 the diminished image of the person who looks 
 upon it. The pupil enlarges or contracts ac- 
 cording to the quantiry that fails upon it. On 
 viewing the part of the eye near the pupil, small 
 lines of a lightyr color will be seen passing to 
 the outer part of the iris ; these are called cili- 
 ary processes. They are about sixty in num- 
 ber. 
 
 The retina is the innermost coat of the eye. 
 It is furnuHl, in part, by an expansion of the 
 optic nerve over the bottom of the eye, where 
 the sor.so of vision is first received. 
 
 The aqueous humor occupies ihe sp ce be- 
 tween the cornea and crystal in >. boUi bef()re 
 and behind the iris humor. 
 
ANATOMV «p •,„« oi;.aNS OK VI.ION. ,1V 
 
 "" "'■■ '"■" ■^"'"»- vvhon i„.ii,.,i, it „";7' 
 
 I Ik. oplic n,.,ve or nerv., „f vision extends 
 f-m t ., brain to ,h. back |,a,-f, of 1I,„ eve 
 wl...r« ,t ..x,,anclH on t.,e ..!,„r„i„ eoat. On h ,' 
 
 ;i':r" " '"'"=" "^ "■« "''j-^ «- ««' 
 
 The eyenrow., and eyelids protect the eye 
 from too strong impressions of li^ht and „l"I„ 
 
 ETirr" "'■'-""' -'"■--: 
 
 Ti,e eyelaslies are attached to the eyelids 
 
 and wen the eye is closed they are interCd 
 and thus prevent particles of matter from injuring 
 this delicate organ. They add greatly to the 
 expression of the eye. 
 
 The eyelids not only protect the eye, by clos 
 2 .t m front, from too brilliant rays of , ' ht" 
 ado dust, but distribute e,„ali over fhe 
 gof' .3 eye a watery fluid secreted by 
 glands w<th which they are provided. Besides 
 h,s t,ere is another fluid (tears) secreted by 
 the lachrymal or tear-gland, above the eye.i 
 
 ducts. As this fluid n»»«<.o L. 
 
 a">aM atoms of dust ar;s-wept7;;;b;i%:: 
 
'f 
 
 118 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 cess of " winking," and with the tears pass into 
 two ducts at the inner corner of both eyelids. 
 
 The orbit, or bony cavity, in which the globe 
 of the eye is placed, is lined with a thick cushion 
 of fat, in order that the eye may move in all 
 directions with perfect freedom and without 
 friction. The eye is moved by six muscles at 
 one end, attached to the bones of the orbit; the 
 other extremity to tLe globe of the eye. 
 
 Observation. If the external muscle is too 
 short the eye is turned out, producing the "wall 
 eye." If the internal muscle is contracted, the 
 eye is turned inward toward the nose. It is 
 then called a " cross eye." 
 
 PHVSIOLOiJY OF THE OrGANS OP VlSION. 
 
 As the eye is strictly an optical instrument, it 
 is necessary to know the laws that regulate the 
 transmission of light, before the use of the dif- 
 ferent parts of this organ can be understood. 
 It is a law of optics that the rays of light, while 
 passing through the same medium, proceed in 
 st-aight lines, but they are turned out of their 
 course when they pass from one medium to 
 another of a different density. They are then 
 said to be refracted. We would also add that 
 the rays of light from an object, in passing 
 through the eye, cross each other. Hence, the 
 
 image of thfl obie^t \h inTroi.f«;i ,>- *i ^_. 
 
 o -« .j__ 5,_jt3^-i. i,-3 i--sTViucu. uu iuk: retina. 
 
PHYSIOLOay OF THB o«,MNS OF VISION. 119 
 
 The .„cce.sio' „": ; oio" sT"' •"""""• 
 ,, ^ ® colours, begmnintr with 
 
 the uppermost, is violet, indigo, blue IreT 
 yellow, orange and red Th. ^ -5 ' 
 
 li„hf„„i„ • "^ tlecomposition of 
 
 ri ^h a TT ""''"''^' ^''»"''' be admitted 
 through a sma 1 aperture into a room, and made 
 to pass through a triangular prism. 
 
 vl^TlZe'^'Z''' r ''''''' '''''''' 
 r ui ineeye. i he eyebrows, eyelids and 
 
 eyelashes are protecting organs to tWs de ieate 
 trun^nt. while the coats give protectlt 
 the more delicate parts within. The transoa 
 rent cornea and humors aremediumsof ff rent 
 that'"' 'M'*' '"' '"■™'="'"' °f '"e rays of gh 
 , . ' "'' '"™' "PO" the retina a small but 
 
 he rays f light upon the re:ina is then carried 
 to the bram by the optic nerve. When the 
 
 old al T "'^*'"'"^ """""'' flattened as 
 Sis dl t '"""'" " '''™^'' •'^yo"'! 'be retina. 
 
 g^a es Wh" [r^'"'* "^ "^"-S --ex 
 g asses. When the corner and crystalline lens 
 
 are too convex an image of the object wiil be 
 
 SHs caiT*'^ """^- ™»^«f-t:;the 
 
 eye 13 called near-siehterln^... m^ „■ " 
 
 persons longer visio^ it i. Z' ^ "'' 
 
 concave glasses. " "'"'''''' "> ^«« 
 
!:i: 
 
 120 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 m 
 
 Sense op Hearixg. The sense of hearing 
 is next in importance to that of vision. Through 
 this sense we are enabled to perceive sounds 
 that not only subserve to our co:iifort and plea- 
 sure, but are instrumental to our intellectual 
 enjoyment. The organ of hearing, or Ear, is 
 one of the most complicated in the human 
 body. 
 
 Anatomy (f thi? Organs of Hearing. 
 
 The Ear is composed of three parts, ist. 
 The external par. 2nd. The tympanum, or 
 middle ear. 3rd. The labyrinth, or internal 
 ear. 
 
 The external oar presents many furrows, 
 arising from the folds of the cartilage that form 
 it. A funnel-shaped tube extends from the ex- 
 ternal to the middle ear. At the internal ex- 
 tremity of ihe tube is a thin, semi-transparent 
 membrane, that separates the external from the 
 middle ear. It is called the membrana tym- 
 pani or drum of the ear. This and the bitter 
 wax in the tube prevent insects from entering 
 the head. 
 
 The middle ear is connected with the internal 
 and most important cavity by four small bones, 
 Whioh are the most delicate shaped bones in 
 the body. These are so arranged as to form a 
 chain from the drum of thn par fn fho iaK,T^j«+K 
 
PHYSrOLOGY OF THE ORGANS OP HEARIN(.'. 121 
 
 From the middle ear a tube opens into the tack 
 part of the throat, called the eustachian, which 
 admits air into this part of the car. If this 
 tube IS closed by disease of the throat hearing 
 is impaired. 
 
 The internal ear is very intricate, and the 
 uses of Its various parts are not well known. 
 It IS called the labyrinth from its windings, 
 lliis part of the ear is composed of a three-cor- 
 uered cavity resembling a snail-shell. The in- 
 ternal ear is the onlyp.rt that is absolutely 
 essential in hearing. 
 
 The auditory nerve, or nerve of hearing, pro- 
 ceeds from the brain, and expands upon the 
 membrane that lines the internal ear, similar to 
 the expansion of the optic nerve. 
 
 Physiology of thr Organs of Hearing. 
 Hearing is that function by which we obtain a 
 knowledge of the motions of bodies, which con- 
 stitute sounds. The precise functions of all the 
 different parts of the ear are not known. 
 
 The function of the external ear is to collect 
 sounds and reflect them into the tube that con- 
 nects the external with the middle ear. The 
 membrana tympani serves to moderate the in- 
 tensity of sound. 
 
 The supposed ofiico of the middle ear is to 
 carry the vibrations made on the membrana 
 
122 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 tympani to the internal ear. This ia effected 
 by the air which it contains and. by the chain 
 of small bones that are enclosed in this cavity 
 But little is known of the functions of the in- 
 ternal ear. Its parts are filled with a watery 
 fluid, in which the filaments of the auditory 
 nerve terminate. 
 
 The auditory nerve, like the optic, has but 
 one function, that of special sensibility, or trans- 
 mitting sound to the brain. The transmission 
 of sound through the different parts of the ear 
 will now be noticed more collectively. The vi- 
 brations of the air are collected by the external 
 ear, and conducted through the tube to the 
 membrana tympani ; from thence the vibrations 
 passing down along the chain of bones, commu' 
 nicate with the ear ; from thence the impression 
 IS carried to the brain by the aud'tory nerve 
 
 Thk Nhp.vous eVsTEM. In the preceding 
 pages the structure and use of the bones and 
 muscles have been explained, the process by 
 which food is converted into chyle and mixed 
 with the blood, together with the manner by 
 which this fluid is conveyed to every part of the 
 body, as has been described. It has also been 
 shown that lymphatic absorption commences as 
 soon as nutrition is completed and carries the 
 useless worn-out particles of the different n^rf. 
 
ANATOMY OF TDK NERVOIS SYSTEM. 123 
 
 back into the circulating fluid ; wliile the respi- 
 ratory organs and secretory glands perform the 
 work of preparing the waste atoms to be con- 
 veyed from the body. These functions must 
 succeed each other in proper order, and such is 
 the mutual dependence of these processes that 
 a medium of communication is necessary from 
 one organ to another. This is effected by 
 means of the nervous system. 
 
 Anatomy of the Nervous System. The 
 nervous system is composed of the brain, cra- 
 nial nerves, spinal cords, spinal nerves, and the 
 sympathetic nerve. 
 
 The brain is a pulpy organ within the skull- 
 bones. The upper part and front is called the 
 cerebrum. The lower portion, situated at the 
 back of the skull, is called the cerebellum 
 The cerebrum, or larger portion of the brain, is 
 composed of a whitish substance, with an irregu- 
 lar border of gray matter around its edges 
 The cerebellum is also composed of gray and 
 white matter, but the latter is by far the largest 
 portion. The white matter is so arranged that 
 when cut vertically it presents the appearance 
 of the trunk and branches of a tree. The brain 
 is surrounded by three membranes. The ex- 
 ternal membrane is thick and firm ; the middle 
 membrane is thin, and somewhat resembles a 
 
 4; ^.i? 
 
124 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 |. J; 
 
 spider's web ; the membrane consists of a net 
 work of blood vessels. On removing the upper 
 part of the skull bones and membranes the 
 bram presents a folded appearance. These 
 ridges are called convolutions. 
 
 The spinal cord is composed of a whitish sub- 
 stance, similar to that of the brain ; it is covered 
 with a sheath or membrame, and extends from 
 the brain through the whole length of the spinal 
 column ; the upper portion, within the skull bones, 
 18 called the medalla oblongata. 
 
 The nerves are small white cords, that pass 
 from the brain and spinal cord; they are 
 distributed to every part of the human system. 
 The cranial nerves that connect with the 
 spinal cord, are arranged in twelve pairs • they 
 are distributed to the parts about 'he face. 
 
 The spinal nerves that connect with the spinal 
 cord are arranged in thirty-one pairs, each aris- 
 mg by two roots ; a meter and sensitive root. 
 
 Every aerve, however small, contains two dis- 
 tmct cords of nervous matter. One gives feel- 
 mg, while the other is used in the motion of the 
 part to which they are distributed. The sym- 
 pathetic nerve consists of a series of knots ex- 
 tending each side of the spinal column, forming 
 a chain. It communicates with the cr«n-i .^a 
 
PHYHSIOLOOY OP THE NKRVOUS SYSTEM. 125 
 
 spinal nerves and also distributes branches to all 
 the internal organs. 
 
 Pn YsroLOG Y OP TM E Nervous System. The 
 brain is the organ of the mind, or physical In- 
 strument of thought and feeling. 
 
 The blood is the great medium, for the resup- 
 ply of vital energy, it being the most abundant 
 wherever the greatest resupply ot this energy is 
 required. Now the exercise of the mind, besides 
 being the chief end of man's existence in this 
 world, and a source of much more intense pleas- 
 ure and pain than the exercise of his muscles, 
 causes a far greater expenditure of the vital 
 eneri2:ies, than the exer' ;<!e of the latter. If 
 therefore the brain were rue instrument of the 
 mind, it would use up much more blood in pro- 
 portion to its size, than any other portion of the 
 body. Accordingly we find that from ten to twen- 
 ty times more blood is sent to the brain in propor- 
 tion to its size, than is sent to any other equally 
 large portion of the system. As light pressure 
 upon the brain suspends the mental operations 
 rendering the patient unconsious of everything, 
 and by the removal of this pressure the mental 
 powers are instantly restored, whilst this effect 
 cannot be produced by pressing upon any other 
 portion of the system. Injuries and morbid states 
 of the brain palpably affect the operations of the 
 
126 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 1 ii 
 
 mind, whilst this effect cannot be produced by 
 wounding any other portion of the body ~ 
 The brain by means of its nerves is connected 
 with every part of the system, and also every- 
 thing appertaining to it, point it out as the 
 " dome of thought," the palace of the soul The 
 brain is the seat of sensation. It perceives the im- 
 pressions made on all parts of the body, through 
 the medium of the sensitive nerves. That the 
 impressions of external objects, made on these 
 nerves be communicated to the brain, where 
 sensation is perceived, it is necessary that they 
 be not diseased or injured. There is a plain dis- 
 tmction between sensations and impressions; the 
 latter are tho changes produced in the extremi- 
 ties of the nerve ; the former, the changes pro- 
 duced in the brain and communicated to the 
 mind. Some portions of the brain are of great 
 er importance than others. Pieces of both the 
 white and gray matter, have been removed with- 
 out impairing the intellect or destroying life — 
 This organ, although it takes cognizance " of 
 every sensation, is of itself, but slightly sensible 
 It may be cut without pain, and the individual 
 at the same time, retain his consciousness 
 
 The medulla oblongata, unlike the brain is 
 highly sensitive ; if slightly punctured, convul- 
 sions follow; if much injured, breathing imme- 
 diately ceases. 
 
PHYSrOLOGY OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 127 
 
 ^ The brain is the seat of will. The contrac- 
 tion or movement of the muscles, is caused by 
 an influence sent from the brain, by the act of 
 the mind or will. The medium of communica- 
 tion from this organ to the muscles is the motor 
 nerves. If the brain is in a state of repose, the 
 muscles are at rest ; if, by an act of the will, 
 the brain sends a portion of cervous influence 
 to a muscle, it immediately contracts, and those 
 parts to which th«s muscle is attached, move. 
 ^ The sympathetic nerve confers neither sensi- 
 bility nor power of movement, yet it gives vi- 
 tality or life, by accompanying the blood vessels 
 to every part of the system. 
 
 Illustration. When the brain is jarred by a 
 blow nausea and vomiting follow. Again, when 
 food is taken into the stomach that irritates the 
 nerves, it produces headache from the sympathy 
 of the brain with the stomach, through this sys- 
 tem of nerves. 
 
 Observation. AVe have omitted to explain 
 the hygene of the difi-erent organs of the system, 
 from the consideration that this art belongs 
 more immediately to the science of medicine, 
 and is therefore the study of the medical prac' 
 titioner rather than the anatomist. Besides, it is 
 not so much my object to display man in the con- 
 dition in which he ought to be, as in the state in 
 
I rill. 
 
 1J>8 
 
 MAIV DISPLAyED. 
 
 Which hG really is. Although a knowledge of hy- 
 gene of the different organs of the body is highly 
 necessary for the promotion of health and hap. 
 pmess, it would require more time to explain it 
 here, than I am able to devote to that purpose. 
 We have now traced man throughout, from 
 the pnncipal essences of which all material 
 things are created, to that perfect form and 
 structure with which we see him moving around 
 and enjoymg an intercourse with feis fellow-man 
 and all surrounding objects. This subject fre- 
 quently engaged the attention of the pious 
 Psalmist With an eye of intelligence and de- 
 votion, he surveyed the curious organization of 
 the human frame; and, struck with the wisdom 
 displayed in it. formation, he raised his thoughts 
 to God in grateful adoration, and exclaims • "I 
 wi I praise thee, for I am fearfully and wonder- 
 fully made ! Marvellous are thy works I How 
 precious are thy wonderful contrivances in re- 
 lation to me, God ! flow great is the sum 
 of them ! If I should count them, thev are 
 more in number than the sand!" This body 
 however, wonderful as its structure is, is sub- 
 ject to decay, and must soon be dissolved in 
 the grave. But we are assured that a day i. 
 approaching when '' all that are in the graves 
 shall hoar the voice of the Son of God and shall 
 
n.VS,0L0OV OP THE NMvors ,vs,B„. 129 
 
 come forth ;" wh.n ,bi« mortal fram, ..,wi 
 Pf on ..mortality ;" and when that whichta 
 
 wn, n corruption ...shall be raised in i7" 
 If the human body, even in itH present stati „f 
 
 our admiration Z: ^lllZZuTu' " 
 
 -d corruption to participatr h:;o S^^^^^^^ 
 immortal life. b*"^'*^^ oi an 
 
 hiri f« J . ® ammal frame all we 
 
 "1 powers of the mind-their eternal dratLT 
 
 mattl alT If v 7"'™"' """■ "^ '"'•'<' ^ith 
 ,^h1 r i ^^""^ """"P"' '» "««e our admi- 
 
130 
 
 MA\ DrSPLAVED. 
 
 but (lie soienoo of Anafomy and Phy.siolo.ry has 
 provcMl that, the brain is the organ wht^e this 
 mysterious union is consummated. 
 
 I am aware that there are thos*^ who hold so 
 tenuclously to scripture pliraseology that they 
 cannot in conscience admit anything for trutli 
 that cannot be found in the Bible ; but when 
 we consider the age of the world in which 
 it was written, the purpose for which it was 
 writton, and thepeople to whom it was addressed, 
 we cannot reasonably expect the Bible to con- 
 tain a description and analysis of scientific sub- 
 jecfs, as is now brought to light by the aid of 
 Chemistry and Philosophy ; neither do we con- 
 sider it doing any injustice to the sacred scrip- 
 tures, or showing a disrespect for the opinion of 
 the sacred pensman, by saying that the brain, 
 instead of the heart, is the fountain of thought. 
 They wrote upon diiferent subjects according to 
 the knowledge they had received, and gave, 
 undoubtedly, a true account of the opinions of 
 the day ; we, acting upon the same principle, 
 form our opinions upon the various topics of the 
 day, according to the amount of knowledge we 
 have received, with this advantage, however, 
 over the ancient philosophers : we call in to our 
 aid, in forming our opinion, the light which 
 modern science has thrown upon the different 
 subjects we may choose to investigate. 
 
PIIVS101.0„V OF THK NKRVOIS SySTBM. 131 
 
 Our own observation, aseist.Hl by a knowledge 
 of the laws of nature, are couvinoing prc./s that 
 many of the notions held by the sR'.red writers 
 were erroneous, especially those which related 
 to the n>ot,on of the earth upon its axis, and the 
 other planets in the solar system , and as the 
 Bible was given toman .s a, hart to conduct 
 h.m to a hoher sphere of existence in another 
 world, It was necessary tiat it should be given 
 to him by revelation, sine the operations of the 
 fepmt cannot be produced by any natural cause. 
 But the works of nature being under the govern- 
 ment of certain laws, can be investigated by 
 a knowle,l.e of these laws : hence there was no 
 necessity of a revelation concerning them • con 
 Bequently the sacred writers wrote upon n^tura 
 subjects according as the light of science shone 
 upon their understanding. And as they had 
 found the heart to bo the great centre of animal 
 ife. It was natural enough for them to suppose 
 that It was the fountain of thought 
 
 As 5V0 have before shown that the brain is the 
 organ of the mind, and as the mind is composed 
 of different faculties, it is evid.nt that a portion 
 of the bram is given to each faculty. The brain 
 being matter heavier than the skull, would 
 natui^lly tend to make that portion of the skull, 
 Which IS thus pressed upon by the brain, to pro- 
 
J; 
 
 1S2 
 
 MA\ niSl'LAYKM 
 
 trude above the surrounding skull. The brain 
 being distributed in different portions underneath 
 th. skull, causes these bumps or organs which 
 we observe on the outside of it, and hv the size 
 and shape of these organs we judge of the 
 character of an individual, a knowledge of which 
 forms an important science known hy the name 
 ot J'hrenology. 
 
PART III. 
 PHRENOLOGY. 
 
 PimE,N„,.o„v is a term derived from two 
 (.reek words : j,;,,.,„ which .i,,„ifi,., „,i„d, and 
 hga,, dHcour.He; the two t„!?efher signifying, he 
 -.e„oe of the ,„i„,,, „„d i,s ph«no„u.„t a. 
 .>un,fe.t,.d through the brain, I, p„i„,, ,^, 
 tho«. connexions wbiel, exist l,etween the con- 
 <l.t.on.s and developments of the brain, and the 
 manifestation, of the n,ind, discovering each 
 from an observation of ,he other. l,s one distinc- 
 tive characteristic feature is, (hat each class of 
 mental function, is manifested by the size of the 
 organ. Thus the benevolent feeling is indicated 
 by means of brain in the front part of the top of 
 lie head ; ,n proportion to the development of 
 he bra.n here will be one's spontaneous flow of 
 k:nd, obliging feeling, and so of every other 
 <iua tty of the mind. That these phrenological 
 rela ions do or do not exist, or that it is funda- 
 ■nentally true, or else untrue, is a self-evident 
 proposttton. which, by applying the following 
 ph. osophtcal axioms, can be speedily ascertained 
 1 hrenology, like every other new science, has 
 "" .siiii Uas, its oppoaers ; but it is grati- 
 
 had 
 
.Slii 
 
 iaiii: 
 
 134 
 
 MAIV DISPLAYKP. 
 
 
 fying to every advocate of the science to know 
 that those old fogies and enemies of mental im- 
 provement are rapidly disappearing : the objec- 
 tions raised against phrenology having been so 
 repeatedly and satisfactorily answered, upon 
 natural principles, that in spite of their deter- 
 mined opposition, truth has been too powerful, 
 and has so far prevailed, and will eventually 
 obtain a co«iplete victory. The anatomy and 
 physiology of the nervous system, and the prac- 
 tical facts everywhere illustrated by every 
 phrenologist, furnish demonstrable proofs of the 
 correctness of the science. 
 
 The objection urged against phrenology upon 
 the grounds of scripture we think we have suf- 
 ficiently answered. The objection raised against 
 It upon the principle of guessing needs only to 
 be mentioned to be ridiculed by everyone ; from 
 the fact that as phrenologists have described the 
 character and mental faculties of persons with 
 whom they were personally unacquainted, and 
 had no other mear-s of asceitaining the disposi- 
 tion of the individual, only by the development 
 of the brain displayed through the organs of 
 the outside of the skull, as shown by phrenology. 
 But again, objections are urged against 
 phrenology of a different character, and at first 
 appear quite plausible. The objection is that if 
 
PHREiVOLOGY. 
 
 135 
 
 phrenology be true, and God the author of 
 nature, it is evident that man cannot be a free 
 moral agent ; for, says the objector, it is incom 
 patible with our views and ideas of Jehovah's 
 attributes to suppose that he would bring any of 
 his intelligent creatures into existence, and place 
 them under the control of certain pre-existing 
 and unchangeable laws, and compel them to act 
 under their influence, and then, for those very 
 deeds which were committed, consign an immor- 
 tal soul—which might have been otherwise 
 happy in glory, had it not been for the existence 
 of those laws— to that region of despair, from 
 whence the smoke of its torment shall ascend 
 up forever and ever. Is this the character of 
 that being whose name and nature is love? 
 Can it l)e justice or equity in the creator to 
 create a soul and allow it to exist here in a 
 world of sin and woe for a few short years, and 
 then banish it forever from his presence, and 
 from the glory of his power ? Certainly not. 
 Such an act is more befitting the character of 
 the blackest fiend in the darkest region of pande- 
 monium, than that God who loveth to do his 
 needy creatures good. Taking this view of the 
 subject it would appear that Phrenology is abso- 
 lutely untrue, and at variance with the doctrine 
 of man's free aeencv. and as n lYmffnr .^f no 
 
136 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 the doctrine of the universal salvation of all 
 
 bo h t and Phrenology are alike untrue. 
 But before we decide let us investigate th.. 
 
 ubject a little further. l,,t. If phrenology 
 fundau,entally true, it forms an important pa 
 ofth,s great system of things called theuniver 
 'le- lopu,g those laws and unfolding l^Z 
 Pnncples. physical, intellectual and mora T 
 accordance with which '. God created ma„ • 
 and also t e whole range of animated Z": ■ 
 consequently, a's every portion of the univm; 
 
 or,g.nated in the same divine mind, and asic 
 part of , ,s adapted to every other part, phre- 
 
 Ec n e ^ T" ^"''' """-' ""=«'• *■"«' --'l 
 PMcple m nature with which it is capable of 
 
 being composed. But if it bo erroneous then 
 «nce God is the author of nature, and man of 
 phrenology, the two will clash with each " er 
 because man could never devise a system o^ 
 facts and pnnciples capable of dovetailing with 
 laws and operations of „afure. Truth will 
 
 2, ...'""' ^'""'™''- Ifwecansub- 
 s a„t.a , the ,„.,„„^ of phrenology upon natural 
 
 principles, as God is the author, its origin is 
 d'vme , and, like every other portion of the 
 
PHIIE\OI,()(iV. 
 
 137 
 
 creator', work,, i„ own inherent beauty. si„,. 
 plKMty perfection and ,n.h-ct.„, will st'anip it 
 wilh file divine imjress. 
 
 In the first place, then, let „. ,ee whether the 
 oa'an« on the «k„ll are under any fixed law. 
 We find l,j. exannning the heads of different 
 
 'l.vulual. that the location ofeachoriran is in 
 the .ame region of the sl<„ll in each individual, 
 wh,oh proves that t„e locati.,,, „f n,,,, ,„,, 
 are controlled by fixed laws ; if thev were 
 n^rely thrown together, or placed there at 
 ran.um hy the creator, the location of the 
 
 Tm "T^'T'"'"'' '- 'li"--^ »* in the heads 
 of different individuals : hut .hi, we see is not 
 the case : hence, thus far we have proved that 
 phrenology ,s based upon natural principles, and 
 as a matter of course, harmonizes with nature's 
 laws. But says the objector, you say that the 
 Almighty has placed these organ* «po„ the 
 head, and deposited the portions of the brain 
 beneath those organs, and the greater the 
 amount of brain, the larger the organ , and con-' 
 sequently the greater the amount of influence 
 over the corre.ponding faculties. These, sir 
 says the objector, are objection., I would like to' 
 see answered. But if the organs increase or 
 decrease m proportion to the amount of exercise 
 they endure, it i,, certain that they are under 
 
138 
 
 MAN Drsi'LAVKD. 
 
 tb 
 
 e eonfrol of some law over which 
 
 aulhoriry, which 
 estahlisji man's f, 
 
 ee 
 
 if this is the case 
 
 il 
 
 •«an has 
 will 
 
 agency, 
 -■■"-"■■■ - «enamly a corporeal organ, that 
 
 ■«. b.. on,., to u,e body, a„.l i. ., ,,,:,h;,r 
 Po-ed ofa„„„al a.d earj,ly matter as anv 
 
 system, tr)}ir each onr^n ^:ii • 
 
 .1 . tJigan will increase nr 
 
 f e.,du es ior.xampU, let a blacksmith who 
 
 - c..s,an,lv ,.i,.^ , He .ledge, or hammer e 
 up h,s an,,, or hand in a. sling fo. «„„„,,;; 
 and w n he comn.cnces to use them a,ai„. l,e wi 
 nna that the strpno-tli /• fu -^ > wm 
 
 decreased n ', '"^'b-l the muso.es is greatly 
 aecreased. On the contrary, let one who has been 
 ecus,o„,ed to sit at his books and dest w o 
 
 , ::;r;: T"' ^-^ -'^^■' -»n,e„c; : s 
 
 firm and r '^ ""'"'" "' "^ ''™ -" "-»'« 
 firm and hard ; consequently, a.s both the brain 
 
PIlIiENOLOOV. 
 
 139 
 
 if 
 
 educated person, exercise tl,e l.rain more, ,md 
 
 e.r bod,es,s. ,,,„,, ,,,„,„^ „^„. i; ,he 
 
 head, of sa.lors who have long followed tV 
 
 large, Irom the oo„ra„„al exoroi.« ,h,y receive- 
 order ,.. conm.only found also to be large when 
 compared w.th thoso of men of ditfcrent occupa 
 '■on. Again, the „rga,. of auiativeness is very 
 »ma 1 ,n children, but increase, i„ youth and 
 
 man ood,u proportion to the increased strength 
 of the corresponding pa.,sioD.s. It is also 
 served to be larger in n.arried than I S ! 
 
 t^'"'\ '' " '""""-I *« -'PPO^e that it 
 ■•fexerc.se that makes this difference? 
 
 irom the preceding facts we arrive at the 
 conclusion that any set of organs may be in- 
 creased or decreased by exercise. It i, not .so 
 ■«uch the s,ze of the organ that makes the dis- 
 
 r ::: "' * *"^^""' "^ "-- "- conduct; 
 
 for instance, a man ,nay possess large com- 
 bativeness, acquisitiveness, destructiveness, &c , 
 and yet not be a ,i,i,.f. „,urderer, &c. • but it 
 
 ^^hows from the size of, be organs, and the"" 
 espondmg faculti.., |,„w n.uch the posse.ssor 
 
 ■as been gu.l.y of yielding to , he influence of 
 tho^e animal prop.n i.ies; ,h.,ugh a man mav 
 
 possess, he above organs, and 3 w. his n 0,^1 
 ^enfment, overbalance them. As the Ocator 
 
4 
 
 i; 
 
 140 
 
 1MA.\ DISPLAVKD. 
 
 has given man the power of action, and placed 
 those o.gan.s under the control of action, man is 
 rn*de accountable for hh conduct. Hence, it i. 
 evident that all „,en can.e from the hand of 
 thf^ir Maker holy und perf.ct, wit,h all the organs 
 of the brain rightly developed; and of all the 
 miseries arising from an ab... of the (,rgan. 
 and faculties, n.an is himself the author To 
 ^eny this, would be to charge (iod with folly 
 for having made man an imperfect bein- • to 
 deny this, would be to .sentence the soi?ls of 
 ^omemfants to endless ruin, for the scripture 
 informs us that nothing unholy shall enter mto 
 the kingdom of heaven ; and if any are created 
 unholy and die in infancy, according to this 
 logio they must inevitably be lost, from the fact 
 that repentance and faith in Christ is the only 
 way of securing eternal life, and the infant can- 
 not repent as it has done nothing to repent of • 
 It cannot exercise faith in Christ because it is 
 Ignorant of the plan of salvation. To depraved 
 human nature the doctrine of constitutional de- 
 pravity aeems to be immensely gratifying- 
 since it answers as a sort of " scape goat '' 
 upon the head of which to pile up all our sins. 
 ^ut 1 do not see any thing in nature which 
 teaches that in our day man is born with a less 
 moral or less physical nature than that given to 
 
FKRF. AOKVCY AND FATALISM. HI 
 
 Ada,,, when ho ca,ne fr„» the hand of hi. 
 
 FREE AOENCr AND FATAMSM. 
 As man', free agency is the great gun of the 
 o,.,.«s,t,on ,„ phrenology-thetcTific fcare crow 
 
 Tha't L"/"""""' '"'"' '^''e'o- people so 
 hat hey dare not even ,ook at the arguLnt, 
 
 and fads ,n the case-an.l inasmuch a, it 
 
 appear, a very plausible objection, I shall 
 
 -deavor to notice it at considerable length 
 
 I lease to notic. the following arguments. 
 
 Jst U r""'" ''"""' Propensities do 
 
 ^x,st, ,s an absolute fact which everywhere 
 
 stares „, full in the face. One man i, cruel and 
 
 FoTr^'/f r"""'^ ■""•' ""-^ tende>-hearted. 
 I or the first characters, we need only point to 
 our prisons and criminal courts, and to the many 
 oold blooded murders which almost nightly, 
 occur ,n many of our la,ge cities. Need I cite 
 your attention to the revengeful duels and dar- 
 7 '■""*"«'- ^hieh blacken the columns of 
 "most every newspaper ? Need I enumerate 
 ■he ever-varying crimes of mankind, to illust,-ate 
 lus pos.t,on ? To illustrate the .eeond clas.< 
 of persons we need only refer the i-eader to John 
 Howard, the philanthropist, who fell a sacrifice 
 to the violence of the prison fever, in Tartarv • 
 
142 
 
 MAy DISPLAVKD. 
 
 besides a host of other worthies, in all ages of 
 the world, who have shone like stars in the 
 niidst of surrounding darkness; or like some 
 kind ministering angels sent from the better 
 land to alleviate the distresses and apply the 
 oil and wine to the wounds of Adam's afflicted 
 SODS and daughters. Hence, then, if there are 
 vicious propensities In the brain, there are also 
 virtuous ones; consequently, if wo would 
 destroy the one, we must annihilate the other • 
 and as God is the author of nature, and also the 
 creator of all animate beings. He certainly is 
 the creator of those organs, and the disposer of 
 the^m on the skull ; and by objections we are 
 rather impeaching the Almighty with folly, than 
 casing a stigma upon phrenology, from the fact 
 that phrenology does not create the organs but 
 only points them out ; and if God is the au'thor 
 of phrenology its origin is divine, and must be 
 correct, for he is a being - too wise to err •" and 
 as he is also "too good to be unkind,"\ho.e 
 faculties were doubtless given for a good and 
 wise purpose. We draw this inference from 
 scripture itself, for it is said that God purposed 
 to make man in his own image and in his own 
 hkeness ; again it is said, after his creation, that 
 God beheld all his works and pronounced them 
 very good, which implies that there was no 
 
brain : hence it is not the use of thl. 
 
 >t '■' the abuse of them. Suppose tbaf a ,n7n 
 pos,esse« large combativene , firlel "if 
 esteem and continuity : this does n„ make mL 
 a murderer, from the fact that h. general ! hi 
 
 het 'T::' " •"""• ^•'■"«'''- to'overbaL 
 moral faculties be would bo no more than anv 
 her anunal ; it is his intellectual facuSS 
 g^ve h.m the ascendancy over the brute ea i n 
 andwa,^e destitute of the«o he would To t' 
 aocounlabie for whatever act he might omlj 
 
 W. !s no law there can be no transgression 
 Hence, upon no kind of reasoning whattver Tan 
 we impeach the Almighty with being the autho 
 .n, „, ,„a„.s degradation and moral depravi,; 
 Those very organs-the abuse of which cause, 
 
 earth, and has so often rent the air with the 
 cnes Of widows and orphans ; that has s n 
 d.at and destruction abroad like a mighty 
 whirlwind, spreading desolation w,,.™,! ? 
 appeared ,- that razed the most' beauTi?u7'and 
 
144 
 
 MAN DISPI.AYKl). 
 
 li 
 
 populous cities to/he ground, overhirnecl mighty 
 empires, dethroned kings, and demolished their 
 kingdoms ; which has destroyed the most beau- 
 tiful works of art, and at times almost wholly 
 depopulated countries, and covered the earth 
 with the slain of her nons ; even these organs, 
 if rightly used, are the choicest earthly blessings 
 which the CreatDr could bestow upon fallen 
 man, in the present state of society. Without 
 combativeness, firmness, dnstructiveness and 
 self-esteem, we co-ild not give protection to any 
 creature, no matter haw much they needed our 
 assistance, if animal suffering was involved in 
 the affair ; nay, we cannot even sustain our own 
 existence without in some degree exercising 
 those organs. The saint as well as the sinner, 
 in the present state of things, finds an abundant 
 exercise for all of those faculties, although, it is 
 true, in a different sphere of action, and for dif- 
 ferent purposes. Without firmness and com- 
 bativeness how could the servant of God face 
 the many vices and errors which are abroad in 
 the world ? In fact it would be n)orally impos- 
 sible tc be a christian v.ithout the exercise of 
 those p-ooensities. The whole life of the chris- 
 tian is styled a warfare. - I hare," sayp, the 
 apostle, " fought the good fight of faith "-2 Tim. 
 IV. 7; again, we are commanded to " fight the 
 
»Sa.a. '• waxed va,i„„t i„ fi,|,t.._r ,b ,i' ,! ' 
 «f this word th;„ w?m' "'^'"^'""t>"'-"wne 
 
 rant f?ooi x^r "uiajjC 10 resist, and a 
 
 '"•"ded to b. faithful u^to de! h . '""■ 
 receive a crown of Hf ' ""^ ^« '''*" 
 
 wM»g u admit that God is thl.r «''' 
 dispose- of tH oreans of K , """""' ^"^ 
 
 'Wch it appear, to ,eT 1 , / ^^'''* "'°'''^' 
 with evidence 1 Lt P . ^""P'"" f^-ishes u, 
 
 '"■-^i.-aeTtrrot'r.rr,''^^-^^"- 
 
 '-^- .ations. and ,ave- th:;;t ::-"! 
 
 |i 
 
m 
 
 
 146 
 
 MAN niSPLAYRD. 
 
 i 
 
 the Israelites slaying their enemies by thou- 
 sands, of which Gideon and his army are a well 
 known example ; and Pharaoh and his host at 
 the Red Sea might be referred to as another 
 example. VV^e would not be understood to 
 delight in war, or consider it as an individual 
 blessing, or a blessing to an individual country. 
 No, But we do consider it sometimes a bless- 
 ing to the world. We might notice various 
 wars which , have resulted in benefitting the 
 human race, but we pass to notice the bloodiest 
 scene that ever has, or probably ever will stain 
 the pafe3 of the world's history~we refer to the 
 siege of Jerusalem. Josephus informs us that 
 in consequence of the bloody factions that arose 
 in the city, occasioned by the jealousies that 
 arose between the leading parties prior to Titus' 
 marching to the city, that the dead laid piled in 
 the streets^the Jew and Gentile together— so 
 that the blood of the slain stood like lakes in 
 the holy courts themselves. The bodies of 
 Greeks and barbarians, countrymen and 
 strangers, priests and people, laid piled together 
 in one undistinguished heap. The same his- 
 torian further informs us that during the seven 
 years of the siege there were 1,337,490 persons 
 slain, and 97,000 taken captive ; mothers even 
 killed and roasted tha,\r nwr . ^^uua __ i 
 
MEE AUENCV AN„ FATALISM. 147 
 
 by lot, rather t a L?! J;™" " '" '"* 
 
 Romans ,- so great wasT I '""'" *" *'"' 
 t„ n, T, ""' number of desertei-. 
 
 timber coul.l be found to make o es of Z 
 awful calamity Si,.; :;tS'"^ '"'« 
 
 God .sby bi« providence inauifesHyet L' 
 temng his once chosen people on o iT. T' 
 ;tructio„. And why J OurSaviourre; Lt 
 t.on, aa he, aw the city and wept 03!/. 
 the nueatinn * ~ • ^ * '*• answers 
 
 " q««9t'on. Agam, we are told in Matt sdth 
 chapter, that for the eleof.sake thl daysofT 
 
 no Jh b'e , Ifa ''f;:::"^'--' ^"-e should 
 there was. It ''" "* *''*' «'"iough 
 
 b;.Lr:ap7;:;;r»^j"<^-''>^e„d„re'd 
 «p;ea.andg,o?;ortt£iro::„r!j: 
 
 -™-J«.tfortheZlisi^'ri!ll!:i'^'"* 
 -ooay warfare for so trifling an insultry'eiTha: 
 
148 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 a va.^t amount of good has not munkina derived 
 from that yery war, not only in a commercial, 
 but a religious point of view ? The missionary, 
 availing liimsplf of the privileji^e seemed to for- 
 eigners by the treaty, carrying the Bible to 
 millions of benighted heathens and (spreading 
 the light of revelation among those who had 
 long groped their way surrounded by pagan 
 darkness. Again, considering the politically 
 distracted state of Europe in the latter part of 
 the eighteenth century, and especially that of 
 France at that period, how could it bo possible 
 Uiat a more fitting person could be raised up to 
 settle the universal tumult that then agitated 
 Europe than that wonder of the human rate. 
 Napoleon Buonaparte? His great mind con- 
 tern plated those vast projects of conquest which 
 so often put to shame all formv'r achievements ; 
 his dauntless courage enabled him to face dan- 
 ger and death in al! their varied forms; his 
 stern and inflexible dispo»iiiou caused him to 
 complete every enterprise in spite of all opposi- 
 sition, and enabled him to perform deeds of 
 valor and feats of daring, which to a common 
 mind would bo an absolute impossibility. And 
 would a mind anything less than his have an- 
 swered the purpose ? We might refer you to a 
 
 
 uicricun 
 
 liberty, 
 
 1 1 
 
l-'iKH AGKNCV ANU KATAl.,r.J,. 
 
 149 
 
 I"; l'"-^nfM..c.o,„unn,en,"a.s another 
 ^.^ :.«..;.,! ,l,.nn«n,,I.,.ovid«„...,„,,e the 
 i";;''?:"'"'P^'-''^'^'-''--'''« of other, 
 
 .'''■;'- oMa,,,,..,,,, 11 age.sof,|,.. ,vorl,l. 
 
 *>y the (.lin.sfian world in nfVo,- . • • 
 
 ^"l'""*^!' ,: l,„. ,.„n 1„„, ,,,„„,,, ,„.,,;;'"• 
 
 pouml. to carry ir,,,,,a,.l the lives of- the .dJ 
 oftl.wr,„o.tvali„m,„„., Thatf.„od,villa it 
 
 fro:u u^ tiu.r. i. no doubt, but whtn an. I 
 amount time it.elf n.ust det.rnune 
 
 I*t us take the historic page of the wars ,hat 
 have swept over the earth fron, its e.rlie t ,hte 
 
 <)o«,o the present day. and we will see £ 
 tteProv,dence of God hascletermined tC t 
 ome general .ood to nianldnd. Very po^^ 
 - may «ee,» to some persons a .tra ge doc' 
 tnne, but, stran'^e as It mnv 
 
 o';%a to ad.„it^t ,? : :;li^-:-- - 
 
 ""Shty's r«le over the universe, and" is t« 
 -a3t do if we believe- the scipt '" 
 
 ^hat God U the author of 
 
 H'nptur.8. Since, 
 nature and the ruler 
 
150 
 
 MAN DISPLAVED. 
 
 of the universe, and the exercise ol those pro- 
 pensities, the propelling power of action among 
 mankind, and Phrenology points out the exis- 
 tence and locality of those faculties, do we not 
 discover a harmony existing throughout the 
 whole system. As these propensities do exist, 
 as virtue and vice are abroad in the world, and 
 as vicious and virtuous characters arc every- 
 where to be seen. Phrenology proves itself to be 
 true by pointing them out. 
 
 Perhaps the reader will accuse mo of having 
 greatly digressed from my subject, namely, 
 Free Agency and Fatalism. My object has 
 been, first, to prove Phrenology to be of divine 
 origin, and if Free Agency i« according to the 
 divine will, they will harmonize together as 
 truth will harmonize with truth but, not with 
 error. The first thing, then, to be considered 
 with regard to free agency is, do the organs of 
 the brain increase by exercise ? if they do not, 
 man's free agency is destroyed, and as a mat- 
 ter of course, he must ever remain morally pas- 
 sive in the hands of his Creator, content to be, 
 to suffer, or to remain in whatever situation 
 Providence has been pleased to place him. 
 
 MATEitiALisM. Another objection to phre- 
 nology is, that it establishes the doctrine of 
 materialism. It is urged that by making mind 
 
MATERIALISM. 
 
 151 
 
 SO much dependent upon, and under the influence 
 of, organized matter, and by showing that from 
 one end of the animal kingdom to the other the 
 mental and corporeal manifestations are recipro- 
 cal, phrenology proves a connection between 
 mind and matter, so direct and intimate that it 
 can only bo explained by admitting that mind is 
 nothmg more or less than a condition or property, 
 or emanati .n of matter, peculiarly organized! 
 and endowed with vitality ; and, consequently, 
 ihat when vitality cea>es in such matter, the 
 mmd that inhabited it also ceases to exist, and, 
 therefore, cannot be immortal. That the sym-' 
 pathy and connexion between mind and matter 
 are very intimate, and that organised matter 
 has a controlling influence upon the manifesta- 
 tions of intellect and feelings, no one who has 
 mvestigated the subject will pretend to deny 
 It is a matter of fact that we know nothing 
 either of the character or operations of the mind 
 in this world, only as they are manifested by 
 means of corporeal organs. The mantled cheek, 
 the lowering brow, the curled lip, the speaking 
 tongue, the sparkling eye, the look of joy, of love 
 
 ofsorrow,of suffering, ofbenignity,ofintelli^-ence 
 and of indignation, as expressed by the coun- 
 tenance— all indicate tl 
 mind, whose mandate 
 
 wm 
 
 they obey ; and if we 
 
••"pp 
 
 ^'i illl" 
 
 < m 
 
 p M % 
 
 jjip 
 
 i 
 
 •Wti 
 
 i| 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 IB 
 
 152 
 
 MAN DFflPLAYKn. 
 
 derange the corporeal organization through 
 which the rnind manifeits itself, we disturb tho 
 mind also. Let the botlj he vigorous and tho 
 mind will be equally so; whereas, if weakness, 
 or lassitude, or nervous affection prostrate the 
 corporeal powers, the mental powers will pro- 
 portionably sink. In short If the corporeal 
 organs are deranged in any way the mental func- 
 tions are equally disturbed; excepting always 
 the degeneration which different proportions of 
 our species hav^ undergon«^ by tho perversion of 
 the laws of our physical nature. 
 
 I have already shown that man becomes 
 guilty by perverting his oridnally good faculties 
 —that ho often prostitut;es his reason, his moral 
 feeling, and all the noblest powers of his nature, 
 to the base and groveling gratifications of his 
 sensual desires and appetites ; whereas, were ha 
 to act in harmony with the cor.stitution whicli 
 God originally gave to him, he would be virtuou«i 
 and happy. Accordirjg to this view of the 
 subject, phrenology establishes the doctrine of 
 free agency, and charges home upon the sinner 
 himself the whole weight of his own guilt with a 
 power and force that can scarcely be derived 
 from any other source. Phrenology, instead of 
 leading to infidelity, materialism, and other anti- 
 
 SOriDtural dop.trinoa fnvpiuU..,:, +1 i-^;_i..-- - 
 
MATKRIALISM. 
 
 153 
 
 a demonstrable proof of the truths of revelation. 
 Suppose a christian is endeavoring to convince 
 an infidel of the realities of a future state of 
 existence, the infidel resists the appeal bv reject- 
 ing the Bible as an absurd fable, and'^let the 
 christian turn which way ho will, he cannot by 
 the aid of the Scriptures entirely wrest thi'p 
 weapon out of his hand. But here phrenology 
 steps in to his assistance and completely shields 
 Christianity from the blows of infidelity, by 
 admitting that God gives to one man—say Dick 
 Turpin, " the noted highwa^iman,"— very large 
 destructiveness, acquisitiveness, &c. : but so far 
 as the Deity is concerned, these faculties were 
 created pur© and sinless, and had they been 
 properly cultivated and directed, their manifesta- 
 tions woald have been virtuous and productive 
 of good to mankind. But Turpin had no right to 
 pervert those originally good faculties, and for 
 so doing he alone was guilty, and, of course, 
 punishable. Having, then, proved man to be 
 the author of hi. own guilt, and consequently 
 punishable, we will here dismiss this part of 
 our sul)ject. 
 
 From the preceding arguments it follows that 
 phrenology no more leads ti> materialism than 
 does anatomy, physiology, medicine, every sys- 
 tem of physics, metaphysics, natural and moral 
 
154 
 
 MAN niSPLAVBD.* 
 
 philosopliy ; for they are all chargeable of sup- 
 porting the same doctrine of the intimate con- 
 nexion l)etwoen the physical organization and 
 the nnanifestations of thought and ft^eling. Nay, 
 even the Bihle itself is chargeable with this' 
 heresy of materialism, if materialism consist! in 
 believing in the connection of mind with matter. 
 In reference to this doctrine of materialism J 
 have only to add, that phrenology furnishes 
 evidence sut^icient to sati.sfy my mind vhat it is 
 utterly falst-. This evidence is furnished by the 
 faculties of veneration and hope. I believe 
 that the leading function of the first is to teach 
 us to worship God, and this proves the existence 
 of a Deity, and, consequently of a being whose 
 mind acts independently of organized matter ; 
 and I believe the office of the last is to point 
 out to us a hereafter, by leading us to hope for 
 it and expect it, and thereby it proves the ex- 
 istence of a future state of being. Another 
 subject nearly allied to materialism, and about 
 which we hear a great deal said, is 
 
 Reqexekaiioiv, or Chan(j£ of Heart. 
 
 The first thing that presents itself to the mind 
 in considering this subject is, in what does this 
 change of heart consist? Simply and solely in 
 a change of the direction of these faculties, or 
 upon the obiecta bv whinh fhotr ov« ^:c~^ 
 
RKOE.NERATION. 
 
 105 
 
 and not in a change of their nature or charauter, 
 or thoir relative power. For example ; if the 
 person converted has a great talent for musie, 
 the efl'ect of this con version h to chiange the 
 direction of this faculty ; thus before conversion 
 it was chiefly exercised in singing songs, lively 
 airs, &c.. whereas it is now chiefly exercised 
 upon pieces of sacred music. If, before his 
 conversion, his reasoning powers are great, but 
 exercised chiefly upon philosophical, scientific 
 or political subjects, they are afterwards equally 
 powerful, but mainly directed to religious and 
 theological subjects. Benevolence, which was be- 
 fore manifested in rel' ring the physical suffer- 
 ing and promoting the earthly happiness of his 
 fellow men, is now directed to a different and 
 far more elevated object, namely, the salvation 
 and eternal happiness of fallen man ; and so of 
 every other feeling, faculty and talent of the 
 individual. 
 
 From even a superficial view of the subject, 
 it is evident that it does not consist either in a 
 substitution of one primary mental faculty for 
 another of an opposite faculty, or in a change of 
 their original nature and character, or their 
 proportionate strength; for, if llie person who 
 experienced this change possesed a strong ori" 
 ginal intellect before his conversion, he posseised 
 
156 
 
 MAn DISPLAYED. 
 
 as gtrone: an original intellect afterwards ; but, 
 if he is weak minded before his conversion, bt 
 will remain so afterwards. Even his leading 
 peculiarities of mind, thought or feeling remain 
 unaltered ; if, before his conversion, he possessed 
 a remarkably retentive memory of inrldents, of 
 faces, dates, principles and places, it is equally 
 so afterwards; if he i» remarkable for his me- 
 chanical, musical, or any other talent, before 
 his conversion, he possesses the same talent in 
 the same degree afterwards. Then, as before 
 remarked, this change consists in th« direction 
 of the faculties, and not in the faculties them- 
 selves. As the power of the faculties remain 
 unchanged though diiferently directed, there is 
 no call for an alteration in the proportionate 
 size of the organ , but if this cliange of heart 
 did necessarily involve a change of the nature 
 and constitution of the mental powers, the in- 
 evitable conclusion would be that these facul- 
 ties were not originally well made, and there- 
 fore require remodeling, or rather re-creating, 
 which would necessarily imply imperfection on 
 the part of the Creator; and not only so, thit 
 change in the nature of the faculties themselves 
 would destroy the identity of the person con- 
 verted, thus making him, not a new being, but 
 
 another hftino" 'Vhn o.^,^,,„f _i?;j. •_ .1 , -,. . 
 
KKOR.NKUA'IION. 
 
 157 
 
 grace simply gives to the facultiey, as they 
 originally were, a new direction. Let us illus- 
 trate this by a boat ^mng down a .'ver, and 
 when it has arrived at its plaoe of destination, 
 by the nieang of a rudder, its direction ii altered, 
 and it goes up the stream. Divine grace acts 
 Hpon the faculties like the rudder of a boat. As 
 the faculties and organs were created originally 
 good, it certainly required a length of time 
 before the evil propensities would overbalance 
 his moral sentiments, for it is impossible, in tbe 
 nature of things, for any part of the corporeal 
 system to increase or decrease instantaneously, 
 as thteiercise of a faculty increases its strength ; 
 to give the evil propensities the predominance 
 they must have afar greater amount of exercise 
 than the moral sentiments ; then so far as the 
 change is concerned it cannot be a sudden one, 
 c:.cept the change of desire ; the gift of grace 
 may bo instantaneous, but that does not change 
 all the natural propensities one whit: that 
 change can only be produced by watching and 
 prayer, by long continued and laborious effort, 
 and severe self-denial. If the individual had 
 contracted the habit of swearing before his con- 
 version, did he not watch he would be guilty of 
 it afterwards j and the same would be the c^se 
 with every other besetting sin. Paul speaks of 
 
158 
 
 MAX IHSPLAYKD. 
 
 !il 
 
 carrying on a warfare aorainsf, ih« lusts of the 
 flesh ; christian experiMnco in the I-ibie ia com- 
 pared fo a li-lit, thpt ^'roweth brighter and 
 brighter unto the perfect day , to a grain of muitard 
 seed, w'mcIi, from the NmallePt of seeds, l)ecomes, 
 a great tree ; plainly implying thata.s far as thj 
 relative strength of the faculties is changed, the 
 change is gradual. I would aak any true chris- 
 tian if he is not obliged to hold with a strong rein 
 those propensities that predominated lefore his 
 conversion ; and if a long time is not necessary 
 effectually to subdue "those sins which rnosr 
 easily beset him," so that their insfinctive 
 promptings are not plainly felt ? This view of 
 the subject of regeneration will explain the cause 
 of so much backsliding among the members of 
 the orthodox churches, especially those churches 
 which enjoy extensive revivals ; in the time of 
 these revivals the minister will, in the first place, 
 thunder out the terrors of the law, with all the 
 energy and force of oiatorical powers that he is 
 capable of, and point out to them the awful 
 consequences attending a life of sin and wicked- 
 ness ; he will tell the unconverted part of hm 
 congregation they are about to sink beneath the 
 sulphurous flame, and that angry fiends stand 
 Ktady to drag them into the awful vortex of • 
 eternal ruin; my imagination would fail me 
 
i:kok\kuatio\. 
 
 150 
 
 were I to attempt to concei've the awful frown 
 resting on the countenance of Jehovah, as he 
 looks down upon <he hardness of heart of the 
 unregenerate ; and my pen would fail to perform 
 Its office were I to attempt a description of the 
 appearance of th- Almi^-hty's visag.,, with 
 vengeance depicted in every feature. And 
 Whither, oh ! whither nhall the sinner fly from 
 the wrath of God 1 If he take the wings of the 
 mornmg and fly to the uttermost part of the 
 earth. God's anger will rest upon him there • if 
 he descend into hell, there God's vengeance will 
 follow him ; though he descend millions of feet 
 below the surface of the earih, vet he cannot 
 escape the dreadful wrath of God-ruin, endless 
 and eternal, attend his everv step, and ere 
 another morning he may sleep the sleep that 
 knowP no waking~his final doom may he sealej 
 forever, and his soul in the dark regions of the 
 damned, suffering the vengeance of eternal fire ; 
 aud, says the minister, so sure as the Bible is 
 true, this will be the sinner's doom, unless be 
 repent ; and repent now-to-morrow mav be too 
 late The effect of this preaching, with the 
 gestures of the speaker, instead of producing the 
 desired effect-cf arousing the mental faculties 
 and^ causmg persons to reflect upon their nast 
 conciuet, and the attributes of God : the demand 
 
160 
 
 MAN DISI'LAYKl). 
 
 ;i I 
 
 ho has upon their lives, as well a, ail th,.y hav. 
 
 the debt they owe to their feliew., a, children 
 belo«gmg to one great family_it merely arouse, 
 to acfon the organ., of physical fear, and in 
 reality they only consider the demand of their 
 wor,h,p which the Alrni,|.ty ha, upon the 
 hunian family to be a prerogative of power, 
 rather than a debt they owe hi,„ a. their Creator 
 bene actor, and triend. Instead, I say, of oa.,- 
 i^S these reflection,, the all-absorbing thought 
 - v.he unconverted is how they may escape thi, 
 «'dc|.n and eternal destruction, whi.h they 
 ■»; P .6 ., immediately to overtake them ; as if 
 
 !„«. il *''''^' ''*'"' "''^""^° *° J*hovah 
 until the present moment, and now, for the first 
 
 time during th.ir existence, the Almighty had 
 riser m his mi\.ht and clothed himself with 
 vengeance a, with a garment, and was now 
 determined to punish them for ali their guilt by 
 eternally banishing them from hi, face and 
 favor. After their fears are raised to their 
 highest pitch the scene changes : the minister 
 tell, them that notwithstanding the enormity of 
 their crimes Jesu, has appeared as mediator, 
 d;ed rpon the or<.,.s to sati.,fy the demands of 
 d-vino justice, ascended up to heaven, took tb- 
 ■ ^'' ""^ vivnuH their guiiiy causw 
 
1 K<iK.\EIiA'II(i\i. 
 
 i61 
 
 them, wm not „,v blood atone for their guilt V 
 Ihe father hears hia unvoi- !,,•„ , 
 
 ohan«. th. f ' ^ ' '"'' countenance 
 
 ohangeb, the frown is tr,rno,l to a look of pity 
 
 he hear, the ory of the penitent for mercy and 
 on he wing8 of love sends pardon to the VuiUv 
 ^ou<. The minister, in the meanti-ncte,,;;; 
 
 tin r *'"^"' "^'"^ graee-tbe pcni- 
 
 ent belieres, and the grace descends, and he i 
 now relieved from all his fears. And now le 
 nie ask how many of the faculties of the indi- 
 
 produce this wonderful change? Why, only 
 
 snppo e that it only requires the exercise of 
 
 ^f ugl t,_a, shown by phrenology to belong to 
 
 th t all the faculties were given for a wise and 
 gooJ purpose, and that tbey are all capable of 
 b n. o.,.,-c,,,ed alike, it is reasonable to.nppose 
 bl-il :'■' " "'''' ''^» aisappoared that 
 will .00.1 cease ,o act, and, consequentlj the 
 ,,.,,. ,, haa t^xercised over the organs 
 wiJl be lost. S'^^ • •-' ■'■ - ^'^ans. 
 
 O it IS Vi J' 
 
 ^ thia chaijyo : there 
 
 h 
 
t 
 
 162 
 
 MAN DISPLAVKI). 
 
 being only two organs brought into notion, se 
 soon as tlie excitement ceased which caused the 
 action of these organs, their influence ceased, 
 and the whole machinery of the brain went on 
 as before, and the individual relapsed again 
 into his former habirn and practices. Need 
 we wonder that people backslide under such 
 circumstances ? Indeed it would bo a wonder 
 if they did not. But T would not have the 
 reader suppose that I ohjcct to revival me<)ting«. 
 I do not. But I object to the manner in which 
 they arc conducted. T object to this frightening 
 process which ministers so often ref^ort to, 
 merely for the sake of raising a religious excite- 
 ment. I^Jan is an intellectual hoing, and should 
 be treated as such ; and if any one or two organs 
 or faculties get excited over the rest, enough to 
 influence them, all that action produces is the 
 abuse and not the use of the faculty ; and the 
 abuse of one faculty is as bad as the abuse of 
 another ; and without the exercise of his mental 
 facuKies man is as incapable of reasoning as any 
 other animal. lienc?, the man has only had his 
 animal feelings aroused by this excitement, and 
 his religion has been a mental delusion ; as a 
 matter of course when the excitement has sub- 
 sided, his religion has subsided, and the indi- 
 vidual IS fsef firtwn fto o Kq,,iroi;/io~ — ,1 — -•.- 
 
PHRENOLOGY." 
 
 163 
 
 reality, the person iias remained raorally and 
 mentally unchanged, except so far as the excite- 
 ment was concerned. Thus, if 1 am not greatly 
 mistaken, I have shown the reason of so much 
 backsliding among the members of many of the 
 orthodox churches. Having thus examined the 
 preceding subjects phrenologically, we will now 
 endeavor to illustrate the ; "ience of Practical 
 Phrenology. 
 
 Phrknology. As the ii: stration and applj. 
 cation of the principles of ] irenology necessa- 
 rily combine with them m;oh evidence of the 
 (ruth of the science, it is impossible to treat the 
 several branches of the subject in a manner 
 wholly distinct and separate. At every suc- 
 ceeding iUr^, therefore, there will be presented 
 additional proofs of the correctness and import- 
 ance of the science. The first thing that will 
 be considered in relation to phrenology is the 
 division of the 
 
 Temperammti. The word temperament is 
 here used to denote certain states or conditions 
 of the body, or the relative activity of particular 
 classes of ihe corporeal organs. The tempera- 
 ments are divided into four kinds : 1st. Lym- 
 phatio; 2nd. Sanguine; 3rd. Billions: 4th. 
 Nervous. 
 
 ■J'he Lymphatic, in which 
 
 are the secretory 
 
164 
 
 MAN DI3PL A VBD. 
 
 glands, are the most active portion of the 
 system, indicated by soft and abundant flesh, 
 and languor of the pulse, and of all of th« 
 corporeal and mental functions; by a dull, 
 indolent disposition, and an aversion to corporeal 
 labor. Great excitement is necessary to arouse 
 one with iMi* temperament to action, but when 
 arou.<?ed, ihe action may he a powerful one 
 Ihe negroes generally possess this iempera- 
 mont. 
 
 The Sanguine, in whieii thy arterial system 
 and the organs which circulate the various fluids, 
 particularly the blood, arc most active : indi- 
 cated by a strong and rapid pulse, strong animal 
 passions, and more ardor, enthusiasm, activity, 
 and zeal, than stren^rth and power of mind or 
 bodv. 
 
 The l^illious in whicn riie riiuseular portion 
 of the system predominates in activity : charac- 
 terized by a moreatlilciiv ^uvm, by a strong and 
 steady pulse, hardness, strerigth and power of 
 body, accompanied by ^i coiisiderable force and 
 energy of mind and cljaractcr. 
 
 The Nervous, in which thy Javiin and the 
 nervous system are much more active than the 
 other portions of the body, which gives rise to, 
 and is accompanied by, the highest degree of 
 excitability and activity of the physical and 
 
 lit 
 
J"»HE\OLO(JV 
 
 ir>f 
 
 mer* *l \(^^^er^. c'earner^s and rnpidity of 
 llioi^.-l;;. )5.M(;H,>n(,n and conception, sprightli- 
 nj-^- <^f mind ;,v.d body, with niore activity 
 vivu'iry, and iiit^nsifT. than power and endnr 
 a..(.-<- of niliid and b.ulw 
 
 Thi- iiifln..rop of ^■d•ioat;on i?' exortf^d .'diiefly 
 In direcdng and modifying the operation.^ and 
 manifestations of tIk- various C/iciilMoa, nither 
 than I!.!' growth or tlec'-ea^a of th^ir ttirength, 
 powor, or Ih" size of their res^pfctivo organs' 
 
 S/^apc of the Orgap.v. lilach mental faculty 
 i-^ ifidicattd hy ineaus of fw<» seln of organs, 
 occupying a corrL'spondlng portion of each 
 hemisphrvoof tiic brain. Th,. san^e principle 
 of double organ obtains ';er<> an i? exenipliiiedin 
 the oim^ of the (-yo, the ear, &c. ; and doubtless 
 for the svaoio r.^asi.n, that whc^u one organ is 
 injured the other may perform ifs functions. 
 In shap;^ the organ-s are oonK-ai, their apex 
 being at the >nedalla oblongata. «nd their base 
 at the skull. A straight lisio drawn from the 
 opening of one ear to th;ir of the other, would 
 pass nearly through It. The poT/er of each 
 faculty, and its tendency to action is propi.rtion- 
 ate to thy size of it8 re.speotive organ. In order 
 to determine the size of an organ ll. h necessary 
 to obtain its length and breadth. The length of 
 the organs may be determined by observing th« 
 
Kill 
 
 166 
 
 MAN DlSPLAYJ^l). 
 
 1 
 
 di8 anoe from U.o external «peni„y of il,e ear to 
 that part of tin, skull i„ wlilol, i|,ey tcrmiualo • 
 and tho brcadtl, by tl,e smfaco of the »kuH they 
 occupy. It IS supposed that the portion of the 
 organ whfoh h nearest to the skull is, ehieflv 
 used ni the exn-eiso of the menial function ■• h, 
 some head^ ll,e shape of the organs are ..harper 
 and more elongated than in other., thus present- 
 ing a greater prominence ; h other.H thev are 
 shorter and broader. The shape of the former 
 denotes grea^ activity and les.. pov,.,- ; (],« ,«„„. 
 denotes great intensity and strength 
 
 OI,AS.?IF1C,ATIO.V OF THE I.'acuLTIK'^ —The 
 
 faculties are divided into two clas.ses or order, 
 and these are subdiTided into several Genera' 
 and tliese again into various species 
 
 Obokr 1st. Afficllvc FacuUies, or Fedm^s 
 From these faculties originate the propensities, 
 desires, emotions, sentiments, ana the whole 
 range of those mental operations denominated 
 fee mgs. They constitute by far the largest class 
 of the mental operations, and whenever their 
 stimuli are presented, rush into involuntary 
 activity, and frequently without awaiting the 
 command of reason. Although we cannot alto- 
 gether avoid this internal excitement, yet we 
 are not obliged to express all (hat we feel 
 The organ-i of these faculties occupy that por- 
 
s^ 
 
 CLASSIFICA riON OF THE FACULTIES. l67 
 
 tion of tiie brain commonly covered by the 
 hair. 
 
 Ge7im PropennfU^. These embrace t.hose 
 mental functions which pertain to man as au 
 animal, or to his physical relations. They 
 stimulate tlia other faculties ; impart effi 'iency, 
 impetus, and physic;^! force to the whole 
 character ; origiQale the various animal impuUes, 
 passions, and de?ircs to act, and are locf't'd in 
 tho posterior, or back and lower po'tion of the 
 head, and when laro-e, or very large, causing 
 great breadth of brain beiiind and over the ears ; 
 but when small, this portion of the head is tiiin 
 and narrow. Nearly all the brain of animals is 
 developed in this region, and their characters are 
 made up of the functions pertaining to the cor- 
 responding faculties. 
 
 The Domestic PropensUies are amativeness, 
 philoprog^nitivenes^, adhesiveness, and inhabit- 
 ivenesss. These constitute man a gregarious 
 animal, lay the foundation for his civil insti- 
 tutiony, make him a social and domestic being, 
 create family attachments, have a reference 
 to tho marriage state, and originate most of its 
 duties, relations, and pleasures. When large, 
 ©r very large, tbey cause an elongation and 
 fullness in the middle and lower portion of 
 the back part of the head : but, s^hf^r^ ihu^^ ara 
 
 • ■' " •■'•'■■J "!■» 
 
168 
 
 MAjy DI»i'LAYRI>. 
 
 I, ii 
 
 I I 
 
 small, present a depressed and flattened appear. 
 
 oomw'" ^'"P'T"'"- '^•"^^o "« vitativene,., 
 combat.ve„es», destn.eiivene.s alimenUvene,, 
 ac3u,8,tivenes,, and seeretivenes,. These nro 
 
 V. efort,,evan„,,, annual wan,.,, an baTa 
 reference o tl,o de.ire.s of the person po..e«.,in» 
 then,, and terminate upon bis intereit, wan s" 
 an app,„e,,.. They are located npon the .£ 
 of tl,e head, around the ear.-:, and when laroe, or 
 very large, give it a thick and round app ar- 
 
 ance but when ™all, the l,ead iMhin and flat 
 in this region. 
 
 Human, Moral nn/^ 7?«7- • <-, 
 
 These are feelint oTI ^^tdef r^ 
 
 ,P«f-- - "-elevating in th" 
 ater. and mora humanizing in their influence. 
 They are located together in tha corona! ov 
 upper portion of tl,e head, and when lar,: „ 
 
 very large elongate, widen, and elevat: 'thi, 
 pa.t of ho bead ; but when moderate, or .null 
 the head ,. lower, shorter, and narrower 
 
 approba ,™ne..». ,elf.esteern, and firmness 
 These, lu<e the .elfish propensities, ai.o term t 
 
 .elfish V Tl -"'T'' ''"^ '"''"''y ^^"0^- 
 
 •elfish; yet the.r character Snd manife..tatio«s 
 
 hi' 
 
GI.ASSIFICATIOV op TflK KACILTIKJ^ 
 
 169 
 
 are superior to those of the .elfish propensities, 
 especially wh«n the relig-Ious and reasoning 
 facnUies are .trone. They are located together 
 in the back part of the upper portion of the 
 bead. When these organs, are larje, or very 
 lar{^.e this portion of the he«d h extended 
 upwards and haekwards, and when thn remain- 
 mg- sentiments are defiri«?nt it is rendered 
 coaica). 
 
 ^ Re/igious Smrimmt,. They are conseien- 
 tiou?^ .ss. hope, marvel!oLi8n?ss, veneration, and 
 benevolence. These faculties create those 
 moral, religious, and devotional feeling., which 
 enter so largely into the human character; 
 humanize, adorn, elevate, and soften the nature 
 of m^n ; and which constitute him a moral and 
 j-cligion?., and, consequently, an accountable 
 hem-, and connect liim with the moral govern- 
 Tiient of God ; create those moral duties and 
 relatinim wliieli exist between man and his 
 Maker, and also between man and man. They 
 are situated in the frontal portion of the upper 
 porl:on of the head, and when very large throw 
 a proportionably large amount of brain into 
 this region, elevating and elongating it 
 
 Semi-IntcUectual Faculties, ( Sentiments ) .-^ 
 ibey are c.mstructiveness, ideality, imitation, 
 and mirlhAilne... These faculties are of a 
 
170 
 
 MAM I ^PLAVftl). 
 
 mix(„l „at,„.,., participating the I .«r,i.. both 
 of tlio |„„nan 8onti,iu,nt» and of tl,e inteilectual 
 faeii tins. Thev (i..i,l t,> ,h i '"'"«<'"lal 
 ■„i 7 1 • '"" i'l.iniment of the 
 
 mmd by creating i„ i, , ,,,,, ,„,, ^ ,„^_^^ 
 
 tho /ir.o art,, and polite literature ; for construct 
 l"f "'»";'f^'«'"ri„^., oop).ins, and the like 
 Ihoy are located partly between the forehead 
 ami the portion which i, covered by the hair 
 
 and partly vvi,hi„|.,e latter: giving, when larg'' 
 or very arge, a fulne.. and breadth to thi, 
 portion of y,e u.d ; hut when small, the bead 
 w..ere .1. hair hegin. t, appear U narrow an. 
 
 These facnlfe. have to do exclusively with 
 
 abstrae relation.. They create a thir»t for 
 mformafon, and furnish the ability to acquire 
 knowledge in general ; ,ake cogni.Le of ^ 
 and condmons, and reme.nber then,, and consti- 
 
 inder! ,'' ""'"'"""'^ """''' ^'« J"'^?'""'' "^ 
 unaerstanuing. 
 
 «bf T"-^"T JWW«, These perceive natural 
 WUh ,„„,« ot their relation.. They conftitute 
 
 h o he r"'f •"'" "' <"'™"'"-»''""" between 
 the other faculties and the material world, and 
 
CLASSIFICATION OF THK PACUL'HEft. 171 
 
 convoy lo the n.inJ all the physical iofuruiation 
 it is eapiiblw of ycqiiiiing. 
 
 External 6V/^vt^?. They are fooling, sight, 
 hearing, taste, and smell. These perform the 
 first portion of the })rocess of i.hgerviri- the 
 physical qnalliies of material objects. 
 
 Obscrvivg and Knowing FacuUie^. They are 
 Individuality, Form, Size, Weight, Color, Order, 
 Calcalutioii and Locality, IMiese store the mind 
 with individual facts; fiimi^h a general know- 
 ledge of things, their conditions and qralitit ; 
 collect statistical infor.naiion ; create a desire 
 and talent proponiohato to Jieir si/o for obser- 
 ving and knowing; as.d thus render very great 
 assistance in doing every kind of business. They 
 are located directly above the eyes— their prin- 
 cipal medium with the external W( ^Id-and 
 When very large, causa the lower portions of the 
 forehead above the eyes to protrude proportion- 
 ally, but when small, this portion is depressed. 
 
 Semi-PcrcejUive Faculties. They are eventu- 
 ality, time, tune and language. These consti- 
 tute a class of i^iculties intermed?- o between 
 those which perceive objects and thuir pi sical 
 qualities, and those which comprehend the ab- 
 stract relations (things, and have to do with a 
 class of facts which are not necessarily of a phy- 
 iical character. 
 
 ii 
 
172 
 
 MAlt DfSI'LAVKI). 
 
 
 •i Ml 
 
 "'""'"y ""'' -■"Pan-.on. These form ide«7 
 
 'elahmi,, the oonn,.x!on between ,.a„,o end ef- 
 
 eot, proposition, i„f,,,„ee, &e. ; f„nn i„d„„;;/. 
 
 dl-over truth and absurdity. Tbey are blTed 
 
 head. When they are lar^re, the npper portion 
 of .« orehead is very |„gb, broad and dLp a 
 wed a. prom.nent, but, when thcv are small 
 th.;^ portion is low, narrow and depr'os.ed 
 
 C0.M,M,v;.T,0.VS OK -,,„.; ,.,,,s.srs OK Fa.'U. 
 
 W is ell' ^'1'' ""■'■ "' "'" ''^''' «""«' »««!?!- 
 
 propensities and seltish sentiLnts th re , ^ 
 -S portion is called frontal, and i devo ed t„ 
 
 «.« organs of tho sentiments and tbo intellect 1 
 One .„ wl,.,rn the occipital region is larger an 
 he frontal, will have proportionally more of fee 
 «g ban reason ; of passion than intellect op" 
 
 than depth and strength of intellect ; of zeal 
 
 w"henTh7o; "1 :•"■"■ '"^M^^ent.bu: 
 por,^ hecT' " ™^"^-'-«'an the frontal 
 potion the character will be directly the oppo- 
 site- One .„ whom the basilar region predomi 
 nate-s over the coronal win ^ I'reaomj- 
 
 cornnal, will possess great force 
 
<: MniNATlONS OF 1 |JE (LAHSKS (M" 173 
 
 and ctRcioncy of character ; a ready taleiit f^.r 
 business, and study, and Urong passions - 
 plied to selfish purposes, but accompanied i Ufa 
 less morality and human sentiments, and yot 
 with full causality and comparison, may bo ca- 
 pable of etFecting and conducting- important oper- 
 ations. This portion of the brain is generally 
 largo jn men who distinguish themselves in the 
 world. One who possesses a greater development 
 of the mural and intellectual faculties than of the 
 propensities, vnii have goodness with less great- 
 ness or force of character, morality and virtue, 
 joined with want of energy; will be amiable and 
 sentimental if not eminently pious, yet elfectbut 
 little. Tnis organization is but poorly adapted 
 to the exigencies of the nineteenth century. One 
 having large organs of the propensities, and the 
 religious 5.Hn(imeat:s and reLsoning faculties, 
 moderate or full, may struggle hard agstinst the 
 current of his propensiiies, yet will be liable to 
 be often overcome by it. may endeavor to live a 
 virtuous, Ohri..tian life, yel v/ill be .ometiraes 
 guilty of gross inconsistencies and apt to take 
 conrracr.d views of rdigious .ahj.ct., and in- 
 dulge alternately bo!h classes of organs ; but 
 with the moral and reasuhing facnilies equally 
 larg.^ will bv, obliged to struggle hard, vet wili 
 «trnggi<. succe.sfullv against ■• bis .-..iL }.<..,. 
 
174 
 
 MA.V DISPLAYRn 
 
 mm 
 
 mm 
 
 if 11 
 
 ting m,." «ml, in general, be con- ' .f i„ m. 
 religion, belief and praclioe. On- „„ ,„' 
 
 propensities well rterelnped, with ..rv u2 
 ■"oral .nd intellectual organ,. ,,i„ ' JJ^,' 
 great strength of „,i„d with great energy of ohar 
 - or, directed l,v the hu.nane .en.infe'nra ^^ 
 ap!.I.ed ,0 be advancentent of moral and 
 benevolent objects, and he a talented and n,Z 
 
 mem er of society, yet have n,a„y fault. On 
 With the propensities and the intellectnal or^an, 
 large, and the moral deficient, will combine g°eat 
 power and energy „f „,i„d ,vith great depr.tvity 
 of character, and never lack mean, bv which to 
 grat,fy b„, .,elfi.h pasdon.. One baring .1. 
 of each ck«« of organs large or very large, wM| 
 present seemingly contradictory pha.e,.of -har- 
 «c er, w,l! often do what he afterward^ ...^Z 
 and be subject to a constant ■• warfare betwee^ 
 the flesh and the spirit." One having the per- 
 cepfve faculties generally large ov very ,„rg , 
 
 mmd well stored with facts, and a dci^e to see 
 an t„ow-athir«t for genc-al h,forn,atio,! aj 
 
 to dli ' '";^''"'"'"'' 't-«» ^Wlity to attend 
 to d,t. Is, and a popular, practiaal busine.., tal- 
 
 and pene rat,on of mind, but cannot superintend 
 oompheated operations ; may be a good «holar 
 
 IIJH! 
 
rOMBrXATIONS OF THK CLASSES OP 
 
 176 
 
 and pass for a man of talents, yefc will not think 
 profoundly, nor r.-adily comprehend first prin- 
 ciples, nor bear sounding. One with the reflect- 
 ing organs larg-e, and t!,o perceptive only mode- 
 rate or nnmU, or with the upper portion of the 
 forehead larger than the low.-^r, will think more 
 than he ob.servei or communicates ; will have 
 much more to do with id.-^ac, than with facts • 
 with fundamental principles and the ireneral 
 bearing of things than with the details and mi- 
 nutia ; he will be unable to emj.Iov his nowers 
 to a good advantage, or fihowwhat he in except 
 in a certain sphere, yet will bear well : have a 
 fund of important, ideas and excellent judgment, 
 and shine in proportion as he is tried." One 
 having tht perceptive and reasuning organs 
 ooth large or very large, and a large and active 
 bram, will have a universal talent and a mind 
 well furnished with fact« and principles, and a 
 respectable development of the propensities, 
 possess a decidedly superior intellect, and be 
 capable of rising to eminence ; will aot only pes- 
 sees talentK of a very high order, but be able to 
 nm them to the be«t advantage, and succeed in 
 whatever h* andertakes. even when most around 
 him fail, Onewitiian even head in which all 
 the parts are respectably balanced or developed 
 will have few prominent traits of character, and 
 few exrip«n»»« nr /lofi«;..^^; — 
 
 ; vvifi ao ii lair 
 
il 
 
 176 
 
 \IAN UISPLAYfcJU. 
 
 bMme.s», fake i,is chai^aoter frou, surrounding 
 
 object a«d circumstances, and pass , eUv 
 
 hrough l,fe ; bat if the brain is la ge aSlZ 
 
 ac^ve and external circumstances art favorabZ 
 
 i^tli a::"""'*'»*'""''^-8^-'''"'verythi„g 
 without any wealc points of character, and capa- 
 ble of swayns- a comr.nuauding influence. Z 
 w.th an uneven bead ,vill be n.to.ious for hi! 
 peou^rmes of talents and disposition;.,' 
 mov A 'r"'-'''"^'"= fig>=™ wherever h, 
 
 i.afl*'',:;;™ :/'.■';--' organ., 
 « vt^r^ HLporlant infiuruoe upon th« 
 charauter and the „,enta! n,anifc.„atior, pa ti 
 «« any l„ dirocing the.,. K,,. ,,„;,'; ^.^ ' 
 eateeu,. iargoor very iarKe, co»,i,i„ed wit^ ,1,, 
 larger u,orai a.d rea.,ou.g ,..,,,,, ,,,™' 
 
 *nd .,obi™..«, amJ faigS.-a.iudcu.e-^, ..vhirt 
 the mo»t eouanerMuble trai, of .h.rad.r ■ -.vi.il. 
 weak..,- ...... r, . ■''"^■''.^"■'"' J"""'« ^^i"' 
 
 --■"''if ;/iui U'i\i.yiiit),r 
 
 ' i i i ; t 
 
 .Hiid 
 
 proud conceii.d. in^perfiiu.m, ...i •;.., 'dk 
 The lar^vr organs cc.ural ..ul ui.v..; ii,. 
 
\AA1E.S AXD \UMDER OP THE ORGA\S. I?? 
 
 \7eak-r ones and also give the stamp to the 
 whole character, \vhilo the smaller ones, in pro- 
 portion to their strength, modify the action of 
 the larger. Thus, one having large con.bative- 
 ness and destructiveness, wifh large self-esteem, 
 will employ the former to avenge personal 
 injuries, to promote selfish interests, and domi- 
 neer over others ; but with self-esteem only 
 moderate, and conscientiousness and benevo- 
 lence large,will seldom resent personal injuries, 
 yet will maintain the cause of truth and justice! 
 
 NAMES AND NUMBER OF TflE PHRENOLOGICAL 
 
 ORGANS. 
 
 NO. 
 
 NAMES. 
 
 ABBREyiATIONS 
 
 Domeslic Propensities. 
 Amr.tiveness 
 
 Domes. Propen, 
 Amt. 
 Pfiilo. 
 
 PhiloprogenitivneHS 
 
 4 nh.bmvenes. l|U*b; 
 
 ■> O.^ace-ntrahvenees Con<-;*.nt. 
 
 \ .^'''Jiiifi Propensities. t^elf.x 
 
 6 CoiuliMf iveness [ [ 
 
 7 Destructi venesa ..[ 
 
 8 Alinienti voneos ' " 
 
 9 AcqnisitireDGsa ......... 
 
 ' Secretivfeiif'ss [, 
 
 II f, ^eljish tSentiments. 
 
 H Cautiousness 
 
 ly Approbativeaeo? 
 
 13 Self Esteem '■.'■ 
 
 14 Firmness ....!'.'.'.] 
 
 J-; n^ , Moral bienlimeiits.' Mor Serdi 
 
 M 
 
 ^ Propen. 
 
 Combat. 
 
 Destruct 
 
 Aliment. 
 
 Acquis. 
 
 Secret. 
 
 ^ ISelf. iScnit. 
 
 Caut. 
 
 Appro. 
 
 Self En. 
 
 Firm. 
 
178 
 
 MA IV FJISPLAYRI). 
 NAMKs AND NoiiucK OF TiiK onuA^,.^( Continued.) 
 
 No. 
 
 16 
 17 
 
 18 
 19 
 
 20 
 SI 
 2U 
 23 
 24 
 
 2G 
 
 L'7 
 28 
 29 
 
 yo 
 
 31 
 •S-2 
 33 
 34 
 35 
 36 
 
 37 
 38 
 
 z> 
 
 NAMKS. 
 
 Ilf'pt' 
 
 M-t rvc'llousness 
 
 V". iinrati.in 
 
 li' l\l■^Vo\^'^)C.|^ 
 
 i^'emi Inlenecluai ' k'c'nt.imp'nll 
 Onr)i»tru(;livennss... 
 f n'fjility '\ ■ 
 
 Sublimity ' ' 
 
 I'tiifHti.>n _ 
 
 Mirthfuliiept^. 
 
 ABBRKVMTIONS 
 
 IWptive Faculties Pe^f E 
 
 fTopp. 
 Mnrvel. 
 
 Ven. 
 
 tiemi-Jntcl. Srnti. 
 Coust. 
 Ifie. 
 Sub. 
 Irni. 
 Mirthfl. 
 
 rarm 
 
 SizH ' 
 
 Weifjht.. ...'.'!."'][ m ]■"" ' 
 
 Color '''[ 
 
 Order 
 
 < 'HlfulHlion ........'/.'.] 
 
 L'/CHlity ^i"' 
 
 Kvuntuality [[[ 
 
 Time '.'.'.'.'.." 
 
 Til no * ' " 
 
 Laiij^UHtTft 
 
 ReasoTiinpr Organs. 
 ('flU9nl-.ty ° 
 
 Coixiparigon 
 
 Suavitivpne^s '.'.'.', 
 
 Human N«turp.,'. ' 
 
 Facl. 
 Ind. 
 Form. 
 Size. 
 Wt. 
 Col. 
 Order. 
 Ca!. 
 Loc!. 
 Kven. 
 Time. 
 Tune. 
 Lang'. 
 
 Rt-as'g Organs. 
 Cans. 
 Com p. 
 Suat. 
 Hum. Nafr. 
 
 _ In ll.« preceding table we have onutted to 
 give the size of the organs, for the reason that 
 this work is „ot designed to enter into the 
 minutia or detail of any subject, but merely to 
 give a general display of man in all of the 
 characters of which we l^now him to be pos- 
 
 sessed. 
 
ANALVSla AM, CI,AS.SrFICAI I0.\. 179 
 
 Analysis and Classification. „k the 
 
 f,'ri''''',T' ^f"'"'^"™-- Reciprocal Attach- 
 ment and love „f the sexes as such, with adhe- 
 mene,« connubial love and the nurried rell- 
 t.on Adaptation. To prevent the extinction 
 
 b eamr'"' '"'"* ^'°^'"'""' ^^ ''' continuance 
 airangements necessarily cc.nected with man's 
 eawh ly ex.tence. the forme.- has its counterpar 
 ■n th.s organ, ,t creates all those relations and 
 recproca feelings existing letween the sexes as 
 ueh ; and results in marriage and offspring So 
 far Iron, being gross or exceptiouable the 
 proper u.e of this organ is pure, chast and 
 even desirable. The son who always loves and 
 
 ful to hts w,fe, and the endearing recollections 
 of loved ones, will always be a strong incense 
 to virtue, as well as a restraint upon his v oil 
 propensities. The mother dotes un^! h 
 andthefatheruponhisdaugt?::.! ,?:::;• 
 
 faculty this organ is larger in the braia of ner 
 «ons residing in a city, than thos. in the coti^r^" 
 owing to its continual exereise by cares. " 
 bestowed upon children by the op'p "e ^ b" 
 
 possible. Average : One having this 
 
180 
 
 MAN DISPLAVKD. 
 
 organ average, v;i]l treat the other sex tenderly, 
 and enjoy society, yet not ho enchanted with it,' 
 nor allow it to divert him from graver pursuits, 
 yet its amount will ho determined hy his tem- 
 peraments and combinations. If adhHsIvenesg, 
 conscientiousness and ideality are large, and 
 activity great, his iovo will he tender and 
 intense, yet pure and oha.ste ; partake more of 
 elevated friendship than animal feeling, and bo 
 refined and virtuous ; he will have more friends 
 than lovers among the opposite sex ; be dis- 
 gusted with vulgarity in them ; in car^e his love 
 is well placed, will enjoy the marriage relations 
 much, and with the Intellectual organs large 
 will love the intellectual only. But, if ideality 
 is moderate or small ho will disregard mere 
 personal beauty and choose a useful companion. 
 With cautiousness very large, ho will mature 
 his love slowly, hesitate much, and perhaps 
 make no choice at all. With cautiousness and 
 secretivenesa both large, he will express more 
 love than he feels, and that by plecJ-meal, and 
 then not till his loved one is fully committed. 
 With conscientiousnc-^s and approbativeness 
 large, he can love only one whose morals are 
 pure with small self-esteem ; will be bashful in 
 the company of the opposite sex. With adhe- 
 aiveaess and benevolence large, with ideality 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 181 
 
 and approbativenesR small, will be really kind 
 and nfiVcfionrit- towards tin; other sex, yet not 
 polite or re-finod, hut merely attentive. Full: 
 One having uiiiatireness ful), will experience 
 the same feelin^^s in kind, (oaly in a greater 
 degree) with one havini^^ amativeness average. 
 Large : One v/ho has amativeness la'-ge, will be 
 alive to the charms of the other sex ; a great 
 admirer of their beauty of form, elegance of man- 
 ners, on account of the reciprocal influence of 
 this faculty can easily ingratiate himself into 
 their good will, become acquainted with, and 
 exert an inflaeneo over them, and kindle in them 
 a passion of love, or, at best, create a favourable 
 impression, even if in some respects disagreeable; 
 bis warmest friends will be those of the opposite 
 sex, and when this feeling is strongly excited, 
 finds it hard to govern. Very large : One 
 having this organ very large, experiences its 
 power to almost an vingove.'-nable extent; is 
 passionately fond of the other sex ; should by 
 all means be married ; will place the highest 
 estimate upon them, and experience the feelings 
 described under amativeness large, except in a 
 greater degree of power, so that making due 
 allowance for the increase of this feeling, hia 
 character will bo read in this respect under 
 amativeness large, selecting those combinations 
 
182 
 
 WAN D/Sl'LAVED. 
 
 ri If* 
 III % 
 
 wh ch ar. f„„„d i„ hi, head. Small : V,eh 
 li t « oonnubml lovo or desire to n.arry • i, cold 
 distan and reserved to ,he opposite /e^ ' 
 
 J^Moprogcnilhcnes,. Parental love ■ athel, 
 
 gill : r , "'^"'•'■"^ ■' '"'" <"■ «^"^- 
 
 f, ' '"Sht v,-e know, man, liko iho fabled 
 Mmerva fron, the brain of Jubiter ^Zt 
 ha.o been brought forth in the f „ U posset 
 swn of all his faculties both nh, La ." 
 
 .nental, eapab,o,fro,n the first .onSr, -sex 
 ' tenoe of taking care of himself, and of sno 
 
 w se. He enters the world in a helpless cn„ 
 dmon,and,but for the greatest paren a car"' 
 every mfant must inevitably perish, ad our 
 
 2: ofThT' '^'":-f ''" '"'^ --^-ent or 
 state of things, philoprogenitiveness is adapted 
 nor can any other element of man's natur« , 
 compiisb this end attained by this fculy The 
 "fant cannot be regarded as a friend, and tile 
 fore adheszvenes, cannot be exercised upon 
 
 Ca..a t, might devise the means ro^uisU? for 
 Its re ef, but would not lift his finger towards 
 executmg them. Benevolence might do so^l 
 
 "f ' T ' """" "^ '" ""> ""'^^^ 'heir phy 
 .cal salvafon or their n.ental and moral 'ul- 
 
 ture. How often do we find persons very 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSf FIXATION. 
 
 183 
 
 benevolent to adults, but cruel to children. 
 These vexatious and expensive little creatures 
 are far more likely to array combativeness, des- 
 tructivoness and acquisitiveness against them 
 than benevolence or any other faculty in their 
 tavour ; so thatif pareiit.s had no faculty adapted 
 exclusively to the nursing and training of their 
 oflfspring, their burdens would be too intolerable 
 to be submitted to, whereas this faculty renders 
 them the dearest of all objects to parents, their 
 richest treasure, their .-reatest delight, and an 
 object for which they live, labor and suffer 
 more than for any other, casting into the shade 
 all toil and trouble which they cause, and lacer- 
 ating the parent's heart with the bitterest pangs, 
 when dea^h or space tears the parent and child 
 asunder. The numberless attentions demanded 
 by the helpless condition of children, require a 
 much more vigorous action of the other facul- 
 ties in their favor, than is demanded by adults. 
 Philoprogenitiveness excites combat, and com- 
 bativeness and cautiousness in their defence.— 
 Causality to plan, and Benevolence to execute 
 means for their relief; it stimulates acquintive- 
 ness to accumulate means to educate them— in 
 fact, it sets all the other faculties to work in 
 their behalf. However, the duties and relations 
 of the mother to her offspring require a much 
 
184 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 greater endowment of this faculty in her, than 
 in the father, and aceordin-ly, we find much 
 larger philoprogenitiveness in the female than 
 in the male head. This adaptation of the organ 
 in woman, to the far greater power of the 
 passion, and of both, to the far greater demand 
 made upon iier by her oiTspring, is an important 
 evidence of the truth of phrenology. Average : 
 One having philoprogenitiveness average, will 
 take considerable Interest in children, espe- 
 cially when they begin to walk ana prattle, and, 
 If a parent, exert himself strenuously to provide 
 for them ; place a high but reasonable value 
 upon them ; be sufficiently tender of them, yet 
 not foolishly indulgent ; be pleased with good 
 children, yet not bear much from those that are 
 troublesome ; and whilst he will value his own 
 children highly, and bear considerably from 
 them, he will not care much about those of 
 others, or bear much from them. One bavins 
 philoprogenitiveness average, with destructive''- 
 ness large, will not manifest a great fondness 
 for infants, yet when his own children are 
 capable of being made companions and friends 
 will prize them iiighly. With combativeness 
 and destructiveneM. larger than philoprogeni- 
 tiveness, though tolerably fond of good children, 
 Will not be.r with their mischief, or their noise. 
 
ANALYSIS A.M) ( \SSIFICATION. 
 
 185 
 
 and hence often old if h^* does not j .sh 
 them : with well developed iiilellectual organs, 
 will labor for theirivtellectuul in r.veir.entand 
 give thein advanta{,^eM tor education. With the 
 moral or/^ans large, will seek the moral and 
 religiou.i improvement, and give them good 
 advantages for obtaining it, and watch er 
 their moral conduct. Witli adhesiveness, benevo- 
 lence, firmness, conscientiousness and the rea- 
 soning organs large, combaliveness and self- 
 esteem full, will like children well, yet be far 
 from r^.oiling thom by over indulgence, and 
 generally secure their obedience, yet not treat 
 them with severity. With very large conscien- 
 tiousness, will not make suflicient allowance for 
 their childisi.::ess, butcensuro their thoughtless 
 mischief as though it were a premeditated 
 wrong. Full : One having this organ full with 
 tho corresponding faculties, his character will 
 be read under ibis organ, average, making an 
 allowance for increase of size. Large : One 
 having philoprogenitivenes large, if a parent, 
 takes a deep and lively interest in his children j 
 enjoys their company and childish sports, and 
 perhaps often mingles with ihem ; easily gains 
 their good will by paying them some little at- 
 tention, and is therefore the better qualified 
 to govern and educate them ; values his children 
 

 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 fe 
 
 
 y. 
 
 f/. 
 
 mi 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 150 '"" "' 
 
 2.5 
 
 I -- IIIIIM 
 
 I- 
 
 1.8 
 
 U III 1.6 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 V 
 
 <^ 
 
 '^< 
 
 p. 
 
 -40^ 
 
 \ 
 
 :\ 
 
 9) 
 
 .V 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 
 f1? 
 

 W.r 
 
 fA 
 
^86 
 
 MAN DISPLAYEO 
 
 above all price ; cheerfully submifs to parental 
 care and toil; spares no pains for them ; watches 
 tenderly around their sick-bed ; regrets their 
 absence, and greaily laments their loss, and if 
 concentratlveness is large, will mourn over 
 that loss for years, but with concentrativenesi 
 small, though he will feel their loss keenly 
 Whenever he thinks of it will, however, bo occa- 
 sionally relieved by a change of scenes, places, 
 &c. V\ ith combativenesf., destructiveness and 
 self-esteem full, and adhesiveness, benevolence 
 conscientiousness, firmness and the reasoning 
 organs large, corrects his children for their own 
 good, and not for his caprice, and governs them 
 mamly by moral suasion, and only employs 
 physical force as a last resort; is kind, yet 
 strict; fond, yet not over indulgent; gratifies 
 his children whenever he can do so without 
 injuring them, but no further; and is well 
 qualified to become and discharge the duties of 
 a guardian and parent. If a professor of 
 religion will interest himself in moral and 
 religious institutions, such as sabbath schools, 
 &c., and with large cautiousness added, will 
 have much anxiety about the matter; with the 
 intellectual organs large, will do his utmost to 
 cultivate their intellect; with an active tempera- 
 ment, a moderate sized brain, and large com- 
 
ANALYSIS A\D CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 187 
 
 bativeness and destructivenesa, and moderate 
 cau.s?.lity, secretiveness, and conscientiousness, 
 will be by turns too indulgen;, and then too 
 severe— pet them one minute, and punish or 
 scold (hem the next, not overlooking their 
 childish foibles ; with but moderate self-esteem 
 added, will fail to secure their respect or 
 obedience, and will allow them to trample upon 
 him; with large approbativeness and ideality 
 added to this combination, will be likely to 
 educate them for show rather than for useful- 
 ness, thus making them self-conceited fops, and 
 gaudy belles, rather than useful members of 
 society ; but with a large brain, well developed 
 morally and intellectually, and only moderate 
 ideality and approbativeness, will seek their 
 usefulness, rather than their distinction, and 
 give them a practical and substantial education. 
 With a full or large sized brain, and well 
 developed moral and intellectual organs, particu- 
 larly large firmness, self-esteem, conscientious- 
 ness, individuality, eventuality, locality, form, 
 language, order, calculation and comparison, will 
 be eminently qualified for teaching school, and 
 capable of both governing and instructing them. 
 This organ also fastens upon other objects of caro, 
 such as the domestic animals, particularly horses, 
 dogs, cattle, birds, &c ; this organ being com- 
 
■n 
 
 ISS 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 bined with ideality, aids in matching and judging 
 of horses, and with large acquisitiveness, leads 
 to trading in them. Very large : One having 
 philoprogenitiveness very large, will experience 
 the feelings described under this organ large, 
 but in the highest degree of intensity and 
 power ; will idolize his children ; grieves im- 
 moderately at their loss, and absolutely lives 
 for them. With large benevolence cannot cor- 
 rect them, and with average causality is in 
 danger of spoiling them by over indulgence. — 
 With large approbativeness or self-esteem, in- 
 dulges parental vanity, and prides himself upon 
 his children, and takes every opportunity of 
 exhibiting their attainments. With large cau- 
 tiousness, indulges in a multitude of groundless 
 apprehensions concerning their safety. With 
 large intellectual organs, will love them as in- 
 tellectual beings, rather than as merely his own 
 children, and employ his utmost powers in cul- 
 tivating the higher and nobler qualities of man's 
 nature, contemplating them with a fondness 
 amounting to rapture. Moderate : One having 
 this organ moderate, will not be fond enough of 
 children to bear much from them ; may love his 
 own children, but care very little for those of 
 others, and cannot please or take care of them, 
 particularly infants, nor endure their cry or 
 
 I 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 189 
 
 noise. With an active tenjperament and large 
 conibativeness, is yet v/ith destructiveness and 
 combativene? only full, witb philoprogeoitive- 
 ness large, lai ay do everything ftr their good, 
 and never see them sufhjr. This description will 
 apply to this organ average, due allowance be- 
 ing made for the decrease of feeling. Small : 
 feels little interest even in his own children, 
 and is liable to treat them, as well as others, 
 unkindly. Location : This organ is locaii^d in 
 the centre of the back part of the head, just 
 above the sharp point of the occipital bone an \ 
 back of the top of the ears. When the lobes of 
 adhesiveness are large, and philoprogenitive- 
 ness is small, a depression will be found between 
 the lower portion of the two lobes of adhesive- 
 ness, but when philoprogenitivenessis also large, 
 this portion of the head v/ill be elongated. 
 When [thiloprogenitiveness and adhesiveness 
 are both large, and inhabitiveness small, it as- 
 sumes as^harpened appearance, running horizon- 
 tally between the two lobes of adhesiveness. 
 
 Amativeness is located in the cerebellum, or 
 between the rnastord processes behind the ear, 
 and when large, causes this portion of the head 
 to appear broad, and thick ; when small, tho 
 neck is thin and narrow. 
 
 Adhcsivmess : Friendship, social feeling, 
 love of society. Average, is quite friendly, yet 
 
190 
 
 MAN DISFLAYKD. 
 
 not willing to sacrifice anything for his friends. 
 Full, is highly social, yet not remarkably warm 
 hearted. Large, is eminently social, an ardent, 
 sincere friend ; enjoys friendly society extremely', 
 forms strong, if not hasty attachments. Very 
 large loves friends with indescrihable tender- 
 ness and feeling ; will sacrifice almost every- 
 thing upon the dtar of friendship. With large 
 amativeness, is susceptible of the most devoted 
 connubial love ; falls in love easily. Moderate, 
 loves fridnds some, yet self more ; is often 
 changing his friends. Small, or very small, is 
 unsocial, cold-hearted, likes and is liked by 
 few or none, and in reality is a stranger to all 
 friendly feelings. Location : The location of 
 this organ is outward and upward from philo- 
 progenitiveness, and above amativeness, and 
 its shape nearly oval. 
 
 Inhahitiveness. Love of home, as such 5 
 attachment to the place where one has lived ; 
 unwillingness to change it. Average : forms 
 some local attachments though not very strong. 
 Full : loves home well, yet does rot grieve 
 much on leaving it. Large : soon becomes 
 strongly attached to home, loves it dearly, 
 thinks the place in which he lives about the best 
 in the country, leaves it reluctantly, is unhappy 
 without a home of hid own. Very large ; regards 
 home as the sweetest, dearest spot on earth ; 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 191 
 
 feels homesick when away, dislikes changing 
 residences, is pre-eminently patriotic, thinks of 
 his native place with intense interest. One 
 with inhabitiveness small forms few or no local 
 attachments, cares little where he is, makes any 
 place his home, leaves and changes residences 
 without regret. Location: The location of 
 inhabitiveness is directly above philoprogenitive- 
 ness, and partly between the two lobes of adhe- 
 siveness. Where it is large, and concentrative- 
 ness moderate, an angle is formed near the 
 union of the lamboidal sutures, between which 
 and occipital bone there will be a considerable 
 distance, but when it is small no such organ 
 will be found. 
 
 Concentrativeness. Unity and continuity of 
 thought and feeling, power of entire and concen- 
 trated application to one thing. Average : does 
 not possess this power to any great extent, yet 
 may carry on some small amount of business. 
 Full : is disposed to attend to but one thing at 
 a time, yet can turn rapidly from one thing to 
 another; is neither disconnected nor prolix. 
 Large : is able and inclined to apply his mind 
 to one and but one subject for the time being, 
 changes his mental operations with difficulty ; 
 this, combined with large mental faculties, with 
 language added, it fond of hearing and telling 
 
192 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 arge 
 
 long stories ; with tliia organ full, ard 1 
 mental faculties, will make a good scholar and a 
 man of busines?. One having concent; ativeness 
 very large, places his mind slowly upon subjects; 
 will not leave them, nor attend to but one thing 
 at once ; is very tediouS, has great application, 
 but lacks intensity and point. Small : craves 
 novelty and variety, has little application, thinks 
 and feels intensely, yet not long, on anything; 
 jumps rapidly from premise to conclusion, fails 
 
 to connect and carry out ideas;. Location : 
 
 1. 
 
 This organ is located above inhabitiveness and 
 adhesiveness, and bolow self-esteem. AVhen it 
 is large, or very large, a general fullness of this 
 region will be observable, but no protuberance 
 will be apparent ; but when it is small, a pro- 
 portionate semi-ciroular depression will be very 
 perceptible, in part encircling a.'.lhesivcnesg and 
 inhabitiveness, and following the lamboidal 
 sutures. When inhabitiveness is also small, 
 the depression is widened at the union uf these 
 sutures. 
 
 Selfish Propensities. Thesa provide for 
 the various animal wants ; have reference to the 
 necessities, desires, and gratifications of their 
 possessor, and terminate upon his sensual inter- 
 ests and wants. Large or very large : has 
 strong animal desires ; is strongly tempted to 
 
ANALYSIS AND tJLA.SSIFU'ATro.N. 
 
 193 
 
 graHfy tbem ; and unless the moral sentiments 
 are 8till ytronger, will bo selfish, and live only 
 to gratify his own in'jiinations, wiihout, any 
 regard to the happiness of others. Small : is nut 
 selfish enough ; easily trod upon ; needs to 
 have some one to take care of him ; cannot give 
 himself up to sensual pleasures. Wiih large 
 conscientiousness will be easily duped ynd be 
 made to believe that whatever is told him for 
 truth, must be so. 
 
 Vitativeness. Love of existence ; as such, 
 dread of annihilation. Average : is attached to 
 life, and fears death, yet not, a great deal. Full : 
 desires life, but. not eagerly, from love of it, and 
 of pleasure. Large : loves and clings to life 
 tenaciously ; loves existence for its own sake ; 
 craves immortality ; prKers a miserable exist- 
 ence to annihilation. Very large : however 
 wretched, shrinks and shudders at the thought 
 of being dead ; feels that he cannot give up 
 existence. 
 
 Combativencss. Feeling of resistance ; defence, 
 opposition, boldness, willingness to encounter, 
 courage, &c. Average : is pacific, but when 
 driven to it, defends his right boldly ; avoids 
 collision, strife, tStc, yet. once excited, is quite 
 forcible. Full : seldom either seeks or dreads 
 opposition ; when roused is energetic ; may be 
 
 N . 
 
194 
 
 MAN DISPLAYKP. 
 
 quicktempered ; yet is notcontenfious. Large : 
 is resolute and coura^^eous, spirited and enficient 
 as an opponent ; quick and intrepid in resist- 
 ance ; loves debate ; boldly meets opposition, if 
 he does not court it. Very large : is powerful 
 in opposition ; prone to dispute ; ready to 
 attack, &c ; given to be contrary ; has a violent 
 temper, and governs it with difficulty. Small, 
 or very small, is inefficient; lacks force and 
 temper ; is chicken-hearted ; is almost afraid of 
 his own slmdow. Location ; In a common sized 
 head, combativeness is located about an inch 
 and a half behind the top of the ear, and extends 
 itself in a perpendicular direction. When it is 
 very large, and the surrouiiding organs also 
 large, it will cause a thickness of this part of 
 the head, which may be the more easily 
 observed by placing the thumb upon the organ 
 on one side, and the fingers upon the opposite 
 side, but when it is moderate or small, there 
 yrill be but little protruberance in this region. 
 
 Destnictivencss. Executiveness, indignation, 
 force, severity, sternness, a destroying, pain- 
 causing disposition. Average : is by no means 
 deficient, yet, has none too much. Full : can 
 cause, or witness severity and even death ; has 
 sufficient severity, but it requires considerable 
 to call it out. Large: when excite 1 feels 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASaiFIC \TION. 
 
 195 
 
 deep toned indignation ; is foroiole, and is dis- 
 posed to destroy or subdue the ' .use of hia dis- 
 pleasure. Very large: Mi hen provoked, is vin- 
 dictive, cruel, disposed to hurt, take revenge, 
 &c ; as an enemy is bitter and implacable. 
 Location ; this organ is located beneath the 
 temporal bone, and, when large, extends from 
 three to six eights of an inch above the top of 
 the ear. When it is large t thickens the middle 
 of the base of the head, and makes the ears 
 stand out from the head. When it is large, or 
 very large, and secretive! ess small, it produces 
 a horizontal ridge which extends about half an 
 i»jcb above the top of the ear. 
 
 Alimentiveness. Appetite for sustenanee ; 
 cause of hunger. Average : enjoys food well] 
 but is not particular. Full : has a goo .ppe- 
 tite, yet can govern it well ; hence is not 
 greedy. Large : has an excellent appetite ; a 
 hearty relish for food, drink, &c.. enjoys them 
 much ; is a good provider ; not dainty. Very 
 large : sets too much by the indulgence of huB 
 palate; eats with the keenest appetite ; makes 
 an idol of his stomach. Small, or very small : 
 has no relish for food ; is very particular in his 
 choice of food ; cares but very little when he 
 eats, or whether he eats at all. Location : 
 Alimentiveness is located ju3t before, and a little 
 
i; 
 
 ii 
 
 196 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 below destructiveness, in front of the top pert of 
 the ears, beneath the anterior portion of the 
 temporal bone. It may be distinguished from 
 deatmotiveness, by its being situated farther 
 forward and a little below it. It is generally 
 large in children. 
 
 Acq Hint iceness. Love of acquiring property, 
 and possesing it as such ; desire to save ; an 
 innate principle to possess and dispose of 
 things. Average : loves money, but u.ies not 
 make it his god ; can make it, hut spends it 
 freely. With large benevolence, gives liberally 
 to the needy and destitute. With large moral 
 and religious sentiments, gives freely to the sup- 
 port of the gospel and moral Institutions ; if the 
 intellectual organs are very large, delights in 
 supporting educational institutions, common 
 schools, &o. Full : sets by property, both fur 
 itself and what it procures, yet is not penurious; 
 is industrious and saving, ynt supplies his 
 wants ; may be close in making a bargain, yet 
 not dishonest. One having large acquisitive- 
 ness, has a strong desire to acqu're property ; 
 is frugal ; savingof money ; devoted to money- 
 making : generally gets the worth of it, and is 
 quite fond of trading. Very large : makes 
 money his idd, and unless conscientiousnes is 
 also very large, will be inclined to use dishonest 
 
ANALYSIS AND CI.AS3IKICATI0\. 
 
 197 
 
 monns to ol»f«in if, ; wil! he oMiged to contend 
 rniK^h with UU desires to rMrnain sfrictly lionest. 
 Small, or very small : upends all the money he 
 Clin get, injudiciously, regardlo^s of the price of 
 thinjrs, in fact, hardly knows the worth of money. 
 Location : tins organ is located just before 
 Bccretirenessand above alimentiveness, or, upon 
 '.he sides of the hi-ad, and a little further for- 
 ward than the fore part of the ears ; or in the 
 middle of a line , connecting the organs of cau- 
 tiousness and calculation. It seldom causes a 
 protuberance, but, when it is large, the thick- 
 ness of the head is perceivable, even io the 
 naked eye, just in front of, and a little above the 
 tops of the ears. 
 
 Secret ivcness. Desire and ability to secrete, 
 conceal, &c. Average : is not very frank, but 
 generally ope»i ; can conceal, if ho chooses. 
 Full : can keep to himself what he chooses, yet 
 not cunr'ng. Large : seldom discloses his 
 plans, opinions &o ; is hard to be found out ; is 
 non-committal. Very large: seldom appears 
 what he really is, orsay^ what ho means, often 
 equivocates and deceives ; is mysterious, dark, 
 cunning, artful, given to double dealing; is an 
 eye servant. Moderate : is quite candid, open- 
 hearted, and loves truth ; hates underhanded 
 measures, and seldom employs them. Small : 
 
198 
 
 MAN DISPLAYEO. 
 
 speaks out just what he thinks ; acts as he feels ; 
 does not wish to know, or tell the secrets of 
 others, yet freely tells his own ; is too plain 
 spoken and candid. Very small : keeps nothing 
 back, has a transparent heart. Location : Secre- 
 tiveness is located just above the organ of 
 destructiveness, and runs nearly parallel with it 
 <;he centre of it being about an inch above the 
 top of the ear, and when large will cause the 
 side of the head above the ear, to be round, thick 
 and full. 
 
 Selfish SENrrMKNTS. in their character 
 and objects, these faculties partake more of the 
 human, and less of the animal, than do the sel- 
 fish propensities, and although they terminate 
 upon self, yet they have no inconsiderable influ- 
 ence upon the moral character. Average c* 
 full ; has a respectable, not great regard for his 
 character, and desires to do something worthy 
 of himself. Large, or very large : thinks much 
 above and about himself ; has a great amount 
 of character of some kind. Moderate, small, or 
 very small : has too little pride and weight of 
 character and ambition, to give manliness and 
 efficiency. 
 
 Cautiousness. Carefulness ; provision against 
 
 „.,„gj^,i. ^iTci t-igt; . uaa zivam cauiiuii, yet not 
 
 hardly enough for success. Full : has prudence 
 
ANALYSIS A\D CLASSIFFCA I'lON. 
 
 199 
 
 and forethought, yet not too much. Large : is 
 always watchful ; on the look out ; anxious ; 
 provident against real and imaginary danger. 
 Very large : hesitates too much ; suffers greatly 
 from groundless foars ; is timid and easily 
 frightened, &c. Moderate : is rather imprudent, 
 hence, unlucky ; liable to misfortune from care- 
 lessness ; plans too imperfectly for action ; Small : 
 acts impromptu ; disregards consequences ; 
 fears nothing; is imprudent ; luckless, and often 
 in trouble. Location? this organ is located just 
 above, and partly behind secretiveness. Or 
 when the head is erect, it will be found upon the 
 sides of the head, just back of a perpendicular 
 line passing through the opening of the ears. 
 
 Circumspection. Propriety ; discreetness of 
 expression and conduct. Average, or full : has 
 some, though not too much discretion, and some- 
 times speaks inconsiderately. Large, or very 
 large : weighs well what he says and does ; has 
 a nice sense of propriety and thinks before ht 
 speaks. 
 
 Apjjrobativeness. Sense of honor ; regard for 
 character ; ambition ; love of popularity, fame, 
 distinction, &o. Average : enjoys approbation, 
 yet will noi sacrifice much to obtain it. Full : 
 desires and seeks popularity, and feels censure, 
 yet will not trouble himself ixiuch to secure th« 
 
200 
 
 MAN DfSFLAYED. 
 
 one, or avoid the othpr. Lar^e : sets everything 
 by character, honor. &c ; is ivf^enly alive to the 
 frowns and smiles of puhlio opinion, praise. &c ; 
 tries to show off ro a jrood advantajre ; is affable, 
 ambitions, apt to praise himself. Very large : 
 reo-ards his honor and character as the apple of 
 his eye ; is even morbidly sensitive to praise and 
 censure; over fond of praise, and often feels 
 ashamed. &c ; extremely p^dite, ceremonious, 
 &c. Moderate: feels reproach some, yet ia 
 little affedted by popularity or unpopularity ; 
 may gather the flowers that are strewed in hia 
 path, yet will not deviate from it to collect 
 them. Small : cares little for popular frowns 
 or favors; feels little shame; disregards and 
 despises fashion, etiquette, &c ; is not polite. 
 Very small : cares nothing for popular fnvor or 
 censure. Location :' Approbativeness is located 
 between cautiousness and self-esteem. 
 
 Self-esteem. Self-respect ; high-toned manly 
 feeling; innate love of personal liberty, inde- 
 pendent pride of character. Averaee : respects 
 himself, yet is not haughty. Full: has much 
 self-respect ; pride of character ; independence. 
 Large: is high-iuinded; .^elf-confident ; digni- 
 fied ; his own master ; aspires to be, and to do 
 S>)mething worthy ot himself; assnmes respon. 
 sibilities ; does few little things. Very large : 
 
ANALYSIS Ai\D CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 201 
 
 has unbounded self-confidence ; endures no 
 restraint ; takes no advice ; is rather hau^rhty 
 and imperious. Moderate : has some self-res- 
 pect, and manly feeling, yet too little to give 
 ease, dignity, weight of character, and is too 
 trifling. One having small self-esteem, feels 
 too unworthy ; says and does trifling things ; 
 puts himself on a par with the meanest class ; 
 undervalues himself; is not looked up to as a 
 great man. Very small : is servile, low-minded, 
 destitute of self-respect. Location: se'f-esteem 
 is located on the mesial lino of the head, about 
 half an inch above the union of the lamboidal 
 sutures, and directly back offirmucss; or, in 
 the middle of the superior-inferior portion of the 
 head, at an angle of about forty-five degn es 
 wi:h the plane of the base of the skull. Appro- 
 bativeness is located on the two external sides 
 of it, and cautiousness, beyond approbativeness, 
 in the same range. The existence of this faculty 
 demolistraies the position, that the feelings or 
 prlnci[>le of libertj/, and of equal rights, is in- 
 alienable , and inherent in the very nature and 
 constitution of man, that therefore, it can no 
 more be destroyed than hunger or love ; that a 
 purely republican and democratic form of gov- 
 ernment is the only one adapted to the nature 
 of man, and the only one calculated to secure 
 
802 
 
 MAN DISPLAyED. 
 
 the , f "1'°" '^"'^ ""^P""^'' ■• ""1 that 
 the subjugation of man by his fellow-man, is an 
 
 open violation of the principles of hun.an nature 
 
 If our rulers only understood this principle of oj; 
 
 human nature, and if all the landmarks, an a 
 
 the regulations of government only proceeded 
 
 upon us subjection and servitude, all ' "e le ' 
 
 wo'id b r' """" '"^^ ^■^-""' - -cii; 
 
 would be at once abolished. By creating every 
 
 fnd ;1, T"'' ""'"" ""'" *° S»^«™ himself, 
 
 to tvern 'h'"' T" ""«"' '» ""»- »- another 
 govern themselves, subject, however, in the 
 latter case, as they are in the former, to hose 
 regulations which are necessary fort ege eri 
 good, and also to be rewarded accordTg t„ 
 he. deeds. There is no danger of this fee'ng 
 ever bemg extmguish.d ; but, in case the subju 
 gatton and servitude of man in any form, should 
 «e earned t ny great length, there is danger 
 
 revolution too, attended with a violence propor- 
 tionate to the pressure laid upon it. In this 
 oounto', there is no likelihood, nor scarcely a 
 possi ility of a despotic form of government, 
 but there IS danger of a moneyed despotism, of 
 aristocratic monopolies, and of the nowerfui ' 
 ••yranniziBg over the weak, because they are 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 203 
 
 poor or friendless. This same principle (»f ruling 
 ourselves reaches still farther, and desires to 
 govern others. Slowly, but surely, is this ser- 
 pentine aristocracy, subduing by piece-meal, 
 particularly the virtuous and talented poor of 
 our country ; and, should things progress for 
 sixty years to come, as they have done for the 
 past sixty, this province will be ruled by an aris- 
 tocracy of monopoly, if no*- of government, far 
 more tyrannical than any European despot. 
 
 Firmness. Decision, stability, fixedness of 
 character, &o. Average : has some desoision 
 and stability, yet not enough for general suc- 
 cess. Full : has perseverance enough for com- 
 mon or ordinary occasions, yet too little for 
 great enterprises ; is neither fickle nor stubborn. 
 Large, may be fully relied on ; is set in his own 
 way; hard to be convinced or changed at all ; 
 holds on long and hard. Very large : is wilful, 
 and so tenacious of opinion, purpose, &c, that 
 he seldom gives up anything. With large com- 
 bativeness and language full, will often take up 
 on the wrong side of a subject, merely for the 
 sake ofdobate, and with the above organs large, 
 and small intellectual faculties, will be very apt 
 to make a disagreeable companion. Pmall : lacks 
 perseverance ; is too changeable -^nd vacilla- 
 ting to effect much, or to be relied on. Location : 
 
204 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 Firmn.^s is loc.M in tiie hack part of fhe top 
 of rhH head. Whnn the hnarl i. erect, a perpHn- 
 dioniar JmH, drawn from the external opening 
 of the ear to the top of the head ; will pass 
 throu-h the anterior of the or^an. It is usually 
 the highest portion of the American and 
 En^rh'sh. 
 
 Species 2nd. MoR^L AM) Rkligious Skv- 
 TiMK.xTS. These render man a moral and 
 accountcthle heing; humanize, adorn and elevate 
 h>s nature ; and are the origin of goodness, 
 Virtue, n.oral principle and purity, and'connects 
 toim with the moral government of God Aver- 
 age or full : has moral feeling and principle, yet 
 too little to withstand large or verv large pro- 
 P^^ns.ties. Large or very large : is morally 
 inclined ; sentimental; thinks and feels much 
 on moral and religious subjects, &c. Moderate, 
 small, or very s.mill : has not strong moral and 
 re igh,us feelings ; lets his larger faculties 
 rule hun. 
 
 Comclentiousness. Innate feeling of duty 
 accountability, justice, right, &c ; moral princi' 
 pies : love of truth. Average : has right inten- 
 tions, but their influence is limited. Full • 
 strives to do right, yet sometimes yields to 
 temptation ; resists besetting sins, but may be 
 
 overcome, and t'lp" ♦'""I- - 
 
 ' — '"-" ^tci.-3 luuiuise. i^arge : is 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 205 
 
 honest., faithful ; upright at heart; moral in feel- 
 ing; gratefjl ; penitent ; means well ; consuita 
 duty before expediency ; loves and means to 
 Bpeakthe truth ; cannot tolerate wrong. Very 
 large is scrupulously exact in matters of right; 
 perfectly honest in motive, always condemning 
 self and repenting ; very forgiving ; conscien- 
 tious, &c ; makes duty everything, and expe- 
 diency nothing. Moderate : has considerable 
 regard for duty in feeling, but less in practi(!e ; 
 justifies himself; is not very penitent, grateful 
 or forgiving ; often temporizes with principles ; 
 sometimes lets interest, rule duty. Small : has 
 few conscientious scruples ; little penitence ; 
 gratitude ; regard for moral character ; justice ; 
 duty. Very small : neither regards nor feels 
 the claims of duty or justice. Location: con- 
 scientiousness is located upon the two sides of 
 the posterior portion of firmness. Its protru- 
 berance are at right angles with those of firm- 
 ness, and parallel to those of hope. Its devel- 
 opment can generally be determined witlioufc 
 difficulty, yet, as hope is located by its side, it 
 is sometimes difficult to determine with certainty 
 to which a given protruberance belongs. 
 
 Hope. Anticipation, expectation of future 
 happiness, success, &c. Average, has some, but 
 generally reasonable, hopes ; is seldom elated. 
 
206 
 
 MAN DfaPLAYKlJ, 
 
 Full : is quite sanguine, yet realizes about what 
 he expects, Large ; expects, attempts and 
 promises a great deal ; is generally sanguine, 
 cheerful, &c., and rises above present troubles ; 
 though disappointed, hopes on still j views the 
 bright side of every prospect. Very large : has 
 unbounded hopes ; builds a world of castles in 
 the air ; lives in the future; has too many irons 
 in the fire. Moderate : expects and attempts too 
 little: succeeds beyond bis hopes ; is prone to 
 despondency ; looks on the darker side. Small ; 
 is low; spirited ; easily discouraged ; fears the 
 worst ; sees many lions in the way ; magnifies 
 evils; lacks enterprize. Location: hope is 
 located upon the two sides of the anterior por- 
 tion of firmness, in front of conscientiousness, 
 and behind marvellousness, being elongated in 
 the direction of the ear. 
 
 Marvellousness. Belief in the supernatural ; 
 credulity, &c. Average : believes some, but 
 not much in wonders, fore warnings, &c. Full : 
 is open to conviction ; rather credulous ; believes 
 in spirits, and Divine Providences and forewarn- 
 ings, the spiritual, &c. Large : delights in the 
 supernatural, dreams, and the like ; thinks 
 many natural things, supernatural. Very large : 
 is very superstitious ; regards most things with 
 wonder. Moderate : believes but little that can- 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 207 
 
 not be accounted for, yet is open to conviction ; 
 is incredulous, but listens to evidence. Small : 
 is convinced only by the hardest ; believes 
 nothing? till he sees facts, or why and wherefore, 
 not even revelation, farther than a reason is 
 rendered ; is prone to reject new things without 
 examination. Very small : believes very little 
 else than his senses. Location : Marvellousness 
 is located on the two sides of veneration, between 
 imitation and hope. It runs lenj,'thwise in the 
 direction of the coronal sutures, and lies under 
 them. Very large imitation throws it as far 
 back as the middle of the head. 
 
 Veneration. The feeling of worship for a 
 Supreme Being. Average : may feel religious ; 
 have a desire for worship, yet little respect for 
 men ; Full : is capable of much religious fervor 
 and devotion, yet is not habitually serious ; 
 generally treats his fellow men civilly. Large : 
 loves to adore and worship God, especially 
 through his worVs ; treats equals with respect, 
 and superiors with deflferenoe. Very large : is 
 eminent if not pre-eminent for piety, heart-felt 
 devotion, religious fervor ; seriousness ; love of 
 divine things, &c. One having veneration 
 moderate, disregards religious creeds, forms of 
 worship, &c ; places religion in other things ; is 
 not serious or respectful. Small : feels little, 
 
 • 
 
208 
 
 MAN DISI'LAYED. 
 
 religious worship, reverence or respect. Very 
 small : seldom, if ever, adores God ; is almost 
 incapable of it. Location : Veneration is loca- 
 tfcd anterior to firmness, in the middle of the top 
 of the head, and nearly beneath the union of the 
 coronal sutures. 
 
 Benevolence. Desire to see, and make sen- 
 tient beings happy ; willingness to sacrifice for 
 this e.id ; kindness ; sympathy for distress. 
 Average : has kind fellow-feeling, without much 
 active benevolence. Full : has a fair share of 
 sympaUutic feeling; and some, though no great 
 willingness to sacrifice for others. Large: ia 
 kind, obliging, glad to serve others, even to his 
 injury ; feels lively sympathy for distress ; does 
 good to all. Very large : does all the good in 
 his power ; gladly sacrifices self upon the altar 
 of pure benevolence ; scatters happiness whare- 
 ever he goes ; is one of the kindef't hearted of 
 persons. Moderate : has some benevolent feel- 
 ing, yet too little to prompt to much self- 
 denial ; does good only when he can without 
 cost. Small: feels little sympathy or kindness ; 
 is almost deaf to the cry of distress ; hard- 
 hearted, selfish, &c. Very small : is destitute 
 of all humanity .".nd sympathy. Location : benev- 
 olence is located in the anterior superior portion 
 of the head, just forward of veneration, and of 
 
A.NAIASI.S A.\l» CLASSIFlCAiroN. 
 
 :5i09 
 
 the union of tho (coronal sutures, and beneath 
 the posterior superior portion of the frontal bone. 
 
 Semi-Intellectuai, Skntimknts. By cre- 
 ating a taste for tho arts, improvements, polite 
 literature, refinements of life, &(;., these faculties 
 greatly augment human happincFs, and adorn 
 and elevate human nature. 
 
 Constructiveness. Mechanical dexterity and 
 ingenuity ; desire and ability to use tools, build, 
 invent, employ machinery, &c. Average : has 
 !>iome, yet has no great relish for, and tact in 
 using tools. Full : has fair mechanical ingenu- 
 ity, yet no great natural talent or skill to make 
 things ; with practice, will do well ; without it, 
 but little. Large : shows great natural dexterity 
 in using tools, executing mechanical specifica- 
 tions, working machinery, &c ; loves them. 
 Very large : is a mechanic of the first order ; a 
 true genius ; loves it too well to leave it ; shows 
 extraordinary skill in it. Moderate : with much 
 practice, may use tools quite well, yet dislike 
 mechanical operations. Small: hates, and is 
 awkward and bungling in using tools. Very 
 small : has no mechanical skill or desire. Loca- 
 tion : constructiveness is located just above the 
 middle of a line connecting the top of the ear 
 and the external corner of the eye, or just below 
 ideality, and a little forward of it. 
 
 ^' m^ 
 
210 
 
 MAN DlflrPI.AVKl . 
 
 Ideality. Inia^'ination ; taste ; fancy ; love 
 of poetry, polito litcraturo, oratory, tho beauti- 
 ful in nature and art, tVc. Average : lias some 
 taste, thougli not enough to influence him much. 
 Full : has refinement of feeling, expression, &c., 
 without sickly delicacy ; some lovo of poetry, 
 yet not a vivid imagination. Large : has a 
 lively imagination ; great love of poetry, elo- 
 quence, fiction, good style ; the beauties of 
 nature and art. Very.. largo : ufteii give.s reins 
 to his erratic imagination ; experiences revel- 
 lings of fancy, eestacy, rapture of feeling, enthu- 
 siasm, &c. ^Foderate : has some, but not much 
 imagination ; is rather |>lain in his expression, 
 manner, feeling, &c., dislikes poetry, finery, &c. 
 Small : lacks taste, niceness, refinement, deli- 
 cacy of feeling, &;c. Verj small : is destitute 
 of the qualities ascribed to this faculty. Loca- 
 tion : Ideality is located upon the sides of the 
 bead, about the spot in which the hair begins 
 to grow— upward, and backward of constructive- 
 ness, beneath the temporal ridge, and near its 
 union with the paristal bone, and nearly in a 
 line with comparativeness, causality and mirt^ 
 fulness. When large or very large, the sides of 
 the head, where the hair makes its appearance, 
 are widened and heightened, but when it ig 
 small. thcV {tie n-^rrow nnrl firni'ficeft/l 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 211 
 
 Suhlimihj. Conception of grandeur ; sub- 
 lime emotions excited by contempiating the 
 vast, magnificent or splendid in nature or art. 
 Average : sometimes, but not to a great degree, 
 exper.enofs this feeling. Full: enjoys magni- 
 ficent scenes well, yet not remarkably so. Largo: 
 cmjoys mountain scenery, thunder, lightning, 
 tempest, a vast prospec. &c., exceedingly; 
 hence, enjoys travelling. Very large: is a 
 passionate lover of the /ild and romantic; 
 feels the sublimestemotioi.s whilst contempla- 
 ting the grand or awful in nature; dashing, 
 foaming, roaring cataracts ; towering mountains ; 
 peals of thunder ; flashes of lightning, commo' 
 tion of the elements. Moderate; has some, 
 though not much emotion of this kind. Small, 
 or very small : discovers ittlo in nature to 
 awaken this feeling. Location : sublimity is 
 located upon the side of th ' ead, between cau- 
 tiousness and ideality, partly under hope and 
 marvellousness, and above acquisitiveness. 
 
 Imitation. Disposition and ability to take 
 pattern ; imitate. Average : copies some, yet 
 too little to deserve notice. Full: with effort 
 copies some, but not well; cannot mimic' 
 Large : has a great propensity and ability to 
 -"^ i -...:=. ,,^iu uitiers; ao What he 
 
 sees done, &c, to the very life ; has a the 
 
212 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 taste and talent ; seldom speaks without 
 gesturing. Moderate : cannot ralmic at all ; 
 can copy, draw, and take pattern, only with 
 difficulty ; describes or relates anecdotes, &;c., 
 poorly. Small : dislikes and fails to copy, or 
 draw after one. Very small : has little ability 
 to imitate or copy. Location : Imitation is 
 located ui>on the two sides of benevolence, and 
 when large, it extends nearly as far back as tht* 
 organ of benevolence, and the coronal sutures, 
 and causes a protuberance, especially when 
 marvellousness is small, which runs downwards 
 from benevolence, and towards ideality and 
 con struct! veness. 
 
 Mirlhfulness. Intuitive perception of the 
 absurd and ridiculous ; a joking disposition : 
 desire and ability to rid'cule. Average : per- 
 ceives jokes and reli^^hes fun, but cannot make 
 much. Full : has much mirthful feeling ; makes 
 and relish jokes well. Large : has a quick. 
 keen perception of the ludicrous ; makes a great 
 amount of fun, too much for his own good ; is 
 <iuick at repartee ; smiles often ; laughs heartily 
 at jokes. Very large : is quick and apt at turn- 
 ing everything into ridicule ; throws off constant 
 sallies of wit ; is jocose, facetious, cVo. Moder- 
 ate : has some witty ideas, yet lacks quickness 
 in conceiving, and tact in expressing them ; is 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 213 
 
 generally quite sober. Small : makes little fun ; 
 is slow to perceive, and still slower to turn 
 jokes : s jldom laughs ; thinks it wrong to do so. 
 Location ; mirthfulness is located beneath the 
 temporal ridge, externally from causality, but a 
 little lower, and nearly in the range of combat- 
 iveness, causality and ideality. 
 
 Intellectual Faculties. These have to 
 do with the physical and metaphysical worlii ; 
 with things in general, and their qualities, rela- 
 tions, &c., with the world and its contents. 
 Average or Full : has sufficient intellect to get 
 along in the world, yet not enough to render him 
 eminent for talents. Large: is possessed of 
 Bufficient natural talent, and power of intellect 
 to enable him to take a high intellectual stand 
 fimong men, yet their direction depends upon 
 other causes. Very large : is by nature, truly 
 a great man ; possesses the highest order of 
 natural talents ; is capable of rising to pre-emi- 
 nence. Moderate or small : shows little natural 
 talent ; lacks sense. 
 
 The Senses : sensation, sight, hearing, taste, 
 smell, observing, and knowing faculties ; these 
 bring man into direct intercourse with the 
 physical world, observe facts of all kinds, that 
 IS, tiic conditions, qualities, phenomena, and 
 physical relations of material things ; collect 
 
S14 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 and treasure up information, create a desire to 
 see and know things, &c. Average, or full : 
 possesses fair percsptive powers. Large, with 
 advantages, knows a great deal about matters 
 and things in general : is very quick of observa- 
 tion and perception ; has a practical, matter-of- 
 fact, common sense tact and talent ; can show 
 off to excellent advantage, appears to know all 
 that he really does, and perhaps more ; is 
 capable of becoming an excellent scholar, or of 
 acquiring and retaining knowledge with great 
 facility, and of attending to the details of busi- 
 ness, and has a decidedly practical intellect. 
 Very large : is pre eminent for the qualities just 
 described ; seizes, as if by tuition, upon the 
 properties, conditions, fitness or unfitness, value, 
 &o , of things ; has wonderful powers of obser- 
 vation, and ability to acquire knowledge ; has 
 a natural taste and talent for examining and 
 collecting statistics, 3tudying natural sciences, 
 &c. Moderate or small: is rather slow of 
 observation and perception, cannot show to be 
 what he is; acquires knowledge with diflSculty, 
 is slow in learning and doing things ofF-hand, &c. 
 IndividtialUy. Observing and individualizing 
 power and desire, curiosity to see and know, dis- 
 position to specify, personify. Average : has 
 Bome yet no great curiosity and desire to see 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 215 
 
 things. Full : has fair observing power, and 
 desire to see things. Large : has a great desire 
 to know, investigate, examine, experience, &c. ; 
 is a great observer of men and things, quick of 
 perception, sees what is transpiring, what should 
 be done, «&c. Very large: has an insatiable 
 desire to see and know everything, extraordinary 
 observing powers, is eager to witness every pass- 
 ing event. Location : Individuality is located at 
 the root of the nose, and when large, it separates 
 the eyebrows from each other, and causes them, 
 as they approach the nose, to arch ; but when 
 small, the eyebrows nearly meet, and are nearly 
 horizontal. 
 
 Form. Cognizance and recollection of 
 shape, or configuration. Average: recollects 
 formp, faces, &-c., quite well, but not very well. 
 Full : recognizes persons, countenances, &c., 
 well. Largo : noticef^, and for a long time 
 remembers the faces, countenances, forms, 
 looks, &c., of persons, beasts, things, &c., once 
 seen ; knov,\s by sight many whom he may be 
 unable to name. Very large : never forgets the 
 countenance, form, &c., of persons and things 
 seen ; easily learns to road and spell corre;:tly ; 
 reads and sees things at a great distance ; has 
 excellent eyesight. Moderat^a : must see per- 
 sons several times before he can recollect them : 
 
MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 sometimes doubts whether he has seen certain 
 persons. Small, or very small : has a miserable 
 memory of persons, looks, &c. ; fails to recognize 
 even those he sees very often. Location : Form 
 is located upon the two sides of the crista galli, 
 and when large, or very large, causes great 
 breadth between the eyes, and sometimes turns 
 them outwards; but when small, they more 
 nearly approach each other. 
 
 Size. Cognizance and knowledge of relative 
 ttiagnitude, bulk, &o. Average : measures bulk 
 with tolerable, but not great accuracy. Full : 
 can measure ordinary and familiar distances 
 well, yet shows no remarkable natural talent 
 in it. Large : has an excellent eye for measur- 
 ing proportion, size, height, angles, perpen- 
 diculars, &c. ; quickly detects disproportions in 
 them. Very large : detects disproportion, and 
 judges of size with wonderful accuracy, by 
 intuition, and as well without as with instru- 
 ments ; cannot endure inaccuracy. Moderate: 
 is rather deficient in measuring by the eye ; with 
 practice may do tolerably well in short, but fails 
 in long, distances. Small: judges of relative 
 size, &c., very inaccurately. Very small : can 
 hardly distinguish mountains from mole-hills. 
 wi_u.Li >u . K)\^^ 13 iouatcu ut i,uu luiernai lermi- 
 nation of the eyebrows, and developes itself 
 
'fF!")P'? 
 
 ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 217 
 
 on the two sides of the root of the nose. 
 When it is large it causes the internal portion 
 of the eyebrows to project, or shelve over the 
 internal portion of the eye nearly an inch; 
 but when moderate or small, it is nearly per- 
 pendicular from the inner corner of the eye to 
 that of the eyebrows. By inserting the thumb 
 in the angle formed by the arch of the eye and 
 the nose, when the organ is large, or very large, 
 and weight only moderate, a protuberance will 
 be observed, in shape somewhat resembling a 
 bean. 
 
 Weight. Intuitive perception, and applica- 
 tion of the principles of specific gravity, pro- 
 jectile forces, momentum, balancing, resistance. 
 Average : balances himself tolerably well in 
 ordinary cases, yet has no great talent in this 
 respect. Full : keeps his "centre of gravity 
 well, but ventures little. Large : can walk on 
 a high or narrow place, hold a steady hand, 
 throw a stone or ball, and shoot strait, ride a 
 fractioHS horse, &c., very well. Very large : 
 has this power to a wonderful extent. Moderate : 
 maintains his centre of gravity, &c., very 
 poorly. KSmall, or very small : is unlike one 
 with weight large. Location : Weight is 
 located adjoining to size, and a little internally 
 from the middle of the arch of the eye. It is 
 
S18 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 generally moderate or small in the American 
 head. 
 
 Color. Perceptiou and recollection of color, 
 hues, tints, &c., notices them. Full : with 
 practice, compares and judges of colors well ; 
 without it does not excel. Large : has a natural 
 taste and talent for comparing, arranging, 
 mingling, applying, and recollecting color ; is 
 delighted with paintings. Very large : resem- 
 bles one with color large, but excels him- 
 Moderate, aided by practice, can discern and 
 compare colors, yet owes less \o nature than art ; 
 seldom notices colors, unless obliged to, and 
 then soon forgets them. Small : seldom 
 observes the color of one's hair, eyes, dress, 
 &c. ; cannot describe them by what they wear, 
 or compare colors apart ; hardly distinguishes 
 the primarv colors by candlelight, much less 
 shades. Very small : can tell black from white^ 
 but do little more. Location : color is located 
 under the arch of the eyebrows, a little exter- 
 nally from the middle, and between the organs 
 of weight and order. In ascertaining it there is 
 occasionally some difficulty, in consequence of 
 the thickness of the bone that covers it. 
 
 Order. System, physical arrangement, a 
 place for things. Average : appreciates f -rder, 
 yet not enough to keep it. Full : likes order. 
 
ANALYSIS AM) CLASSIFFCATION. 
 
 219 
 
 takes much pains to keep things arranged, 
 Large ; has a place for things, and things in 
 their places ; can find, even in the dark, what he 
 alone uses ; is systematic, annoyed by disorder. 
 Very large : is very precise and particular to 
 have every little thing in its place ; literally 
 tormented by disorder; is fastidious. Moderate : 
 likes, but does not keep order ; allows confusion. 
 Small, or very small : is nearly destitute of order 
 and system. Location : order is located under 
 the arch of the eyebrow, at the external corner 
 of the eye, and beneath the origin of the super- 
 cilliary ridge. When it is large, or very large, 
 the external angle of the lower portion of the 
 forc' ad appears projecting and full ; the eye- 
 brovr.^ at the union of the temporal ridge arched 
 and elongated, and sometimes sharp ; but when 
 it is moderate, or small, the external portion of 
 the eyebrow will appear straight and shortened. 
 The thickness of the bone in this portion* 
 increased by the temporal ridge, causes an 
 occasional mistake in deciding upon the size of 
 this organ. 
 
 Calculation. Intuition^ perception of the 
 relation of numbers, ability to reckon figures in 
 the head, numerical computation. Average ; 
 by practice and rules may reckon figures quite 
 well. Full : aided by rules and practice, may 
 
 m 
 
"t I '■* ,f.: 
 
 ,.-^t— - 
 
 220 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED, 
 
 excel in reckoning figures, and do well in his 
 head, but not without them. Large : can add 
 subtract, divide, &c., in his head, with facility 
 and correctness; become a rapid, correct 
 accountant ; delights and excels in arithmetic. 
 Very large : has an intuitive faculty, to a won- 
 derful extent, of reckoning even complicated 
 sums of figures in his head; delights in it. 
 Moderate : does sums in his head rather slowly 
 and inaccurately. Small : is dull and incorrect 
 m addmg, dividing, &c. ; dislikes it. Very 
 small : can hardly count, much less go farther 
 Location: Calculation is located externally 
 from order, and a little lower, and at the exter- 
 nal termination of the arch of the eye. 
 
 Locality. Cognizance and recollection of 
 relative position ; looks and geography of places, 
 &c ; desire to travel, see the world, &c. Aver- 
 age : has a fair, though not excellent recollec- 
 tion of places. Full : remembers places well, 
 yet IS liable to lose himself in a city or forest • 
 ordinarily shows no deficiency : seldom loses 
 himself. Large : recollects distinctly the looks 
 of places where he saw things, &c ; seldom 
 loses himself, even in the dark ; has a strong 
 desire to travel, see places, &c. Very Large • 
 never forgets the looks, location or geography 
 of any place, or hardly anything he\as ever 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATFON. 
 
 
 seen ; ia even passionately fond of travelling, 
 scenery, geography, &c, Moderate : recollects 
 places rather poorly ; sometimes gets lost. 
 Small, or very small : has little geographical 
 or local knowledge or recollection ; seldom ob- 
 serves where he goes, or finds his way back. 
 Location : locality is located directly over size 
 and weight, and nearly above the internal orbit 
 of the eye. It extends diagonally in the direc- 
 tion of mirthfulness. The frontal sinus some- 
 times increases the apparent size of this organ, 
 but this subject will be more fully presented in 
 another portion of the work. 
 
 Semj-Perckptive Faculties. These have 
 to do with action or phenomena, and their con- 
 ditions, and deal them out to the reasoning 
 faculties. 
 
 Eventuality. Recollection of actions ; histori- 
 cal and circumstantial facts, occurrences, &c. 
 Average : has neither a good nor a bad memory 
 of occurrences. Full : recollects leading events, 
 and interesting particulars, and has a good 
 memory of occurrences, yet forgets less import- 
 ant details. Large : has a clear and retentive 
 memory of historical facts, general news, what 
 he has seen, heard, read, &c., even in detail. 
 
 VerV lar^e : llfiVOr fonr^its nnv onpiirr««na ^ttqm 
 
 though it is trifling ; has a craving thirst for 
 
222 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 information and experiment ; liferally devours 
 boolts, newspapers, &o ; commands an astonis'i- 
 ing amount of information. Small, or very 
 small : has a treacherous confused memory of 
 facts and events, and r^earcely remoml)ers any 
 occurrence correctly. Location : eventuality is 
 located about the middle of the forehead. 
 When the surrounding organs are large, and 
 eventuality only full, there will be an apparent 
 depression just above individuality, and between 
 the two lobes of locality, which will result rather 
 from the size of the surrounding organs, than 
 from an absolute deficiency of eventuality. 
 
 Time. Cognizance and recollection of sue- 
 cession, the lapse of time ; dates ; how long ago 
 things occurred, &c. Average : notices and 
 remembers, dates, times &c ; but not well. 
 Full : recollects about, but not precisely when 
 things occurred. Large : tells times, dates, ap- 
 pointments, time of doy, &c., well. Very large : 
 will remember with wonderful accuracy, the 
 time of occurrences ; is always punctual ; tells 
 the time of day, &c., by intuition. Moderate : 
 has rather a poor idea of dates, when, time, &c. 
 Small : can seldom tell when things took place ; 
 is seldom punctual. Very small : is liable to 
 orget everything. 
 
 Tune. Tone ; sense of melody ; musical 
 
m. 
 
 ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 223 
 
 harmony ; abilUy to loam tunes and detect 
 chord and discord by ear ; propensity to sing. 
 Average : likes music ; with practice may per- 
 form tolerably well. Full: can learn tunes by 
 car, well, yet needs help from notes. Large : 
 easily catches tunes, and learns to sing and play 
 on instruments by note ; delights greatly in 
 singing; has a correct musical ear. Very 
 large : learns tunes by hearing them sung once 
 or twice ; is literally enchanted with good music ; 
 shows intuitive skill, and .spends much time in 
 making it. Moderate : aided by notes and prac- 
 tice may sing, yet it will be mechanically, and 
 it will lack that feeling which reaches the heart. 
 Small : can scarcely learn to sing either by note 
 or rote; is no musician. Location: tune is 
 located abo^' the organ of calculation, and 
 within the arch of the supercilliary ridge. 
 
 Language. Power of expressing ideas, feel- 
 ings, &:c., by means of words, attaching mean- 
 ing to signs ; verbal memory ; desire and 
 ability to talk. Average : can communicate 
 his ideas tolerably well, yet finds some difficulty ; 
 uses common words ; can write better than 
 speak. Full : commands a fair share of words, 
 yet uses familiar expressions ; is neither fluent 
 nor the reverse ; when excite*!, expresses hira- 
 self'free'y, yet not copiously. Large : is a free, 
 
224 
 
 MAN nrSlM.AYIill. 
 
 easy, ready, fluent talker and speaker; uses 
 good language ; commits easily ; seldom liesi- 
 tates for words. Very large : has by nature 
 an astonishing command of words, copiousness 
 and eloquence of expression, and verbal 
 memory ; quotes with case ; is an incessant 
 talker ; has too many words. Moderate: oftow 
 hesitates for words; employs too few; may 
 write well and bo a critical linguist, but cannot 
 be an easy, fluent .speaker. 8mall ; employs 
 few words, and those common-place ; in speak- 
 ing, hesitates much ; is barren in expression ; 
 commits slowly. Very small: can hardly 
 remember or use words at all, or read. Loca- 
 tion : Language is located upon the superorbiter 
 plates. When largo or very large : it pushes 
 the eye outward and downward, giving a Jull- 
 ness to it, and a swollen appearance to the 
 under eye-lid. When the organ is .small, the 
 eyes will appear small and sunken, and the un- 
 der eye-lid small. 
 
 RkPLECTIVK, OJ: Kea>>OMA«; Im'ELLHCi. 
 
 This looks beyond mere phy.sical facts and natu- 
 ral phenomena, and investigates their causes, 
 abstract relations, principles, &n ; originate* 
 ideas; ascertains and applies natjiral law.s - 
 invents ; contrives, ike. Largo, or very large : 
 wilh perceptive intellect less, gives gr.'at deptli 
 
ANALYSIS Ai\b t'LASSIFU'iil Jo.N. 
 
 225 
 
 without brilliancy of talont; mhows to bo less 
 than he njaliy U ; holds out well. 
 
 Caumliiy. Cogir' anco of the relations of 
 eauso and efroct ; abilify to apply them ; power 
 of reasoning ; diaooverinij firyt principle.^, &o. 
 Averajjo : has somo, but no great abilify to 
 plan and reason. Full : adapts mean;: t.) ends 
 well ; has an aciivo de.siro to ascertain causes, 
 yet not a deep, original, cause-discovering mind. 
 Largo: plans well ; can think clearly ; inquires 
 into tho why and wherefore of things ; always 
 gives and requires a reason ; has an excellent 
 judgment and a strong mind. Very large : is 
 endowed with a deep, stroi.g, original compre- 
 hensive mind, powerful reasoning faculties, and 
 A gigantic intellect. Moderate : is rather slow 
 of comprehcrsion ; has not good ideas orjudg- 
 mont ; is unable to adapt means to ends. Small : 
 ha:3 a weak mind ; cannot contrive oi- think. 
 Very small : has few ideas, and in fact, is a 
 natural fool. Location : causality is located in 
 the upper and lateral portion of the forehead, 
 extetnally from comparison and gives height 
 and breadth to the forehead, proportionate to 
 the size of the organ. 
 
 Coinparison. One having this organ average, 
 Illustrates tolerably well. Full : illustrates 
 
 tolerably well, but not remarkabiy. Large : 
 
22& 
 
 MAN DISPLAYKD. 
 
 has a happy talent for criticising^ between whal 
 is, and what is not analogous. Very lar^re : ig 
 endowed with an exiraordinary amount of eriti- 
 cal acumen. Small, or very small ; is desti- 
 tute of- tills power. Location : h is located in 
 the middlo and upper portion oflhe forehead, 
 between the two lobes of causality with eventu- 
 allty below, and benevolence above it. lu 
 Bhapu resembles an inverted cone. 
 
 lthasi)oen already remarked, that the claw 
 of functions i)erformed by the reflective facub 
 ties, is of a far higlier ord...'- than a^y other, and 
 also, that when fairly developed and furnished 
 With correct data, if allowed to operate in an 
 unperverted and unbiassed manner, they will 
 always form correct conclusions, and furnish us 
 With the truth. But the great misfortune is, 
 Uhat these faculties are seldom allowed to 
 assert their own prerogative, and sway that 
 inlluence over human actions for which they are 
 originally designeil. Hence it is, that we set 
 men more frequently guided by feeling, passion, 
 or prejudice, than by reason. This great and 
 deplorable evil generally arises, either from a 
 neglect to cultivate the reasoning iiiculties, or 
 from a perversion of them. At present, how- 
 «ver, we shall consider only the neglect and 
 
I*' 
 
 ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 227 
 
 As society is now constituted, even in what is 
 called christian communities, men are often 
 taught to fight, cheat, lie, scandalize, &c., but 
 how rarely are they taught to think ! In proof 
 of this, we have only to look abroad upon the 
 face of society. How often do we see our beau- 
 tiful system of religion debased and degraded, 
 and made subservient to the vilest and most 
 selfish purposes—her saciv^d vestments torn by 
 sectarian strife and par;/ discord — her holy 
 altars polluted by base Jiypocrisy and sordid 
 iniquity — her sublime doctrines perverted, and 
 her righteous iaws tramided under foot. How 
 often do we see the unprincipled pretender 
 gaining his selfish objects by practising upon 
 the ignorance of his fellow-men~the ambitious, 
 rising to high places of power and profit by 
 making use of the basest duplicity and the most 
 heartless intrigues ? Now it is evident, that if 
 men were taught to think, if their reasoning 
 faculties were properly cultivated, to perform 
 their legitimate functions with energy, these 
 things would not, nor could not take place, 
 because in the first case, they would restrain 
 the sinful passions, and the unhallowed ambi- 
 tion of the designing, by the aid of the moral 
 organs ; -.nd, secondly, so enlighten the muids 
 of the common people as to prevent their being 
 Ibns deceived and imposed upon. 
 
228 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 But the vices and follies of iriankind, grow 
 out of the perversions of the reasoning faculties, 
 perhaps more frequently than out of their 
 neglect ; and when this is the case, their ten- 
 dency is to make man even worse than the 
 brute, for they are then under the dominion of 
 the selfish pas?ions, and are rendered almost 
 wholly subservient to the gratification of their 
 wants ; they are then actively employed in 
 searching fer new objects upon which the indul- 
 gence of the passions may be expended, ..nd 
 new excuses for such indulgences ; they are 
 energetic in seeking out, and presenting artifi- 
 cial, improper and unnecessary stimuli to th© 
 selfish propensities of which the brute can never 
 form any conception, and of course, upon which 
 it can never exert or debase Its mental functions. 
 Again, mankind are not only taught to think, 
 but they are frequently raistaught to think ; 
 that is, they are frequently taught to think in a 
 particular way —to believe certain doctrines, and 
 to disbelieve others— taught to believe whether 
 reason approves or disapproves of that belief ; 
 and all this is brought abou^ by a kind of leger- 
 demain, or by causing the eye of reason to look 
 through dim spectacles of prejudice. This 
 point may be illustrated by a reference to th5 
 natural intellect of children. Before their rea- 
 soning faculties become perverted, they fre- 
 
ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION. 
 
 229 
 
 qnently reason more clearly and accurately upon 
 some subjects than their tutors or their parents, 
 for in the simplicity of their honest hearts, they 
 deduce from the premises presented to their 
 minds, the conclusions which naturally flow 
 from them. Hence, many would do well to 
 take the hint, lay aside their bigotry and their 
 prejudice ; bow their stubborn pride, and, in 
 reasoning, adopt the simplicity of the child. 
 From the preceding arguments and phrenologi- 
 cal facts, we arrive at the conclusion that the 
 brain, and not the heart, is the 
 
 " Dome of thought, the palace of the soul," 
 
ma 
 
 has 
 
 wh 
 
 tua 
 
 to 
 
 the 
 
 im] 
 wh 
 mil 
 trii 
 liai 
 pr( 
 pil 
 af 
 am 
 arj 
 am 
 nif 
 i^^ 
 an 
 f* 
 hi 
 
INTRODUCTION TO PART IV. 
 
 TnKRE is no person in any country where tho 
 march of science has made any progress, that 
 has arrived to the years of understanding, and 
 who possesses but a common share of the intelleo- 
 tual and reflective faculties, but what is anxious 
 to gain all the information they can, concerning 
 the immortalifcy of the soul, and thfs eternal 
 destination of man. 
 
 This is an inquiry far more interesting and 
 important to every individual, than any other 
 which comes within the range .of the human 
 mind. Next to the being of a God, the doc- 
 trine of the iinraortality of man lies at the foun- 
 liation of all religion, and of all the animating 
 prospects which can cheer us in this land of our 
 pilgrimage. Remove from the mind the beliyf of 
 ft future exiatonce, and the hope of immortality, 
 and religion bi-conies a shadow, life a dream, 
 and the approach of death, a scene of darkness 
 ftnd despair. Upon this .short question, — "Is 
 man immortal, or is he not 1" depends all that 
 U valrable in scienct^, in liioral.^, and in theology, 
 and all that is most interesting to man as a 
 f»»'al being, and a^ a rational and acconnlabla 
 l>t'>ilis;enGe. If he is destined to an eternal 
 
 
 ^1 . 
 rl 
 
 II 
 
232 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 existence, an immense importance must attach 
 itself to all his present affections, actions and 
 pursuits J and it must be a matter of infinity 
 moment, that they be directed 1m r h a channel 
 as will tend to carry him forwi.: ,. safety, to 
 the felicities of a future world, But, if his wholt 
 existence be circumscribed within the circle of a 
 few fleeting years, man appears an enigma, an 
 inexplicable phenomenon in the universe, hnman 
 life a mystery, the world a scene of confusion 
 Virtue a mere phantom, the Creator a capriciout' 
 being and his plans and arrangements an inex- 
 tricable maze. 
 
 ^ There is too much reason to believe, that tht 
 indifference to religion, which so much prevails, 
 especially among those who are raised a liui« 
 above the vulgar throng, and the unhallowed 
 propensities and vicious practices to which ifc 
 gives rise, are owing, in a considerable degree 
 to the want of a full conviction of the reality of 
 a future existence, or to some doubts whic'a 
 hover about the mind, in relation to this impor- 
 tant point. There is no person, however 
 insensible to the obligations cf religion, that can 
 fully ralisfy bis own mind or the minds of 
 others, that the idea of a future world is a mer* 
 chimera. On the contrary, the possibility --d 
 probability of the truth of man's Jternal d^stiny^ 
 
nasi 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO PART IV. 
 
 233 
 
 will, at certain times, force themselves upon the 
 minds of the most careless and profane. Yet, 
 it is amazing, to consider with what ease and 
 indifference, multitudes of this description can 
 glide down the stream of time, under the awful 
 uncertainty whether it will land them in the 
 shades of annihilation, the realms of bliss, or the 
 regions of endless wo. Between us and these 
 three states, no barrier is interposed but life, 
 the most brittle thing in nature ; and the happi- 
 nef^s of heaven being certainly not designed for 
 those who doubt whether they have an immortal 
 part to enjoy in it, such persons have nothir.'g 
 left, but the miserable chance of annihilation or 
 of hell. To treat a subject so interesting and 
 momentous with levity or indifference — to exert 
 all the energies of the soul in the pursuits of 
 objects, which a few years at most, will snatch 
 forever from their embr^^ce- — and never to spend 
 one serious hour in reflecting on what may 
 probably succeed the present scene of existence, 
 or in endeavoring to find some light to clear up 
 the doubts that may hang over this important 
 inquiry, is not only foolish and preposterous, but 
 the height of infatuation and madness. It is 
 contrary to every principle on which reasonable 
 meu act in relation to the affairs of the present 
 world. How strange it is that men, formed in the 
 
 m 
 
934 
 
 MAN UISPLAYKD. 
 
 imago of God, endowed with powers and facul- 
 ties capable of discriminating between rigbt and 
 wrong, who aro formed by their Creator, and 
 designed to be the Lord oyer all the bruta 
 creation, and for whose benefit and use, the 
 beasts of the fields andfofest, with the fowls of 
 the air, and the finny tribes that inhabit the 
 mighty waters were created, who possess such 
 strength and intellect as to be enabled, through 
 the almost magical powers of the t^ilescope, to 
 see and gain a knowledge of worlds, and even 
 systems of worlds far distant, from the planet wo 
 inhabit ; and, who by the aid of mathematical 
 science, can determine with precision, the dis- 
 tance in miles from our earth to any other planet 
 in the whole system ; the diameter, circum- 
 ference and solid contents of each ; the exact 
 time it will take them to revolve around the sun ; 
 the velocity of motion upon their axis, and a 
 thousand other things aro investigated and 
 brought to light, which are equally strange to a 
 person unacquainted with tho mysteries of 
 science; and yet, be so indifl-erent about their 
 final destination. iJufc lot us carry tha subject a 
 little farther. Vfe see (be philosopher and 
 astronomer employing all his time, talent and 
 snergie.-^, in iiive.^tigating the laws of naUire, 
 and determining the motion of heavealy bodies ; 
 
INTRODUCTION TO FART IV. 
 
 23^ 
 
 employing hours in study, that nature requires 
 to be devoted to rest ; and all we fear, often 
 merely for the gratification of their ambition, 
 and to be called by their fellow-men learned and 
 wise ; but, notwithstanding all their wisdom, 
 pay but little regard to the concerns of religion. 
 Others again, are equally asi»iduous in amassing 
 wealth, and for the sake of being styled wealthy, 
 will deprive themselves of the necessaries, ai 
 well as the luxuries of life, and centre all their 
 affections upon, and exercise and employ all th* 
 faculties of their minds in getting possession!, 
 that in a few years at most, they must leave, 
 perhaps, to those who will ridicule them for 
 their folly, and, in an unexpected moment, 
 without having made any preparation to secure 
 an eternal inheritar.ee and a crown of glory, art 
 called to stand before their God. 
 
 What will all this world's goods profit us, ia 
 the hour of death, if the immortal soul, just hov- 
 ering on the verge of eternity, is about to drop 
 into tho awful vortex of eternal wo 1 Yet, this 
 is not all. Those who are still regardless of 
 their future destiny, avA pay no attention to the 
 demand wliidi religion has iipjn them, ar« 
 chargeable with ingratitude, the blackest of all 
 crimes. What has not the Creator done to secure 
 the final happineyss and holiness of all mankind ? 
 
236 
 
 MAN DISPLAYEn. 
 
 When man had fallen from his holy estate, tht 
 grand scheme of his restoration and happioesi 
 was conceived in the Divine Mind, Christ tht 
 Son, and second person in the Trinity, left hi« 
 holy habifation, came to this earth to proclaim 
 the glad tidings, and wondering angels rejoiced 
 at his birth in contemplation of the consumaiion 
 of the plan of redemption, and that a fallen 
 race was to be reinstated into ihe favor of 
 God. What folly ! nay, what infatuation f 
 what ingratitude ! what inconsistency ia 
 chargeable upon those whc neglect the great 
 concern of their soul's salvation, and jet are 
 anxious to secure to themselves, the perishable 
 things of earth. 
 
 Having the light of nature, as well as of 
 revelation to guide us aright, what excuse can 
 we offer in the day of eternity, for the nilsim- 
 provement of the time allotted us here? But 
 the man whose heart pants after substantial 
 knowledge and felicity, will seize with delight 
 upon every argument, by which a full convic- 
 tion of his immortal destiny may be rivetted 
 upon his mind, and he will cheer his s.ul with 
 the con.sideration, that '« when this earthly house 
 of his tabernacle is dissolved, he has a bu Iding 
 
 the heavens." 
 
•If 
 
 PART IV. 
 THE llEALITY OF A FUTURE STATE. 
 
 Tho evidence uf a future state, wliich tho 
 light of nature or reason affords, tliougli not so 
 clear and decisive a.s those which are derived 
 from Divine Revelation, are worthy of the 
 serious consideration of every one, in whose 
 mind the least doubt remains on this important 
 8ul)ject. The conviction they are calculated to 
 produce, when attentively weighed, is sufficient 
 to leave every one witliout excuse who trifles 
 with tho concerns of his future destiny, and 
 overlooks his relation to the eternal world. 
 Though the Deity is invisible to mortal eyes, 
 yet his existence and perfections are clearly 
 visible by his v.'orks, and he has not left himself 
 witliout a witness to his beneficence, in every 
 age, in sending rain from heaven, fruitful seasons, 
 and filling our hearts with food and gladness. 
 In like manner, though the realities of a future 
 world are not presented directly to the eye of 
 sense, yet the faculties with which man is 
 endowed, when properly exercised on all the 
 physical and moral scenes which the universe 
 disnlavs. are sufficient to ovinp^ iho hurh Aafrr^c^ 
 of probability, if not absolute certainty, that his 
 
238 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 sphere of action is not confined to the narrow? 
 limits of the present world, but have a relation 
 to a future and immortal existence. In illus- 
 trating this topic, I Bhall confine myself chieflj 
 to those popular corisiderati(ms, which are level 
 to every capacity, and perhaps, more convincing 
 than the subtle and refined disquisitions of 
 metaphysical minds. 
 
 On the utiiversal hclirfof the immortal it ij of 
 the itoul. That the thinking principle in man is 
 of an immortal nature, was believed in by the 
 ancient Egyptians, Persians, Phoenicians, Scy- 
 thians, Celts, Druids and Assyrians.—by th« 
 wisest and most celebrated characters among 
 the Greeks and Romans, and by almost every 
 other ancient nation and tribe whose records 
 have reached our times. The notions, indeed, 
 which many of them entertained of the scenes of 
 futurity were very imperfect, but they all e" - 
 braced the idea, that death is not the destruc- 
 tion of the soul or thinking principle in man, but 
 enly its introduction to a new and unknown 
 state of existence. The ancient Scythian 
 believed that death was only a change of habita- 
 tion, and the Magian sect which prevailed in 
 Babylonia, Media, Assyria and Persia, admitted 
 the doctrine of Eternal rewards and punishment. 
 The doctrine taught by the second Zoroaster 
 
I 
 
 TMR UKALITY OF A FUTURE STA'I E. J39 
 
 who lived in the time of Darius, was, " ihat 
 tht^re is one Riiprenu! Bein^*-, independent and 
 self-existent from nil eternity ; that nnder him, 
 there are two angels, one the angel of light who 
 is the author of all good ; and the olher tne 
 angel of diiiknesr?, who is the author of all evil; 
 that they are in a i)er[)etniil struggle with each 
 other ; that where the angel of light jwevails there 
 good reigns, and where the angel of darkness pre- 
 vails, there evil takes place; that this struggle 
 ehall continue to the end of the world ; that then 
 there shall he a general resurrection and day of 
 judgment, wherein all shall receive a just retribu- 
 tion according to their works. After which, the 
 angal of darkness and his disciples shall go into 
 a world of their own, where they diall suffer the 
 punishment of their wicked deeds in everlasting 
 darkness ; and the angel of light and his disci- 
 ples shall also go into a world of light of their 
 own, where they shall receive the rewards due 
 to their good deeds; that after this they shall 
 be separated forever, and light and darkness 
 shall b't no more mixed forever. (Rollin'H 
 Ancient History, Vol. 2.) The remains of this 
 sect, which are scattered over India, and 
 Persia still hold this doctrine, without any 
 variations, to the present day. It is well 
 known that Socrates and Plato as well as other 
 
340 
 
 MAN Df^PLAYKD. 
 
 Greek philosophers, held the doctrine of tha 
 soul's immortality. In Plato's admirable dia- 
 logue entitled tJic Phaedon, he represents Soc- 
 rates, a little before his death, encompassed with 
 a circle of philosophers, and discoursing with 
 them concerning the immortal destiny of man. 
 After illustrating the truth of the doctrines of the 
 soul's immortality, and of future rewards and 
 punishment, ho concludes by saying, *«If th« 
 soul be immortal it requires to be cultivated 
 with attention, not only for what we call the 
 time of life, but for eternity; and the least neg- 
 lect in this point may be attended with endlesa 
 consequences. If death were the final dissolu- 
 tion of being, the wicked would bo great, gainera 
 by it, by being at ojice delivered from their 
 bodies, their soul;?, and their vices : but as the 
 soul is immorta-, it hns no other means of being 
 freed from its evils, nor any safety for it, but in 
 becoming very good and very wise, for it carries 
 nothing with it but its good and bad deeds, its 
 virtues and vices, which are <*ommonly tho 
 cflFects of education which it has received, and 
 the cause of its eternal happiness or misery." 
 Tho description and allusions contained in tho 
 writings of the ancient poets are a convincing 
 proof that [the belief of the soul's immortality 
 was a universal opinion in the times in which 
 
THE REALITY OK A PUTURB STATE. 241 
 
 they wrote, and among the nations to whom their 
 writings were addressed; Homer's account of 
 the descent of Ulysses into hell, and his descrip- 
 tion of Minos in the shades below, distributing 
 justice to the dead assembled around his tribu- 
 nal, and pronouncing judgment that would 
 decide their everlasting fate ; the poems of Ovid 
 and Virgil contain a variety of descriptioni 
 which demonstrate that liiey entertained the 
 belief that virtue was rnwarded and vice 
 punished in another state nf existence. Their 
 notions of future punishmer.t are set forth in the 
 description of Tantalus, who, for the loathsome 
 banquet he made for the gods, was set in water 
 up to his chin, with apples hanging to his very 
 lips, yet had not power to stoop to the one to 
 quench his thirst, or to reach to the other to 
 satisfy his craving appetite. Of the fifty daugh- 
 ters of Danous, who, for the murder of their 
 husbands in one night, were condemned in hell 
 to fill a barrel full of holes, with water, which 
 ran out again as fast as it was put in. Their 
 notions of future happiness are embodied in the 
 description they have given of the Hesperian 
 gardens, and the Elysian fields, where the 
 souls of the virtuous rest secure from every 
 danger, and enjoy perpetual and uninterrupted 
 bliss. And as the matrons of antiquity recog- 
 
942 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 nfzed the doctrine of a future state of existence, 
 80 there is scarcely a nation or tribe of man- 
 kind existing at the present time, however 
 barbarous or untutored, which does not express 
 in one way or another, the same opinion. The 
 natives of the Society Isles believe, that after 
 death there is not only a state of conscious 
 existence, but degrees of felicity, according as 
 men have been more or less pleasing to the Deity. 
 The chiefs of the Friendly Isles, believe that 
 after death the soul is immediately conveyed in 
 a fast sailing canoe, to a country called Dool- 
 udha,which they describe as a beautiful Paradise; 
 that those who are conveyed thither are no more 
 subject to death, but feast on all the favorite 
 productions of their native !*oil, with which this 
 blissful abode is plentifully furnished. The 
 New Zealanders believe, that the third day after 
 the interment of a man, the heart separates itself 
 from the corpse, and that an inferior divinity 
 which has constantly hovered over the grave, 
 oarrias it to the clouds. They believe that the 
 soul of a man, whose flesh has been eaten by 
 the enemy, is doomed to a perpetual fire, while 
 the soul of a man who has been rescued from 
 those that killed him, is happy. The inhabi- 
 tants of the Pelew Islands the Kalmiic Tartari='.. 
 the Samoiedians of Northern Tartary, and the 
 
T.J!S REALITY OF A FUTURB STATE. 843 
 
 Burmans all acknowledge the immortality of the 
 soul, and their belief in the doctrine of future 
 rewards and punishments. 
 
 The various tribes which inhabit the continent 
 of Africa, in so far as we are acquainted with 
 their religious opinions, appear to recognize the 
 doctrines of a future state. We are informed 
 by the accounts which travellers have given of 
 the religious opinions entertained by the people 
 of Western Africa, that they believe their souls 
 are of such a nature as to require variety, and 
 are not capable of always being delighted with 
 the same objects. The Gupreme Being, there- 
 fore, in compliance with this taste for happiness 
 which he has implaated in the soul of man, will 
 raisa up from time to time, every gratification 
 which it is in the human nature to be pleased 
 with. If wo wish, say they, to be in groves or 
 bowers, among running sit earns or water falls, 
 we shall immediately find ourselves in the midst 
 of such a scene as we desire. If we would be 
 entertained with music or the harmony of 
 souiids, the concert arises upon our wish, and 
 immediately the whole region about us is filled 
 with the most meloillous music. In short, every 
 desire will be followed by fruition, and whatever 
 a man's inciiaatiou directs him to, wlil be pres- 
 ent with him. The negroes and other inhabi- 
 tants of tliQ interior of Africa, according to tha 
 
S44 
 
 MAN DISPLAYKr). 
 
 at-ccunt of MungoPark, believe in one Supreme 
 Ruler, and expect hereafter to enter into a stato 
 of misery or felicity. The Gollas of Abyssinia, 
 though they reject the doctrine of future punish- 
 ment, adnait the reality of a future state. Th'> 
 Mandingoes, laloffa, Feloops, Foubahs, Moors 
 and all other tribes who have embraced the 
 Mahommetan faith, recognize the doctrine of the 
 immortality of the soul, and future rewards in a 
 •elestial Paradise. The natives of Dahomy 
 entertain the same belief, hence it is <i common 
 practice with the Sovereign of that country, to 
 send an account to his forefathers of any remark- 
 able event, by delivering a message to any one 
 who may happen to be near him at the time, and 
 then ordering his head to be chopped off imme- 
 diately, that he may serve as a courier to 
 oonvey the intelligence to the world of spirits. 
 (McLeod's voyage to Africa. Page 64.) 
 
 The Japanese believe that the souls of men 
 and beasts are alike immortal ; that after death, 
 a ju8t retribution takes place of both rewards 
 and punishments ; that there are diffejent 
 degrees of happiness as well as misery, and that 
 after death the souls of the wicked transmigrate 
 into the bodies of animals, and at last, in case of 
 aniendinent; are translat'ed back aei'ain into t^»» 
 human body. (Thumberge's Travels.) 
 
 From a conviction of the reality of a future 
 
THE REALITY OF A FUTURE STATE. 
 
 246 
 
 world, the Wahabee Arabs regard it as impious 
 to mourn for the dead, who they say, are enjoy- 
 ing felicity with Mahommet in Paradise, and the 
 Japanese make several feasts on the decease of 
 their relations and friends, who they say, have 
 entered into a world of- bliss. The North 
 American Indians believe that beyond the most 
 distant raountahw of their country, there is a 
 wide river,; beyond that a great country ; on the 
 other side of that country, a world of waters ; in 
 that water, a thousand islands, fall of trees and 
 (Streams of water, and that a thousand buffaloes 
 and ten thousand deer graze on the hills, or rumi- 
 nate in the valleys. When they die, they are 
 persuaded that the Great Spirit will conduct 
 them to this land of souls. Thus, it appears, 
 that not only the ancient philosophers and th« 
 most civilized' nations at present existing on the 
 globe, have recognized tho immortality of the 
 soul, but thai even tho most barbarous and 
 untiitorod trlboi? fortify their minda in tho pros- 
 ■ pect of dt'Hth, with the hopo of happineas com- 
 meni^urateto their desires, in the regions beyond 
 the grave. ' Tho Ideas the American Indians 
 entertain of the joys" of the immortal state, and 
 the locality of Heaven, are Set forth ia these 
 feeautifui liaos of Pope : 
 

 546 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 "Lol the poor Indian, whoso untutored mind 
 Sees God in clouds, or lisara hira in the wind ; 
 Whose soul, proud scionc9 novortf.u(]jht to stray 
 Far as the solar walk, or milky %, ay- 
 Yet simple nature, to his hope has givan 
 Behind the clcud-topt hill, an hambler heaven; 
 Some anfer world, in depth of v.ood c--ibir.ced, 
 Some happier inland in 'J:e wcto.y v. i.-jto, 
 Whoro bU.v€8 onco cioro their E-tivo lanci tahold, 
 No fiends Lcruaout, no christica thi;3i for gold, 
 And tMnko, adzaictod to th?.t equal zky, 
 His faithful dog ciiall boai bim eorapcny. 
 
 Among the numcrouc a&d diVorsifisd ii-ibes 
 that are scattered over the different le^i^^na of 
 the earth, that agree in scarcely any othjr sen- 
 timent or article of religious belief, we hciofind 
 the most perfect harmony in the recognition of 
 Supreme Intelligence, and that the soul survives 
 the dissolution of this mortal frame. And, as 
 Cicero long since obaervod, "la everything 
 the consent of all nations is to bs accounted the 
 law of nature, and to resist it, is to resist the 
 ToiceofGod." For we can scarcely suppose, 
 in consistency with the Divine pirfsctioiw, that 
 an error of such vast imporLanco to mankind, 
 •hould obtain the universal belief of all ?ges and 
 •11 nations, and that God himself would suffer 
 a world of rational beings throughout every 
 feneration to be carried away by a delusion, 
 and to be tantalized by a hope which has no 
 
THE REALITY OF A FUTURE STATE. 247 
 
 foundation in nature, and which is contrary to 
 the plan of his moral government. It is true 
 Indeed, ihar scs^eral of the opinions to which I 
 ha%^^ adverted, and many others which prevail 
 among the uncivilized tribes of mankind, in 
 regard to the condition of the disembodied spirits, 
 and the nature of future happiness, are very 
 erroneous and imperfect ; but they all recognize 
 this grand and important truth, that death is 
 not the destruction of the rational soul, and that 
 man is destined to an immortal existence. 
 Their erroneous conceptions concerning future 
 rewards and punishments, may be easily 
 accounted for, from a consideration of the imper- 
 fect conceptions they have formed of the Divine 
 Being, and of the principles of his moral govern- 
 ment ; from their ignorance of those leading 
 principles and moral laws, by which the 
 Almighty regulates the intelligent universe ; 
 from the false ideas they have been led to enter- 
 tain respecting the nature of substantial happi- 
 ness ; from the cruel and absurd practices con- 
 nected with the system of Pagan superstition ; 
 from the intellectual darkness which has brooded 
 over the human race since the fall of man ; and 
 from the universal prevalence of those depraved 
 
 the untutored tribes on whom the light of Revel- 
 ation has never shone. 
 
248 
 
 MAN DISPLAYEH. 
 
 From the above considerations it ia evident 
 that the human mind is so constituted, that, 
 when left to its native unbiassed energies, it 
 necessarily infers the existence of a Supreme 
 Intelligence from the existence of matter, and 
 the economy of the material ^vorld ; and from 
 the nature of the human faculties and the moral 
 attributes of God, it Is almost as infalliblv led 
 to conclude that a future existence is necepsary, 
 in order to gratify the boundless desires of the 
 human soul, and to vindicate the wisdom and 
 rectitude of the moral Governor of the world. 
 As the consent of all nations has been generally 
 considered a powerful argument in favor of the 
 existence of the Deity, so the universal belief of 
 mankind in the doctrine of a future state ought 
 to be viewed as a strong presumption, that it h 
 founded upon truth. It is certainly strange, 
 after such demonstrative proofs of various kinds 
 have been given of the existence of a Deity both 
 by nature and revelation, as well as natural 
 instinct, that any intelligent being would argu« 
 with, or suppose that his intellectual faculties 
 were not intended by the Creator to enjoy an 
 immortal existence. Though strange and un- 
 natural as it may appear ; it must, indeed, bo 
 aumitteci that such individuals have appeared iii 
 all ages of the world. Hierocles assigns the 
 reason of it : "A wicked man," says he, «' is 
 
THE BEATITY OF A FUTUliE STATE. 
 
 249 
 
 afraid of his judge, and therefore wishes hia soul 
 and body may perish tojrether, rather than it 
 should stand before the tribunal of God." As 
 this seems to be a plausible reason why those 
 persons argue for the mortality of the soul, it is 
 a princii>le that must come to noi-ght, as the 
 inarch of science and revelation progress onward. 
 As has been before stated, that the existence of 
 an all-creating power is a principlf^, that with 
 the belief of the iromortality of the soul, is 
 instinctively implanted in the breast of man, 
 the question has often arisen, as to where tho 
 locality of this paradise is situated, hence,- its 
 ' cality will be a subject for a brief investigation. 
 Locality of Heaven. It is admitted by every 
 believer in revelation that at the close of tht 
 present arrangement respecting our world, " all 
 that are in their graves shall be raised to life ;" 
 and that however different the constitution of 
 these new-modelled bodies may be from their 
 state of organization, they wiil still be material 
 vehicles, furnished with organs of sensation as 
 the medium of perception to the immaterial 
 spirit. In what manner the disembodied spiiic 
 views material objects and relations, and applies 
 the knowledge of tiieni which it acquired whiU 
 united to an organical strucluie, we can navtr 
 BO conception whatever, until we are actually 
 
250 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 ushered into the separate state ; therefore, the 
 observations already made, and Ihose which 
 remain to be made, are not intended to apply to 
 the intermediate state of the spirits of good 
 men— that state, whatever may be the mode of 
 perception and enjoyment in it, is a state of 
 imperfection, ainl, in some respecls, an unnatural 
 state, if we suppose that the spirit is uncon- 
 nected with any material vehicle. INTow, if it 
 be admitted that the spirits of the just, at the 
 general resurrection, are to be reunited to 
 material organical structures, it must also be 
 admitted that those structures must have some 
 material world, or habitation, in which they 
 may reside. This last position is also as evident 
 from the declaration of the scripture, as the first ; 
 for while we are informed that the elementary 
 parts of our globe shall be dissolved, we are at 
 the same time informed that a '* new h'.civen 
 and a new earth" shall be prepared, ** wherein 
 dwelleth righteousness," for an abode for the 
 spirits of the just. In reference to the locality, 
 and the circumstances of our future destination, 
 there appear to be five suppositions that can be 
 formed : 1st, either the world we now inhabit 
 will be new modelled, after the conflagration, 
 and furnished as a proper olace nf rt^si^anna fny 
 Its renovated inhabitants j or, 2nd, some of the 
 
THE REALITY OF A FUTURE STATE. 251 
 
 globes now existing in other regions of space, to 
 which the holy inhabitants of our world will be 
 transported, may be allotted as the more perma- 
 nent habitation of the just ; 3rd, or seme new 
 world may be immediately created, adapted to 
 the circumfc.!:anees of the redeemed, and adorned 
 with caenery fitted to call into exercise their 
 renovated powers ; or, 4th, the redeemed inhab- 
 itants of heaven may be permitted to transport 
 themselves from one region, or world, to another, 
 and be furnished with faculties or vehicles for 
 this purpose ; or, 5th, after remaining for a cer- 
 tain lapse of ages in that particular world to 
 which they shall be introduced immediately 
 after the resurrection, they may be transported 
 to another region of the universe, to contemplate 
 a new scene of creating power and intelligence, 
 and afterwards pass, at distant intervals, through 
 a successive series of transportations, in order 
 to obtain more ample prospects of the riches 
 and glory of God's universal kingdom. In all 
 these cases, whatever supposition we may adopt 
 as most probable, the general laws which now 
 govern the universe, and the general relations 
 Qf the great bodies in the universe to each other, 
 will remain unchanged ; unless we adopt the 
 laufcuasre and belief that is sometimes nro- 
 claimed from the pulpit, that the whole frame of 
 
252 
 
 MAi\ DWPLAYIil) 
 
 Jehovah's (Mripin* will ho overturned for thn 
 ■ake of our world, whioh, when compared with 
 the wliole system of nature, is hut au indis- 
 tinfruishalth; atom amidst tho immensity of 
 God's works. Witli equal rea;?on we might 
 suppo.se that the ooi 'luot of the inhahltant.-i of 
 a plant' • whleh revolve,^ -iround iIm, slar Sirius, 
 or the tatastroi)he which may havu befallen the 
 planets Ceres. Pal his, Juno, and VeMtn, must 
 necessarily invoivo the destruciion of the earth. 
 Throne of God. Jn eonn'.'otlon with tho pre- 
 ceding' subject there is another which has been 
 fre(iuenily mentioned, both by the sacred writers 
 and ministers of the gospel, concerning.' th« 
 throne of God. The scriptures frequently refer 
 to a particulnr place, circumstance, or manifes- 
 tation, termed the throne of God, as in the fol 
 lowing passages: "Heaven is my throne, and 
 the earth is my foot^to- I r' " the Lord hath pre- 
 pared his thrune in the heavens;" " a gloriou* 
 high throne, from the beginning, is the place of 
 thy sanctuary ;" -'therefor? are they now beforo 
 the throne of God, and servd him day and niffht. 
 in his temple;" " ble.^sing, and honor, and 
 glory, :!nd power, be unto him that sits upontha 
 throne ;" these, and similar expresjsions and 
 representations, must be considered eithar a;* 
 merely metaphorical, or as referring to som*i 
 
THE RKALITV OP A KU'! C!PK STATK. 
 
 SiS 
 
 pariicular rejrion of il:e universe, where the 
 divine glory is manifefited more particularly 
 as the fountain from which all his glory ema- 
 nates, and where the manifeatations of the Di- 
 vine character are mo.-^t illustriously displayed. 
 If there he a reference to the 'splendor end mag- 
 nificence of a particular portion of the universe, 
 there is an astronomical idea, which niuy help 
 U8 to form some conception of this " glorioui 
 high throne," which is the peculiar residence 
 of the Kternal. It is now admitted by astri>- 
 nomers as highly probable, if not certain, from 
 observations, from the nature of gravitation, and 
 other circumstances, that all the systems of the 
 adverse revolve around one common centre, 
 and that this centre may bear as great a pro- 
 portion, in point of magnitude, to the universal 
 assemblage of systems, as the sun does to his 
 surrounding planets ; and since our sun is five 
 hundred times larger than this errth, and all 
 their other planets and satelitts taken together; 
 on the same scale, such a central body would 
 be five hundred timet larger than all the 
 systems and worlds in the universe. If this 
 is in reality the case, it may, with the most 
 emphatic propriety, be termed the throne of God, 
 for, upon this estimate it would form a vast 
 universe itself— an example of material creation, 
 
954 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED, 
 
 exceeding all the rest in magnitude and splen- 
 dor, and in which are blended all the glories of 
 every other system. This is the most sublime 
 and magnificent idea that can possibly enter 
 into the mind of man, although it may overpower 
 our feeble conceptions, -ive ought not revolt at 
 the idea of so glorious an extension of the works 
 of God ; since nothing less magnificent seems 
 suitable to a being of infinite perfection, this 
 grand central body may be considered a& the 
 capital of the universe. Froni this glorious 
 centre, embassies may be occasionally des- 
 patched to all surrounding worlds, in every 
 region of space. Here, too, deputations from 
 all the dilFerent provinces of creation, may 
 occasionally assemble, and the inhabitants of 
 different worlds mingle together. Here, may 
 bo exhibited to the view of unnumbered millions, 
 objects of sublimity and glorj, vvMch are no 
 where else to be found within Ihu^ wide extent 
 of creation. Here, intelligencies of the lii-hesf 
 order, who have attained the inost sublhiie 
 height of knowledge and virtue, may form the 
 princiial part of the population of this mar.nifi. 
 cent region. Here, the glorified body of the 
 Redeemer may have taken its principal station 
 as -the head of all prlncipalitie;. and powers," 
 and here likewise, Enoch and Elijah may reside 
 
THE REALITY OF A FUTURE STATE. 255 
 
 in the meantime, in order to learn the history of 
 the magnificent plans and operations of the 
 Deity, that they may be enabled to communi- 
 cate intelligence respecting them, to their 
 brethren of the race of Adam, when they 
 shall again mingle with them in the world 
 allotted for their abode, after the general resur- 
 rection. Here, the grandeur of tl 3 Deity, the 
 glory of his physical and moral perfections, and 
 the immensity of his empire may strike the 
 mind with more bright effulgence, and exert 
 more elevated emotions of admiration and rap- 
 ture, than in any other province of universal 
 nature ; in fine, this vast and splendid central 
 universe may constitute that august mansion 
 mentioned in the Scripture, under the designation 
 of the Tliird heavens, the Throne of the Eternal, 
 &c. Perhaps, some may consider the grand 
 idea which has now been suggested, as too im- 
 probable and extravagant to claim our serious 
 attention. In reply to such an insinuation, let it 
 be remembered, that nothing has been stated 
 but what corresponds to the whole analogy of 
 nature, and to several sublime intimations con- 
 tained in the system of Divine Revelation. It 
 is a fact, which, in the preseni; day, cannot be 
 Ai^^\nA V>T7 arxxT nno nr'ouniritf>rl with the subiect. 
 
 that the material universe, as far as our glasses 
 
MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 256 
 
 can extend our vision, consists of a countless 
 multitude of vast bodies, which completely 
 baffle our powers in attempting to form any 
 adequate conception of them. This amazing 
 fact, placed within the evidence of our senses, 
 shows us, that it is impossible for the human 
 mind to form too extravagant ideas of the uni- 
 Terse, or to conceive its structure to be more 
 glorious and magnificent than it really is. 
 
 Grandeur of the Deity. In connection with 
 the above arguments, if we admit that the Divine 
 Being is infinite, pervading ihe immensity of 
 space with his presence, why should we be reluct- 
 ant to admit the idea, that his Almighty energy 
 is exerted throughout the boundless regions of 
 space ? for it is just such conclusions, as the 
 belief in the power of infinite intelligence should 
 naturally lead us to deduce. Whether does it 
 appear to correspond more with our ideas of an 
 infinite Being, to believe that his creative power 
 has been confined to this small globe, and a few 
 sparkling studs fixed in the canopy of the sky ; or 
 to admit on the ground of observation and analogy 
 that he has launched into existence millions of 
 worlds ; that all the millions of systems within 
 the reach of our vision, are but as a particle of 
 ▼anor to the ocean, when comnared with the 
 myriads which exist in the immense unexplored 
 
THE REALITY OF A FUTURE STATE. 857 
 
 regions of space ; that the whole of this vast 
 
 assemblage of suns and worlds, revolves around 
 
 Uie grand centre of the universe ; and that this 
 
 centre, where the throne of God is placed, if 
 
 superior to all the other provinces of creation in 
 
 magnitude, beauty, and magnificence ? Who 
 
 would dare to prove that such conceptions are 
 
 erroneous or impossible, or unworthy of that 
 
 Being who sits on the throne of the universe? 
 
 To attempt such a proof, would be nothing less 
 
 than to set bounds to Oiiinipotence ; to prescribe 
 
 limits to the operations of him •• whose ways are 
 
 past finding out." 
 
 " Can man conceive beyond what God can do ? 
 Nothing, but quite imposeible, is hard ; 
 He summona into being, with like ease, 
 A whole creation and a single grain. 
 Speaks he the word ? a thousand worlds are born ; 
 A thousand worlds — there's room for millione mwe, 
 And in what space can his great fiat fail 1 
 Condemn me not, cold critic, but indulge 
 The warm imaginationn ; why condemn— 
 Why not indulge such thoughts as swell our hearts 
 With fuller admiration of that power [swell 7 
 
 Which gives our hearts with such high thotight« to 
 Why not indulge in his augmented praise ? 
 Darts not his glory a still brighter ray ? 
 The less is left of chaos, and the realms 
 Of hideous night." 
 
 ^VtAoo viAma and reasonings are fullv corroho- 
 
 rated by the sublime descriptions of Deity 
 
 R 
 
268 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 contained in the Holy Scriptures. " Canst thou 
 by searching find out God ? Canst thou find out 
 the Almighty to perfection ?" *« He is the high 
 and Lofty One who inhabiteth eternity." " He is 
 glorious in power." " He dwells in light unap- 
 proachable, and full of glory." ^* Great is our Lord, 
 and of great power, his greatness is unsearch- 
 able ; his understanding is infinite." " Can any 
 thing be too hard for Jehovah ?" *' The ever- 
 lasting God, the Lord, the Creator of the ends 
 of the earth, fainteth not, neither is weary, there 
 is no searching of his understanding ; He 
 doeth great things, past finding out, and won- 
 ders without number." '• He meteth out the 
 Heavens with a span, and comprehendeth the 
 dust of the earth in a measure." " He spake 
 and it was done ; He commanded and it stood 
 fast." •' He stretched forth the heavens alone, 
 and bringeth forth their hosts by number." "Lo, 
 these are parts of his ways, but how little a 
 portion is heard of him ; and the thunder of his 
 power who can understand ? Behold, the heaven 
 and the heaven of heavens cannot contain him !" 
 *' The heavens declare the glory of God, and 
 the firmament showeth forth his handiwork." 
 " Thine, Lord ! is the greatness, and the glory, 
 and the majesty of all in heaven and earth is 
 there, and thou art exalted above all." " Behold, 
 
TUB RBALITY OF A FUTURK STATK. 259 
 
 !W 
 
 W" 
 
 'f i 
 
 the heaven, and the heaven of heavens is the 
 Lords." •* Jehovah liath prepared his throne 
 in the heavens, and his kingdom rnleth over all." 
 ^* Thou, even thou, art Lord alone ; Thou hast 
 made heaven, the heaven of heavens, with all 
 their host, thou preserveth them all, and the 
 host of heaven worshippeth thee." " AVho can 
 utter the mighty acts of the Lord V " Who can 
 show forth all his praise 1" " Touching the Al- 
 mighty, we cannot find him out." " He is ex- 
 cellent in power, and his glory is above the earth 
 or heavens." 
 
 Such sublime descriptions of the Divine 
 Being, which are interspersed throughout various 
 parts of Revelation, lead us to form the most 
 august conceptions of creative energy, and 
 plainly indicate that it is impossible for the 
 highest created intellect to form a more magni- 
 ficent idea of his designs and operations than 
 what in reality exists. In short, although some 
 of the preceding arguments may not precisely 
 correspond to the facts which shall ultimately 
 be found to exist in the universe — they ought, 
 nevertheless, to be entertained, since they open 
 to the mind, a sublime and interesting subject 
 for contemplation, and go not beyond the magni- 
 ficence of Jehovah's kingdom, nor be very differ- 
 ent from what actually exists in the universe. 
 
 4i 
 
260 
 
 MAN DISPLAY KP. 
 
 It may be laid down as a principle in Theology, 
 that our conceptions of the grandeur ot God, are 
 commensurate with our conceptions of the 
 grandeur and magnificence and extent of his 
 operations throughout the universe. We all 
 admit that the Deity is infinite, both in respect 
 to space and duration. But, an infinity of empty 
 space and infinity of duration, abstractly con- 
 sidered, convey to the mind no tangible ideas to 
 guide it in forming distinct conceptions of the 
 Deity, or any other beings?. 
 
 From the preceding arguments, we perceive 
 a close analogy between the ground we have 
 taken, and the truths of Revelation concerning 
 the grandeur of the Deity, and the magnificence 
 of his operations, and his unlimited power. 
 
 Employment of the Redeemed in the future 
 world. Another question which has often been 
 the subject oi much reflection in the minds of 
 the christian Is, what will be the employment of 
 the immortal mind of the just, in the spirit 
 world ? On this subject there has been many 
 wild conjectures among christians, as well as 
 heathens, in all ages of the world ; this ie owing 
 to the style in which the sacred writers portray 
 the joys of the righteous, who are represented 
 as standing before the Throne of Godj and 
 
 _.i i._ u;~ 
 
 glYiit^ gior^ l^U Uio ilAiUU UIJU LU iiiij i.*allil» iCir^ 
 
TIIK RBALITY OF A PDTURE 9TATK. 
 
 ?61 
 
 ever, — and casting their crowns at b's feet, and 
 saying •* worthy is the Lamb tiiat was slain to 
 receive honor, glory, power, and dc minion for 
 ever and ever." But, when we reflect upon the 
 constitution and powers of the moral faculties of 
 the mind, such a conjecture as this seems alto- 
 gether inoompatibltj witL their present inclina- 
 tions. We all admit tVat it is perfectly right 
 to study the sciences of Arithmethic, Geography, 
 Astronomy, Philosu^jhy, History, &o., in order 
 to become acquainted with the operations of 
 nature and the magnitude of the heavenly 
 bodies and other surrounding objects. Now, if 
 the study and knowledge of these sciences ia 
 this world, are necessary to promote our happi- 
 ness ; they must evidently proceed from the 
 Almighty, as he is the great fountain of all 
 good, and if so, then these oiences will be cul- 
 tivated also in another world, for we cannot 
 reasonably suppose that we shall be denied the 
 privilege of investigating any subject which 
 will tend to augment our happiness in the spirit 
 world, or that will enable us to become more 
 perfectly acquainted, and to comprehend more 
 clearly the wonders of creative power ; for it is 
 evidently certain, that when we leave this world 
 we shall leave none of the powers of the mind 
 or it« faculties behind, except those which per- 
 
262 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 tain to our animal nature, and consequently 
 when we are rid of those animal propensities, 
 the moral sentiments and perceptive faculties 
 which are now often blunted by these propensi- 
 ties, will then be much more active than they 
 are at present, then undoubtedly those sciences 
 which are in their nature interesting and bene- 
 ficial, will be pursued with untiring zeal and 
 vigor ; though, in what manner this knowledge 
 will be imparted to us, and what course of 
 instruction will be adopted, is certainly a matter 
 of conjecture. But that the knowledge of figures 
 is retained in the spirit world, and even cultiva- 
 ted too, may be inferred from several passages 
 of Holy Writ. When Daniel beheld the vision 
 of the " Ancient of Days," sitting on his throne, 
 a numerous retinue of glorious beings appeared 
 in his train, to augment the grandeur of the 
 scene. " Thousand thousands ministered unto 
 him, and ten thousand times ten thousand, stood 
 before him." We are told in the sixty-eighth 
 Psalm, " that the chariots of God are twenty 
 thousand, even many thousanii^j of angels," and 
 in the epistle to the Hebrews, we read of " an 
 innumerable company of angels." The apostle 
 John, when narrating his vision of the celestial 
 world, tells us, that he " beheld and heard the 
 voices of many angels round about the throne, 
 
< i., 
 
 I f r 
 
 THK RKALITY OF A KUTURK STATE. 263 
 
 and the number of them was ten thousand times 
 ten thousand and thousands of thousands ;" and 
 again, '• After tliis I beheld, and lo, a great mul- 
 titude which no man could number, of all nations 
 and kindreds and tongues, and people— and all 
 the angels stood round about the throne, and 
 fell upon their faces and worshipped God." 
 These expressions are the strongest which the 
 inspired writers make use of, in order to express 
 a countless multitude of objects, and they lead 
 us to conclude that, in the heavenly world, vast 
 assemblages of intelligent beings, will be 
 occasionally presented to the view ; and conse- 
 quently a countless variety of scenes, objects and 
 circumstances connected with their persons, 
 stations and employments. And, therefore, if 
 celestial beings were not familiarized with 
 numerical calculations and proportions, such 
 scenes, instead of being contemplated with intel- 
 ligence, and rational admiration would confound 
 the intellect ; and produce an effect similar to 
 that which is felt by a savage when he, for the 
 first time, beholds some of the splendid scenes of 
 civilized life. 
 
 From the foregoing passages of scripture, it 
 is evident that the science of Arithmetic is 
 understood by the inhabitants of the celestial 
 world ; if then, this science is cultivated there, 
 
 }P 
 
 
 ' h 
 
%6i 
 
 MAN DISPLAYBP. 
 
 it is more than .-(iaMonfibioto suppose that several 
 of the other rmturai soitncea are also cultivated. 
 The Creator himself has laid the foundation of 
 some of these sciences. His works consist of 
 globes and spheroids of different- dimensions and 
 of immense concentric rings, revolving with a 
 rapid motion. These globes are carried round 
 different centres, some of them in circles, some 
 of them in ellipses, and some of them in long 
 eccentric curves. Being impelled in their 
 courses by different degrees of velocity, their 
 real motion cannot be traced, nor the beautiful 
 simplicity and harmony of the different systems, 
 made apparent without the application of mathe 
 matical investigations. We all admit there are 
 different degrees of intelligence or glory, among 
 the celestial inhabitants which will explain the 
 reason from the consideration, that the more 
 intelligence we possess in this world, the more 
 able we shall be to comprehend the glory and 
 magnificence of the heavenly world and the 
 extent and wonders of creative power ; the 
 gigantic minds of Locke or Newton, will be able 
 to understand the grandeur of creation better 
 than the Hottentot who was converted to Chris- 
 tianity only a few years before his removal from 
 time to eternity. If these sciences tend to make 
 lis wiser in beaveD, will not the study of theiu 
 
THB REATITY OF A FUTUKK «TA IB. 
 
 265 
 
 h 1" 
 
 be pursued there? Astronomy is another 
 •oience which will occupy the at ntlan of pur^j 
 intelligences in a future world, rho object of 
 this science i , to determine the ui^tauces a'id 
 magnitudes of the heavenly bodies, the *'orm of 
 the orbits tl ;^y doscribp, the laws by wlich eir 
 motions are directed, and the nature and destina- 
 tion of the vailou^ luminous and opaque bodies of 
 which the universe appears to oo compr sed. It 
 is the most r.oble and sublime of alUhoaciences. 
 and presents o our view, the most astonishing 
 and magnificent »bjeci ^, whether we con Uler 
 their hnraense magnitude, the aplend^ of their 
 appearance, +he vast spaces which urround 
 tliem, the magnificent apparatus with which 
 «omo of them are enoo passed, the rapidity of 
 their motions, or the display they afford of the 
 omnipoten*^ emrgy and intelligence of the Cre- 
 ator. In conseqaence of the cultivation of thii 
 science, our views of the uxtent of creat'on, and 
 of the sublime scenery it unfolds, are e pa ded 
 far beyond what former ages would ^ -e con- 
 ceived. From the discoveries uf Astronomy, it 
 appears ii by the aid of our finest glasses, 
 the number of pi letary globes in the visible 
 system of the universe may be stated at the 
 least computation, at 2,400,000,00v of worlds 
 
 !. 
 
 '< 
 %' 
 
 111 V -r-i 
 
 Bk 
 
 
 Informs iiSj that when 
 
266 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 I 
 
 viewing a certain portion of the " Milky Way," 
 in the course of 5 even minutes, more than fifty- 
 thousand stars passed across the field of his 
 telescope,— and it has been calculated, that 
 within the range of such an instrument, applied 
 to all the different portions of the firmament, 
 more than 80,000,000 of stars would be rendered 
 visible. It is supposed that the diameter of the 
 solar system is 3,600,000,000 of miles, and yet 
 it is very probable that there are thousands of 
 systems beyond the reach of the finest telescope. 
 Hence, it appears, that our earth is but as a 
 point in the immensity of the universe ; that 
 there are worlds a thousand times larger, 
 enlightened by the same sun which " rules our 
 day ;" that the sun is himself, an immense 
 luminous globe, whose circumference would 
 enclose more than 1,200,000 globes as large as 
 ours ; that the earth is carried forward wi'uh its 
 inhabitants through the regions of space, at the 
 rate of a thousand miles every minute j that 
 moti«. is exist in the great bodies, in the universe, 
 the force and rapidity of which astonish and 
 overpower the imagination. These objects 
 present an immense field for the contemplation 
 of every class of moral intelligences, and a bright 
 mirror in which they behold the reflection of the 
 Divino attnhnt«<a nr+h'" ttooi- .,^:^^^»,. 1 
 
 . ^.^. ,^, viiiw TCVOU UlIXVCiiQC, UOW 
 
1 fc 
 
 THK BEAUTY OF A Ft TURK STATE. SJ67 
 
 small a portion has yet Wm unveiled to our 
 view ! With respect to m. »»-»dies which com- 
 pose our planetary sysl *. w^, .now only a few 
 general facts and relat ons. in regard to the 
 fixed stars, we have acqr-r ' little more than a 
 few rude conceptions of their immense distance 
 and magnitudes. In relation to the comets, we 
 only know that they move in long, eccentric 
 orbits, that they are impelled in their course 
 with immense velocity, and appear and disap- 
 pear in uncertain periods of time. Of the 
 numerous systems into which the stars are 
 arranged ; of the motion peculiar to each sys- 
 tem ; of the relations which these motions have 
 to the whole universe as one great machine ; of 
 the nature and arrangement of the numerous 
 nebul* which are scattered throughout the dis- 
 tant regions of space ; of the worlds which are 
 connected with the starry orbs; of the various 
 orders of beings which people them ; of the 
 changes and revolutions which are taking place 
 in different parts of the universe ; of the new 
 creations which are starting into existence ; of 
 the number of opaque globes which may exist 
 in every region of space ; of the distance to 
 which the material world extends, and of the 
 various dispensations! of the Almighty towards 
 iha /iivAvsifipfl nrdera of intelligences which 
 
 t-. 
 
268 
 
 MAN DfS PLAYED 
 
 people his vast empire—we remain in almost 
 profound ? mce, and must continue so, as 
 long as w ,ain in this obscure corr>er of 
 
 creation. ^ ...,'e will, therefore be ample scope 
 in the future world, for farther researches into 
 the subject, and, for enlarging our knowledge of 
 those glorious seenes which are at present so 
 far removed beyond the limits of natural vision, 
 and the sphere of human investigation. The 
 heaven constitutes the principal part of the divine 
 empire— compared with which, our earth is but 
 an atom, and " all nations are as nothing, and 
 are accounted to Jehovah as less than nothing 
 and vanity. Vast as this world may appear to 
 the frail beings who inhabit it, it probably ranks 
 among the smallest jjlobes in the universe but, 
 was it twenty times more spacious than it is, it 
 would be only as a grain of sand when compared 
 with the immensity of Creation, and all th« 
 events that hdvc passed over the inhabitants as 
 only a few of those few ephemeral transactions 
 which crowd the annals of eternity. It is 
 throughout the boundless regions of the firma- 
 ment that God is chiefly seen, and hisglory con- 
 templated by unnumbered intelligences. It is 
 there that the moral grandeur of his dispensa- 
 tions, and the magnificence of his works, are 
 displayed in all their variety and lustre, to 
 
TUB RKALITV OF A EUTURE STATK. 269 
 
 I t 
 
 countless millions of his rational intelligences, 
 over which he will coiitinue to eternally preside. 
 Hence, the frequent allusions to " the heavens," 
 by the inspired writers, when the Majesty of 
 God and the glory of his dominions are intended 
 to be illustrated. " All the gods of the nations 
 are idols, but Jehovah made the heavens." 
 " The Lord hath prepared his throne in the 
 heavens ; and his kingdom ruleth over all." " By 
 his spirit he hath garnished the heavens." 
 " The heavens declare the glory of Jehovah." 
 *• When I consider the heavens the work of thy 
 fingers, the moon and the stars which thou hast 
 ordained — what is man, that thou art mindful 
 of him ? or the eon of man that thou visitest 
 him 1" In order to form just conceptions of the 
 beauty and grandeur of the heavens, and the 
 intelligence of Him, who arranged their numer- 
 ous hosts, some of the fundamental facts and 
 principles of astronomy require to be understood. 
 The order of the bodies which compose the solar 
 systems, or rather systems which exist in the uni- 
 verse, the form of their orbits, their proportional 
 distances and periods of revolution ; their magni- 
 tudes, rotations, velocities, and their various phe- 
 nomena which are observed on their surfaces ; 
 the arrangement and positions of the different 
 elusters of stars; of the stellar and planetary 
 
 &•■ 
 
970 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED, 
 
 nebulao ; of double, triple, and variable stars, 
 and many other general facts, require to be 
 known before the mind can receive farther infor- 
 mation respecting the structure of the universe, 
 It may be also necessary, even in a higher state 
 of existence, to be acquainted with those artifi- 
 cial helps by which very distant objects may be 
 brought near t > view. It Is highly probable, 
 that, in the future world, a considerable portion 
 of our knowledge respecting the distant prov- 
 inces of the Divine Empire, will be communi- 
 cated by superior beings who have visited the 
 different systems dispersed through the universe 
 and have acquired information respecting their 
 history, and their physical and mora! ?!cenery. 
 We learn from Scripture that there are intelli- 
 genoiea who oan wing their way, in a short 
 period of time, from one world to another. Such 
 t)eings, in the course of a thousand centuries, 
 must have made many extensive tours through 
 the regions of creation and acquired a compre- 
 hensive knowledge of the most remarkable 
 scenes which the universe displays. And, since 
 they have occasionally mingled in the society 
 of men, and c:)mmunicated intelligence from 
 heaven to earth, it is reasonable to suppose, 
 that they will have more frequent intercourse 
 with redeemed men in a future state, and com- 
 
THE REALITY OF A FUTURK STATE. 271 
 
 municate the discoveries they have made, 
 respecting the economy of God's universal 
 empire. To enter into the spirit of those sub- 
 lime details which angels and archangels might 
 communicate, respecting other systems and 
 worlds, the mind must lie already prepared by 
 a knowledge of those principles which have 
 already been ascertained, and of those discover- 
 ies which have already been made in relation 
 to the system of the universe. Were they pre- 
 viously ignorant of the science of astronomy and 
 the facts that are brought to light, by the aid 
 of astronomical knowledge, they might stare 
 and wonder at some of the facts detailed ; but 
 their ideas would b© vague and confused, and 
 they would be unable to form clear and compre- 
 benaive conceptions of the various circumstances 
 connected with the scenes described, in all their 
 bearings, aspects and relations, and of the indi- 
 cationi tb^y afford of exquisite skill and intelli- 
 gent design. As the objects which astronomy 
 explores, are unlimited in their range, they will 
 afford an inexhaustible subject of study and 
 contemplation to superior beings, and to man- 
 kind when placed in a higher sphere of existence, 
 unless we suppose that finite minds will be 
 able, at some future period, to survey and com- 
 prehend all the plans and operationf of the 
 
 h m 
 
 
 I:, .fi^ 
 
272 
 
 MA.N DISPLAVF.I). 
 
 infinite Creator. But this is evidently innpossible, 
 for, ** who by searching can find out God 1 Who 
 can find out the Almighty to perfection V 
 After millions of centuries have run their rounds, 
 new scenes of j randeur will still be bursting on 
 the astonished mind, new regions of creation, 
 and new displays of divine power will yet 
 remain to be explored ; and consequently, the 
 science of astronomy will never arrive at abso- 
 lute perfection, but will be in a progressive 
 course of improvement through all the revolu- 
 tions of eternity. In the prosecutions of such 
 an interesting study, and in the contemplation 
 of such objects as this science presents, the 
 grand aim of celestial intelligences will be to 
 Increase the knowledge and love of God ; and, 
 In proportion as their views of the glories of his 
 empire are enlarged, in a similar proportion will 
 their conceptions of his boundless attributes be 
 expanded, and their praises and adorations 
 ascend in sublimer strains to Him, who sits 
 upon the throne of the universe, who alone is 
 " worthy to receive glory, honor, and power," 
 from every order of his creatures. Since, then, 
 it appears that Astronomy is conversant about 
 objects the most wonderful and sublime — since 
 these objects tend to amplify our conceptions of 
 the divine attributes — since a clear and distinet 
 
THE REALITY OF A FUTURE STATE. 273 
 
 knowledge of these objects cannot be attained 
 without a clear and distinct knowledge of the 
 fundamental principles of astronomical science; 
 since the heavens constitute the principal part 
 of God's universal empire ; since our present 
 views of the magnificence of this empire are so 
 obscure and circumscribed ; since even the 
 information that may be communicated by other 
 intelligences, could not I o fully understood 
 without some acquaintance with the principles 
 of this science; and since t e boundless scenes 
 it unfolds, present an inexhaustible subject of 
 aonteraplation, and afford motives to stimulate 
 all holy beings to incessant adoration ; it would 
 be absurd to suppose that renovated men, in a 
 higher state of existence, will remain in ignor- 
 moe of this subject, or that the study of it will 
 6ver be discontinued while eternity endures. 
 Natural Philosophy is another subject which 
 will doubtless engage the attention of regener- 
 ated men in a future state. The object of this 
 science ie to describe the phenomena of the 
 material world, to explain their causes, to inves- 
 tigate the laws by which the Almighty directs 
 the operations of nature, and to trace the 
 4ixquisite skill iaA V»eaevolent design which are 
 displayed in the bconomy of the universe. It 
 «mbracefl investigations into the several powerf* 
 
 lit 
 
 ^m 
 
274 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 jind properties, qualities and attributes, motiona 
 and appearances, causes and effects of all the 
 bodies with which we are surrounded, and which 
 are obvious to our senses, such as light, heat, 
 colors, air, water, sounds, echoes ; the electrical 
 arid magnetical fluids ; hail, rain, snow, dew, 
 thunder, lightning, the rainbow, parhelia, winds, 
 luminous and fiery meteors, the Aurora Boreal is, 
 and similar objects in tho system of nature. 
 From the discoveries of experimental philoso- 
 phers, T7e have been made acquainted with a 
 variety of striking facts and agencies in the 
 system of the universe, which display the 
 amazing energies of the Creator, and which 
 tend to excite our admiration of the depths of 
 his wisdom and intelligence. Wo learn that the 
 light emitted from the .sun, moves with a velocity 
 equal to 200,000 miles in a second of time ; that 
 the atmosphere which surrounds us, presses our 
 bodies with a weight equal to 30,000 pounds ; 
 that it contains the principles of fire and flame j 
 that, in one combination, it would raise our 
 animal spirits to the highest pitch of ecstacy, 
 and in another, cause our immediate destruc- 
 tion ; that it i,<» capable of being compressed into 
 40,000 times less space than it naturally occu- 
 pies ; and that the production of sounds, the 
 lives of animals, and the growth of vegetables 
 
THB REALITY OF A FUTURK 8TATK. JJ75 
 
 depend upon its unceasing agency. We learn 
 that a certain fluid pervades all nature which 
 is capable of giving the animal frame a shock, 
 which may be communicated in an instant to a 
 thousand individuals ; that this fluid moves 
 with inconceivable velocity ; that it increases 
 the evaporation of fluids, and occasionally dis- 
 plays its energies among the clouds in the form 
 of fire-balls, lambent flames and forked light- 
 nings. We learn that the bodies of birds, fishes, 
 quadrupeds and insects, in relation to their 
 eyes, feet, wings, fins and other members, are 
 formed with admirable skill, so as to be exactly 
 adapted to their various necessities and modes 
 of existence, and that they consist of an infinite 
 number of adaptations in order to accomplish 
 the object intended. In short, the whole of 
 nature presents a scene of wonder, which, when 
 seriously contemplated, is calculated to expand 
 the intellectual powers, to reline the affections, 
 and to excite the admiration of the attributes of 
 God, and the plan of his Providence. Natural 
 Philosophy may therefore be considered as a 
 branch both of the religion of nature, and the 
 religion of Revelation. It removes, in part, the 
 veil which is spread over the mysterious opera- 
 tions of nature, and discloses to our view the 
 wonders which are concealed from the sottish 
 
 I'bi. it 1 
 
 f 
 
 a- J 
 
276 
 
 MAN DISPLAYBD. 
 
 lEuItitutle, '•who regard not the works of the 
 Lord, nor consider the operations of his hands." 
 It discovers those laws hy which the Sovereign 
 of the universe governs his vast dominions, and 
 maintains them in undecaying beauty and splen- 
 dor throughout all ages. It thus enables us to 
 consecrate the uciiverse into one grand temple, 
 and from the contemplation of every object it 
 presents, to elevate our minds, and to raise our 
 voices in grateful praises to Him " who created 
 all things, and for whose pleasure they are, and 
 were created." In the future world there will 
 be abundant scope for the prosecution of this 
 subject to an indefinite extent. We are assured 
 that after the resurection, a material world will 
 be prepared for the habitation of the just, in 
 which their connection with the visible universe 
 will, doubtless, be far more extensive than it is 
 at present, and wherever a material system 
 exists, it affords a scope and application for 
 Natural Philosophy. This new world will be 
 prepared and arranged by Divine wisdom, and, 
 consequently, will exhibit scenes of beauty and 
 grandeur, of exquisite contrivance and benevo- 
 lent design. For, if the world we now inhabit, 
 amidst all the deformities and physical derange- 
 ments which sin has intioduced, displays so 
 many beautiful arrangements and marks, of 
 
THK BKALITY OF A FUTUBR STA'l K 
 
 a77 
 
 intelligence and skill, much more may we con- 
 clude, that the world in which "righteousness 
 shall dwell," will abound in everything that 
 can charm the eye, the ear or the imagination, 
 and illustrate the manifold wisdom of God ; and, 
 of course, will present a boundless field for the 
 most sublime investigations of science. This 
 world, in many of its arrangements, will doubt- 
 less present a variety of objects and scenes 
 altogether different from those we now behola, 
 even should the same physical laws which gov- 
 ern our terrestrial system still continue to exist 
 and remain in operation. The inflection, refrac- 
 tion and reflection of light, will be directed by 
 the same general laws, and will produce effects 
 analogous to those we now perceive in the scene 
 around us ; but the medium through which it 
 passes, and the various objects by which it is 
 refracted and reflected, and many other modifi- 
 cations to which it may be subjected, m.ay pro 
 ducG a variety of astonishing effects, surpassing 
 everything we now behold, and exhibit scenes of 
 beauty of which we can at present form ro dis- 
 tinct conception. The science of optics, in 
 unfolding to us the nature of light, has enabled 
 ns to exhibit a variety of beautilal and surprising 
 effects, and to perceive traces of infinite intelli- 
 gence in relation to this element, beyond what 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
278 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 former ages could have believed. And, there- 
 fore, we have reason to conclude, that, in the 
 hand of Omnipotence, when arranging other 
 worlds, the element of light is capable of being 
 modified in a thousand forms of which we are 
 now ignorant, so as to produce the most glorious 
 and transporting effects. There will probably 
 be no such phenomena as thurider, lightning, 
 and fiery meteors in the world to v/liich I allude, 
 but the electrical fluid, which is the principle 
 agent in producing these appearances, and 
 which pervades every part of nature, may oper- 
 ate in that world in a different manner, instead 
 of producing effects that are appalling, may be 
 an agent for creating scenes which will inspire 
 the soul with admiration and delight. What 
 has now been said of Natural Philosophy, will 
 equally apply to the science of Chemistry. 
 This science has for its object to ascertain the 
 first principles of all bodits, their various pro- 
 perties and combinations, their mode of 
 operation and the efl\ cts they produce in the 
 economy of nature. Its dit^eoveries have not 
 only unfolded many of the admirable processes 
 which are going forward in the animal, vegetable 
 and mineral kingdoms, but have opened to our 
 view many striking displays of the wisdom and 
 goodness of God, in producing by the most sim- 
 
THB BKALITY OF A FUTURK STATE. 279 
 
 e ifieans, thf tios^ astor'^hing and benevolent 
 Wecth. The prin '' this science must, 
 
 thert^fore, be applicatiie wherever matter exists, 
 under wha rer shape or modification it presents 
 itself , an. as all the worlds throughout the 
 universe are composed of matter compounded 
 into various forms, they must afford an ample 
 range for the invesH-ations and researches of 
 chemical science. suppose that the inhabi- 
 
 tants of heaven make no use of nny of the 
 natural sciences, or have no kno\ edge of them, 
 would be to suppose their intellects inferior to 
 ours, and that their knowledge was less exten- 
 sive, and that they make no progress in intellec- 
 tual attainments, and have no desire to explore 
 "the works of the Lord, and to consider the 
 operation of his hands," which would be a sup- 
 positioT> none would be willing to admit. 
 
 Anatomy and Physiology are subjects 
 which we may naturally conclude, will 
 occasionally occupy the attention of the inhabi- 
 tants of heaven. The object of these sciences 
 is, to investigate the general structure and 
 economy of the animal frame, and especially the 
 parts and functions of the human body. If we 
 
 are led to admire the skill and wisdom displayed 
 by the Creator, in the formation of the humaa 
 
 system, as we are made acquainted with all its 
 
 i . 
 
 11: ■' M 
 

 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 V. 
 
 
 
 :/ 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 !.l 
 
 '^ iM 1112.2 
 
 1^ 
 
 1.25 i 1.4 
 
 IIM 
 
 1.6 
 
 V] 
 
 <^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 e": 
 
 el 
 
 vl 
 
 
 
 /. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^# 
 
 r ^ 
 
 •; 
 
 om 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 c^-^ 
 
 <<^ 
 
 \ 
 
 :\ 
 
 % 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 % 
 
 
 6^ 
 
 33 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 '716) 872-4503 
 
 M 
 
4L5 ///// ^® 
 
 §s-, 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ?^ 
 
280 
 
 MAN UlSPLAYKn. 
 
 parts by the sciences of Anatomy and Physi- 
 ology, how much more will we be led to wonder 
 at and admire the grandeur and magnificence of 
 our spiritual bodies after the resurrection, when 
 they will be "fashioned after Christ's most 
 glorious body." The faculties of the spiritual 
 body will then be inyigorated. its tendency to 
 dissolution destroyed, every principle of disease 
 annihilated, and everything that is loathsome 
 and deformed for ever prevented ; its beauty 
 will be exquisite, its symmetry perfect, its aspect 
 bright and refulgent, and its motions vigorous 
 and nimble ; its sensitive organs will be refined 
 and improved, and the sphere of iheir operations 
 extended ; its auditory organs will be tuned to 
 receive the most delightful sensations from the 
 harmonies of celestial music, and its viseral 
 powers rendered capable of perceiving the minu- 
 test objects, and penetrating into the most dis- 
 tant regions. New senses and faculties of 
 perception, and new powers of motion, fitted to 
 transport it with rapidity from one portion of 
 space to another, will, in all probability, be 
 superadded to the powers with which it is now 
 invested. And, surely, the contrivances and 
 adaptations which must eater into the struoturfr 
 of such an organical f-ame, cannot be less 
 onrious and exquisite, nor display less wisdom 
 
^i 
 
 THB RKALJTY OF A FUTURE STATK. J81 
 
 and intelligence than those which we now per- 
 oeive in our mortal bodies. Ol the contrary 
 we must neoessaiily suppose thousands of the 
 most delioate contrivances and compensations, 
 diflferent from everything we can now ccnceive, 
 to be essentially necessary in the construction 
 of an organized body intended for perpetual 
 activity, and destined to an immortal duration. 
 To investigate and contemplate the contrivances 
 of Divine wisdom, by which the elements of 
 disease and death are forever prevented from 
 entering into this renovated frame, and by which 
 it will be preserved in undecaying youth and 
 vigor throughout the lapse of innumerable ages, 
 we must necessarily conclude, will form a part 
 of the studies of renovated man in the future 
 world; nor can we help thinking, that the 
 knowledge of the wonders of the human frame 
 we now acquire, may be a preparatory know- 
 ledge or qualification for enabling us to form an 
 enlightened and comprehensive conception of 
 the powers, qualities and peculiar organization 
 of the bodies of the saints after the resurrection. 
 Another branch of study in which the saints 
 in heaven will engage is History. History con- 
 tains a record of past actions, or events, and 
 make? us acquainted with the transactions which 
 happened hundreds or thousands of years ago. 
 

 282 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 When viewed in its proper light it may be con- 
 sidered as nothing else than a detail of the 
 operations of Divine Providence, in relation to 
 the moral intelligences of this world. It illus- 
 trates the character of the human race, and the 
 deep depravity in which they are involved, and 
 displays the rectitude of the character of God, 
 and the equality of his moral administration. 
 History, therefore, will form a prominent object 
 of study among the celestial inhabitants, as 
 furnishing those materials which will illustrate 
 the ways of Providence, and display the wisdom 
 and righteousness of Jehovah in his government 
 of the world. At present we contemplate only 
 the fragments of the history of mankind. Of 
 the history of some nations we are altogether 
 ignorant, and of the history of others we have 
 only a few unconnected details, blended with 
 fabulous narrations, and extravagant fictiona. 
 Of no nation whatever have we an entire his- 
 tory, composed of authentic materials ; and, 
 consequently, we perceive only some broken, 
 detached links in the chain of the Divine dispensa- 
 tions, and are unable to survey the whole of God's 
 procedure towards our race in one unbroken 
 seriesa, from the creation to the present time. 
 We know nothing decisively respecting the 
 period which man remained in a state of inno- 
 
THE REALITY OF A Ft'TURK STATE. 283 
 
 cence, nor of the particular transactions and 
 events thai happened before the fall And how 
 little do we know of the state of mankind, of the 
 events which befel them, and of the civil and 
 religious arrangements which existed during a 
 period of sixteen hundred years, which inter- 
 vened between the creation and the deluge, 
 though the world was then more populous and 
 fertile than it is at present, or ever has been 
 since that time. How little do we know of the 
 state of mankind immediately previous to the 
 flood ; of the consternation ami terror which 
 must have been displayed over all the earth, 
 when the fountains of the great deep were 
 broken up, and the cataracts of heaven opened ; 
 and of the dreadful concussions of the elements 
 of nature, when the solid strata of the earth 
 were rent asunder, when the foundations of the 
 mountains were overturned, and the whole 
 surface of the globe transformed into one bound- 
 less ocean. How little do we know of the 
 gradual rise of idolatry, or even of all the cir- 
 cumstances which attended it, and of the origin 
 of the great empires into which the world has 
 been divided. How little do we know even of 
 the history of the Jewish nati jn, posterior to the 
 period of the Babyloni-h captivity. Whither 
 were the ten tribea of Israel scaitered among 
 
284 
 
 MAN I)«PLAYKI>. 
 
 
 the uations i what events have befallen them ? 
 and in what countries are they now io be found ? 
 Of the history of all the nations in the world, 
 (the Jews only excepted,) from the time of the 
 deluge to the days of Hezekiab, a period of 
 nearly two thousand years, we remain in pro- 
 found ignoranoe. And yet, during that long 
 period God has not forsaken the earth ; his dis- 
 pensations toward bis rational offspring were 
 still going forward j empires were rising and 
 declining ; one generation passing away, and 
 another coming ; and thousands of millions of 
 mankind ushered into the eternal world. Those 
 chasms in the history of mankind, which hide 
 from our view the greater portion of God's 
 moral dispensation, will doubtless be filled up 
 in the eternal state; so that we shall be enabled 
 to take a full view of the whole of the Divine 
 procedure, in all its connexions and b wrings, 
 towards every nation on earth. But the history 
 of man is not the only topic in this department 
 of knowledge, that will occupy the attention of 
 the inhabitants of heaven. The history of 
 angels — of their faculties, intercourses, and 
 employments — of their modes of communication 
 with each other — of their different embassies to 
 distant worlds — of the transactions which have 
 taken place in their society, and of the revolu- 
 
THB REALITY OF A FDTUBJB STATK. 885 
 
 tions through which they may hava passed— the 
 history of apostate angels, the cause of their 
 fall, and the circumstances with which it was 
 attended— the plans they have been pursuing 
 since that period, and the mians by which they 
 have endeavored to accomplish their infernal 
 devices— will doubtless form a portion of the 
 Divine dispensations which the saints in light 
 will be permitted to contemplate. Over this 
 part of the Divine economy a veil is spread, 
 which we have reason to believe will be with- 
 drawn when that which is perfect is come, and 
 •• when we shall know even as we are known." 
 It is also probable that the leading facts in 
 relation to the history of other worlds will be 
 disclosed to view. The history of diflferent 
 planets in the solar system, and of those which 
 are connected with other systems in the universe 
 —the periods of their creation, the character of 
 their inhabitants, the changes through which 
 they have passed, the peculiar dispensations of 
 Providence respecting them, and many other 
 particulars, may be gradually laid open to the 
 "redeemed from among men," for enlarging 
 their views of the Divine government. By 
 means of such communications they will require 
 a clearer and more distinct conception of the 
 moral character and attributes of God, of tb« 
 
 'i^ 
 
 
286 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 rectitude of his administrations, and of *• his 
 manifold wisdom" in the various modes by 
 which he governs the different provinces of his 
 vast empire. Under the impressions which 
 auch views will produce, they will rejoice in the 
 Divine government, and join with rapture in the 
 song of Moses, the servant of God, and in th« 
 song of the Lamb, saying, *♦ Great and marvel- 
 lous are thy works, Lord, God, Almighty \ 
 Just and true are thy ways, thou King of 
 saints!" Having now noticed the various 
 branches of science which in all probability 
 will be studied by the celestial inhabitants, we 
 ask the reader to investigate the matter impar- 
 tially, and then judge. Though when we come 
 to know the reality, it is probable that every- 
 thing may not be found to be exactly as we have 
 supposed, yet, aocoriing to the present arrange- 
 ment, it is the most rational conclusion we can 
 arrive at. That the celestial inhabitants will 
 possess a superior intellectaal capacity is positive, 
 from several considerations, and is a fact so 
 universally admitted, that it needs no illustration 
 here to substantiate it ; that their range of vision 
 is also enlarged is equally admitted, and from the 
 magnificence and splendor of the works of cre- 
 ation, and the more perfect conceptions which 
 redeemed men will there possess of the principles 
 
II. <• 
 
 I 
 
 THE REALITY OF A FUTIJRK STATE. 287 
 
 of the natural sciences, it is evident that the diver- 
 sity of the scenery of the Heavens will present 
 an unlimited range and endless variety of objects 
 for contemplation far beyond our present con- 
 ceptions. Let us now consider some of the 
 objects presented to our mental sight, in this 
 vast assemblage of systems and worlds, which 
 lie within the sphere of human vision. The 
 first idea that suggests itself, is, that they are 
 Jill material structures, in the formation of which 
 Infinite wisdom and goodness have been 
 employed, and consequently, they must exhibit 
 scenes of sublimity and of exquisite contrivance, 
 worthy of the contemplation of every rational 
 being. If this earth— which is an abode of apos- 
 tate men, and a scene of moral depravity, and 
 which, here and there, has the the appearance of 
 being the ruins of a former world — presents the 
 variegated prospects of lofty mountains, roman- 
 tic dells and fertile plains, meandering rivers, 
 transparent lakes and spacious oceans, verdant 
 landscapes adorned with fruits and flowers, and 
 a rich variety of the finest colors, and 
 a thousand other beauties and sublimities that 
 are strewed over the face of nature ; how grand 
 and magnificent a scenery may we suppose 
 must be presented to the view, in those worlds 
 where moral evil has never entered to derange 
 
 ■ I' 
 
286 
 
 MAN UiaiMiAYlW). 
 
 the harmony of the Creator's works, where loy« 
 to the Supreme, and to one another, fires the 
 bosoTi of its inhabitants, and produces a source 
 of happiness. In such worlds, we may suppose 
 that the sensitive enjoyments, and the objects 
 of beauty and grandeur which are displayed to 
 their views, as far exceed the scenery and enjoy- 
 ments of this world, as their moral and intellect- 
 ual qualities excel those of the sons of men. 
 In the next place, it is highly reasonable i4> 
 suppose, that an infinite diversity of scenery 
 exists throughout all the worlds which compose 
 the universe ; that no one of the millions of 
 systems throughout the works of Creation, 
 exactly resembles another in its conHtruction, 
 motion, order, and decoration; There appear, 
 indeed, to be certain laws and phenomena which 
 are common to all the systemy which exist 
 within the limits of human vision. But, with 
 the exception of these general laws, so far as 
 we have been able to determine the appearance 
 of the planets by the aid of the most powerful 
 telescopes, there is a great diversity of scenery 
 existing in each ; if we examine our earth, we 
 shall find an almost endless diversity of objects 
 continually presenting themselves to our view. 
 In the animal kingdom we find more than 100,- 
 <K)0 different species of living ereatures, and 
 
niE KBALITY OK A FllTURK STATE. 289 
 
 about the same variety in the productions of 
 vegetable nature ; the mineral kingdom presents 
 to us an immense variety of earths, stones, 
 rocks, metals, fossils, gems, and precious stones, 
 which are strewed in rich profusion along the 
 surface, f^nd throughout the interior parts of the 
 globe. Of the individuals which compose every 
 distinct species of aniraaind beings, there Is no 
 one that bears an exact r« s;emblance to another. 
 Although there are about ^ne thousand millions 
 of inhabitants that now , eople the earth, and 
 all the other millions that have existed since 
 the world began, and wero those to be compared 
 there would probably be found no two that would 
 present exactly the same aspect, in every point 
 of view in which they migi be contemplated. 
 In like manner no two cows, horses, dogs, lions, 
 elephants, or other terrestrial animals, will be 
 found bearing a perfect resemblance. The same 
 observation will apply to the scenery of lakes, 
 rivers, grottos, mountains, and all other diversi- 
 fied landscapes which the surface of the earth 
 and waters present to the traveller, and the 
 student of nature. If from the earth we view 
 the other bodies which compose the solar system, 
 we shall find a similar diversity, as far as our 
 observations can extend. From the surface of 
 one of the planets the sun will appear seven 
 
 T 
 
 :vi 
 
«90 
 
 MA.N DISPLAYED. 
 
 times larger, and from another 360 limes less 
 than he does to us. One of these planets la 
 destitute of a moon, but from Its ruddy aspect, 
 either In Its surface or its atmosphere, seems to 
 be endowed with a phosphorescent quality, to 
 supply it with light, in the absence of the sun ; 
 while another is surrounded with four, another 
 with felx, and another witi seven resplendent 
 moons, much larger than ours. Even our moon, 
 which is among the smallest of the celestial 
 bodies, which Is the nearest to us, and which 
 accompanies the earth in its revolutions round 
 the sun, exhibits a curious aspect, different from 
 what is formed on the terraqueous globe — the 
 altitude of its mountains, the depths of its vales, 
 the conical form of its insulated rocks, the cir- 
 cular ridges of bills which encompass its plains, 
 and the celestial phenomena which are dis- 
 played in its firmament, present a scenery which, 
 though in some points resembling our own, Is 
 yet remarkably diflFerent, on the whole, from the 
 general aspect of nature in our terrestrial habi- 
 tation. 
 
 Having now glanced at the scenery of the 
 heavens, and its diversity, as fit objects for tha 
 contemplation of celestial beings, we will now 
 more particularly notice the intelligence and 
 senses of superior beings in the redeemed state- 
 
THK UKALITY OP A FlITURK STATM. 291 
 
 Among sentient beings in this world we find 
 a regular gradation of intellect, from the aquatic 
 and insect tribea up to man, who stands at the 
 top of the intellectual scale, as lord of this 
 lower world. Wo perceive, too, a great dif- 
 ference existing between the intellect of different 
 persons, oning parti ' to ♦'•eir constitutional 
 organization, and partly to the degrees of cul- 
 tivation the faculties have received. But it 
 would be highly unreasoaable to suppose that 
 the moat accomplished genius that ever adorned 
 our race, was placed at the summit of inte'ileo- 
 tual perfection. On the other hand, wc have 
 reason to believe that man, with all bin noble 
 powers, stands nearly at the bottom of the 
 scale of the intelligent creation. As to the 
 number of apeciea which diversify the ranks of 
 superior intellectual natures, and the degrees 
 of perception which distinguish their different 
 orders, we have no data afforded by the contem- 
 plfttion of the visible universe sufficient to 
 enable us to form a definite conception. The 
 following description, in the words of a cele- 
 brated Swiss naturalist, may perhaps convey 
 tome faint idea of the powers of some of the 
 highest orders of intelligences : 
 
 "To convey one's self from one place to 
 Another with a swiftness equal or superior to 
 
 ^n 
 
292 
 
 MAN DISPLAYBn. 
 
 that of light ; to preserve one's self by the mere 
 force of nature, and without the aid of any 
 other created being ; to be exempted from any 
 kind of change ; to be endowed with the most 
 extensive senses ; to have distinct perceptions 
 of all the attributes of matter, and all its modi- 
 fications ; to discover effects in their causes ; to 
 re,: .e one's seif by a most rapid flight to the 
 most general principles ; to see in the twinkling 
 of an eye those principles ; to have at the same 
 time, without confusion, an almost infinite num- 
 ber of ideas ; to see the past as distinctly as the 
 present, and to penetrate into the remotest 
 futurity ; to be able to exercise all these faculties 
 without weariness : from these considerations 
 we may form some idea of th. intellectual 
 powers of superior intelligences, but even still 
 our conceptions of the superior qualities of the 
 inhabitants of the spirit world fall far below the 
 reality." 
 
 A being possessed of faculties such as these, 
 is raised as far above the limited powers of 
 man, as man is raised above the insect tribes. 
 The Scriptures assure us that beings approxi- 
 mating in their powers and perfections to those 
 now staged, actually exist, and perform import- 
 
 «_i. ^/m J-., ii _ . « 
 
 aub Vuicoo UuUijr Loe ^Oveiuuieiio Oi liitt 
 
 Almighty. The perfections of the angelic 
 
THE KBALITY OF A FUTURE STATU. WS 
 
 tribes, as represented in Scripture, are incom- 
 parably superior to those of men. They are 
 represented as possessing powers capable of 
 enabling them to wing their flight with amazing 
 rapidity from world to world, for the angel 
 Gabriel, being commanded to fly swiftly, while 
 the prophet Daniel was engaged in supplication, 
 approached to him before he had ended his 
 petition. During the few minutes he was 
 engaged in his prayer tnis angelic messenger 
 descended from the celestial region to the 
 country of Babylon. This is a rapidity of 
 motion far surpassing that of light, and far 
 beyond the comprehension of the most vigorous 
 imagination. They have power over the objects 
 of inanimate nature, for one of them *' rolled 
 away the stone from the door of the sepulcher," 
 at the time of our Saviour's resurrection . They 
 are acqualWed with the springs of life, and the 
 avenues by which they may be interrupted, for 
 an angel slew 185,000 of the Assyrians in one 
 night. They are perfectly acquainted with all 
 the relations which subsist among mankind, and 
 can distinguish the age and character of every 
 individual throughout all the families of th« 
 earth, for one of these beings recognized all the 
 i;»a+ Kntn in f-n lainl "f F.jrvnt. and exerted all 
 his power in the destruction of the first-born of 
 
 si 
 
294 
 
 MAN DISPLAYBD. 
 
 the Egyptians. And as they are " ministering 
 spirits to the heirs of salvation," they must 
 have a clear perception of the persons and 
 characters of those who are the objects of Divine 
 favor, and to whom they are occasionally sent 
 on embassies of mercy. They are endowed 
 with superior physical powers and energies ; 
 hence they are said to " excel in strength ;'' 
 and the phrases " a strong argel," and *U 
 mighty angel," which are applied to them, are 
 expressions of the same perfection. Hence, 
 they are represented in the book of Revelation 
 as "holding the four winds of heaven j" as 
 executing the vengeance of God upon the proud 
 despisers of his government ; as " throwing 
 mountains into the sea;" and "binding the 
 prince of darkness in chains, and casting him into 
 the bottomless pit." They are endowed with 
 immortal youth and vigor, and .experience 
 no decay in their intellectual and physical 
 powers, for the angels appeared as young men, 
 though they were doubtless several thousand 
 years old. They are possessed of vast powers 
 of intelligence : hence they are exhibited in 
 the book of Revelation as being full of eyes, 
 that is, endowed with " all sense, all intellect^ 
 *11 consciousness; turning their attention 
 rvery way; beholding all things at once 
 
THIt HEALITY OF A POT'mU STAT B. 
 
 S9S 
 
 within tbe range of their unaerstandwg. and 
 discerning them with the utmost clearness of 
 conception." The human form in the J.gor of 
 youth, is the most beautiful and 'J™"'**™';* »' 
 In the forms of organized beings with which we 
 are acquainted ; and, in these respects ma, 
 probably bear some analogy to the organical 
 structures of other intelligencies. When any of 
 the angelic beings are sent on embassies to this 
 world, we find that, though they W^^ed in a 
 beautiful form, yet, there was a marked diBer- 
 enoe between them and human beings, although 
 It partooii of the human form. The «°g«l j/"- 
 appeared at the tomb of Our Saviour, exhibited 
 , bright and resplendent form; his conntenanoe 
 was like the brightness of lightning, and hn 
 raiment as white as snow, glittering with extra- 
 ordinary luster beyond what mortal eyes could 
 bear ; the angel who appeared to Peter and 
 delivered him out of prison, was arrayed in such 
 ■ glorious apparel that the whole prison wa. 
 iUuminated by the light, although dark and 
 Bloomy as it was where the apostle lay bound. 
 That these beings have organs of speech capa- 
 ble of forming articulate sounds, and m joining 
 In musical strains, appears, from the words they 
 uttered on these and other occasions, and from 
 the song they sung on tiie i-iains oi uemiousu., 
 
 J 
 
S96 
 
 MAN DfSPLAYKD. 
 
 when they announced the birth of Our Saviour. 
 They appear to possess the power of rendering 
 themselves invisible at pleasure ; for the angel that 
 appeared to Zacharias in the sanctuary of the 
 temple, was invisible to the surrounding multi- 
 tudes without, both at the time of his entrance 
 into, and his exit from the " holy place." That 
 superior beings connected with the heavenly 
 world, have additional senses to those which 
 we possess, is highly probable ; especially when 
 we consider the general analogy of nature, and 
 the gradations which exist among organized 
 beings in our world. It forms no reason why 
 we should deny that such senses exist, because 
 we can form no distinct conception of any 
 senses besides those which we possess 
 
 From the preceding facts concerning the 
 powers, abilities, &c., of angels, we may form a 
 faiiit idea of the powers which renovated man 
 may yet possess ? If we admit that the spirits 
 will be in a progressive state of existence, who 
 can set bounds to their intellectual powers? Or 
 what mind can conceive the amount of know- 
 'edge they may obtain through the rounds of 
 eternity, being favored as they are, with supe- 
 rior facilities for acquiring information on all 
 subjects that gratify, edify and strengthen their 
 intellectual powers ? From what has been stated. 
 
THE RBAHTY OK A KUTURK STATK. 
 
 ♦OT 
 
 in the preceding remarks, respecting the numer- 
 ous and august objects that may be presented 
 to the contemplation of celestial intelligences, we 
 may conclude, that the chief subjects of study 
 in the heavenly world. wiU be History and 1 hi- 
 losophy. Under the department of History may 
 be comprehended all the details which will be 
 exhibited to them, respecting the origm, pro- 
 gress and consummation of the plan of man « 
 redemption, together with the moral .^tural 
 and political history of other worlds, with their 
 natural scenery and the providential occurrences 
 which they have witnessed, and, as a matter of 
 course, the same chain of history will be studied 
 which is pertaining to our world. Under the 
 department of Philosophy, all those magnificent 
 displays which will be exhibited, of the extent, 
 magnitude, the motion, the mechanical struc- 
 ture, the scenery, the inhabitants, and rhe 
 general constitution of other systems, and the 
 gsneral arrangement of the universal system, 
 comprehended under the government of the 
 Almighty. On these topics, with ail their sub- 
 ordinate and infinitely diversified ramifications. 
 the minds of the redeemed intelligences from 
 this world, will f r,a ample scope for the exer- 
 cise of all their powers, and will derive from 
 the investigations of these subjects ana com- 
 
 m 
 
 i< 
 
 ¥', 
 
 li 
 
298 
 
 MAN DISPLAYED. 
 
 pamoDship With angels, archangels, ,rd all that 
 8 hol> pore and good, in a world freed from 
 the pollutions and disarrangements ocoaeioaed 
 by man s transgression, perpetual and uninter- 
 rupted enjoyment, throughout an endless exist- 
 ence. That these subjects will be investigated 
 by superior beings in another world, may be 
 interred from the scriptures, especially from 
 several passages in the book of Revelation. 
 Source, of Future MUery. In connexion 
 With the subject under consideration, we will 
 »t»p to notice the state of man before be par- 
 took of the forbidden frnit. The general inter- 
 preta ,on of the Scripture has been, that untU 
 the fall of man, death did not exist in the world 
 even among the inferior animals, for the BibU 
 asserts, " that by man came death." (1st Cor 
 15 chap. 21 y) u A„d by one man sin entered 
 iBto the world, and death by sin." (Romans fi 
 chap. 12 V. But Geology teaches n« that 
 myriads of animals lived and died before the 
 Creation of n.an. Not only Geology, but com- 
 parative Anatomy and Zoology teach us that 
 death among the inferior animals, did not result 
 from the fall of man-but, from the natural 
 organization of the animal frame given them by 
 their Crsator.-for it does not say that death 
 r -e- -,i.„„ „., amuittis, Dut Upon all men, for 
 
THE REALITY OF A FUTURB STATE. 
 
 t99 
 
 the reason that all have sinned— an act that 
 inferior animals could not do. In like manner, 
 1st Cor. 15 chap. 21 v., is also limited in its 
 signification, as may be seen from the latter 
 clause of the verse, viz : " by man came also 
 the resurrection from the dead," for the object 
 here, is to draw a contrast between Adam and 
 Christ,astotheirinfluence upon thehuman family. 
 
 " That death," says Mr. Taylor, "with which God 
 threatened Adam, and ^hich passed upon his 
 posterity, is not the going out of this world, but 
 the manner of going. If man had continued in 
 innocence, he would have died placidly, and 
 without vexatious circumstances ; he would not 
 have died by sickness, misfortune, defect or 
 unwillingness, but when he fell he began to die, 
 man being made a corporeal being, of materials 
 that must decay by wear ; he would necessarily 
 have died, but if he had not transgressed, the 
 pains of death would have been obviated." 
 (Holy Dying, p. 295.) 
 
 Having now noticed the case of man before 
 the fall, and witnessed many of the evils in this 
 world originating from his disobedience, we will 
 now proceed to notice some of the probable 
 sources from which his misery will be drawn in 
 another world. 
 
 As one part of the happiness 
 will consist in " seeing God as he 
 
 i» jt. 
 
 _!_1. 1.^^111 
 
 ,1 
 II 
 
 ■■li 
 
 
300 
 
 .MAN MISPLAYKb. 
 
 al probability, form one bitter ingredient in the 
 tatare lot of the unrighteous, that they will b. 
 deprived of the transporting view of the Crea- 
 tor s glory, a. displayed in the magnificent 
 arrangement, he has made in the system of 
 nature. Confined to one dreary corner of the 
 universe, surrounded by a dense atmosphere, 
 or a congeries of sable clouds, they will be cut 
 Off from all intercourse wilh the region of moral 
 P^^rfecfaon, and prevented from contemplating 
 the s,>blime scenery of the Creator's empire 
 rhis Idea m corroborated by the declamtion of 
 Scripture where they are represented as " ban- 
 ■shed from the New Jerusalem." - thrust out into 
 outer darkness,- and reserved for the " blackness 
 of darkness for ages of ages.- And nothing 
 can be more to.menting to minds endowed with 
 capacious powers, than the thought of being 
 forever deprived of the opportunity of ezercis 
 ing them on the glorious objects which they 
 know to exist, but which they can never con- 
 template, and about which they never expect to 
 hear any transporting information. If it be one 
 end of future punishment to make wicked men 
 sensible of their folly and ingratitude, and of 
 the mercy and favors they have abused, it is 
 
 probable that in that recion in %«>><"!- *>- >--" 
 
 be confined, everything will be so arranged as 
 to bring to thoir recollection the comforts they 
 
THE RKAMTV OF A FUTUHi; STATK. 301 
 
 M 
 
 had abused, and the Divine goodness they had 
 despised, and to make them feel sensationfl 
 opposite to those which were produced by the 
 benevolent arrangements which exist in the 
 present state. Foi example, in the present 
 economy of nature, every one of our senses, 
 every part of our bodily structure, every move- 
 ment of which our animal frame is susceptible, 
 and the influence which the sun, the atmos- 
 phere, and other parts of nature produce on our 
 structure and feelings, have a direct tendency 
 to communicate pleasing sensations. But in 
 that world every agency of this kind may be 
 reversed, as to the effect it may produce on 
 percipient beings. Our sense of touch is at 
 present accompanied with a thousand modifica- 
 tions of feelings, which are accompanied with 
 pleasure : but there everything that comes in 
 contact with the organs of feeling may produce 
 the most painful sensations. Here, the variety 
 of colors which adorn the face of nature, delights 
 the eye and the imagination ; there, the most 
 gloomy and haggard objects may at all times 
 produce a dismal and alarming aspect over 
 every part of the surrounding scene. Here, 
 the most enchanting music frequently cheers 
 and enraptures the human heart ; there, Hothisg 
 is heard hut dismal wailinM:^ and weeping. 
 
302 
 
 MAN DISPLAYBD. 
 
 Ungrateful for the manifold blessings they 
 received in this world from the bountiful Giver 
 of all good, the inhabitants of that dreary region 
 will behold their sin, their punishment, in being 
 deprived of everything which can administer to 
 their sensitive enjoyment. With regard to their 
 *^ompanions, they will be surrounded with char- 
 acters possessing the most turbulent disposi- 
 tions. Here, they hated the society of the 
 righteous, and lOved to mingle with evil doers 
 in their folly and their crimes ; there, they will 
 be forever banished from the company of the 
 wise and benevolent, and will feel the bitter 
 effects of being perpetually chained to the 
 society of those malignant associates, who 
 will be their everlasting tormentors. Here, 
 although we occasionally meet with charac- 
 ters possessing malignant dispositions, yet 
 oar path of life is often made pleasant and 
 smooth by forming associations with such per- 
 sons as Doddridge, Howard, Vinning and others, 
 who have appeared in all ages, and among all 
 civilized nations, like angels of mercy, to glad- 
 den the hearts of Adam's sin-accursed race ; but 
 there they shall be surrounded with the most 
 fiend-like characters that ever existed in this, or 
 — J ^^:^^z psaucv. xu iiius&raie inis aUDjeor> 
 let us suppose ourselves surrounded by such 
 
THK KKALITY OF A FUTUKK STATK. 303 
 
 companioni aa Napoleon Bonaparte, Zenghis 
 Khan, who boaated that grass never grow after 
 bis horae'fl hoofs had passed over it ; as Xerxes 
 who, fired with pride, leading forward an army 
 of 3,000,000 of infatuated wretches to be slaugh- 
 tered by the indignant and victorious Greeks ; 
 an Alexander, who, with his numerous armies. 
 drove the plough-share of destruction through 
 surrounding nations, levelling cities to the 
 ground, and massacring their inoffensive inhabi- 
 tants, merely to gratify a mad ambition, and to 
 be eulogized as a hero ; as an Alarie, who, with 
 his barbarous hordes, overrun the southern coun- 
 tries of Europe, overturning the most splendid 
 monuments of art, pillaging the metropolis of 
 ibe Roman empire ; as a Tamerlane, who over- 
 ran Persia, India, and other parts of Asia, and 
 carried slaughter and devastation in his train, 
 and displayed his wanton cruelty by pounding 
 three or four thousand people in large mortars, 
 and building them with brick or mortar into a 
 wall ; Zenghis Khan overran a territory of 
 15,000,000 square miles, and at one time oau8<)d 
 100,000 prisoners to be beheaded, and whOn 
 during his fiend-like career, utterly esttrmin 
 from the earth fourteen millions of hun* ^ 
 beinffs : as a Nero, who trampled upon the laws 
 •f nature and society, plunged into the most 
 
304 
 
 -MAN" DISIM.AVKi). 
 
 abominable (lehaucherleN, and practiced all 
 worts of cruelly, murdering hia wife, Octavia, 
 and his mother, Agrippina, insulting heaven and 
 mankind, by (.(Tf ring up thanksgivings to the 
 gods, on the perpetration of these crimes, and 
 setting fire to Home, that he might amuse 
 himself with the univerfjal terror and despair 
 which that calamity inspired, and for the pur- 
 pose of having something to allege against the 
 christianfj to justify him in commencing a 
 severe persecution of them by falsely accusing 
 them of firing the city ; as an Antiochus Epiph- 
 anes, whose name stands so high on the roll of 
 irapioty and crime — having besieged the city of 
 Jerusalem, he took it by storm, and during three 
 days it was abandoned to the fury of the 
 soldiers, and who, according to Rollins' Ancient 
 History, caused 80,000 men to be inhumanly 
 butcheied; he exercised every species of cruelty 
 upon the citizens, and inhumanly put to death 
 all those whom he supposed to be his ^ I'fj, 
 that came in his way ; or such a chnrju .'♦<»• ,» 
 AH Pacha, who caused the massacre of the 
 Gardiotes ; or the Mogul Emperors ; or of the 
 cruel Turks, who murdered 40,000 of the 
 mk ,i;'tante of Scio in one night, and at another 
 n^. ;? 3,400, without any provocation on the 
 pMt of the Scionians whatever; or such charac- 
 
THB RBALITY OF A PUTURK 8TAVB. 306 
 
 iil* 
 
 ters a8 the Qrand Segnior who ruled in Tarkey 
 in 1821, during, the Gieek Revolution, who had 
 the gates of his seraglio decorated with five 
 hundred heads, and twelve hundred ears, heiug 
 taken from the prisoners who fell into the btods 
 ef the Turks, at the takiug of Ipsara, in 1824. 
 We might fill a volume with a detail of the cru- 
 elties and debaucheries which these tyrants, and 
 many others, not here nnmed, have committed, 
 but enough has already been said, to give tb<) 
 reader an idea of what foan might, or can bf, 
 when unrestrained by moral principle and above 
 the reach of the civil law ; enough has also been 
 said, to give an idea of what comfort could be 
 expected to be taken with such companions as 
 these, and what law or order would be among 
 a community, tjrmed of such characters, or 
 more properly, what a scene of horror, agony 
 and confusion st exist in a community where 
 there is no restraint laid upon their naturally 
 •ngovernable passions and desires, to say noth- 
 ing of the thieves, pickpockets and other ont- 
 laws who have ever been the scourge and pest 
 of all civil and moral society. Can intelligent, 
 moral beings imagine a worse punishment that 
 •ould be inflicted upon them, than to be doomed 
 to spend an eternity where such characters 
 
 
 
 •siaaivins 
 
 amv. 
 
 
 
 V 
 
306 
 
 MAN DrSPLAYED. 
 
 foil scope, unrestrained by the dictates of reason 
 and the authority of the Divine law. Here, 
 they delighted in debauch, murder and blood- 
 shed ; there, they will experience all tlie bitter 
 pangs of giving a loose rein to these unholy 
 desires. If to these sources of sorrow and bitter 
 deprivation, be added the consideration, that in 
 such minds, the principles of malice, envy, 
 hatred, revenge, and every other element of evil 
 which pervaded their souls while in this life, will 
 there rage without control. And, if we admit 
 that man is a progressive being, and to his 
 sources of sorrow there be added the reflection 
 that he voluntarily made himself miserable, 
 when he might have enjoyed all the blessednecis 
 of heaven, and the companionship of angels, and 
 these reflections continue to grow more and more 
 poignant throughout eternity, we may form such 
 a conception of future misery as will warrant 
 all the metaphorical descriptions of it, which 
 are given in Divine Revelation, without sup- 
 posing any further interposition of the Deity, in 
 the direct infliction of punishment. While he 
 leaves them simply to " eat of the fruit of their 
 own ways, and to be filled with their own 
 devices," their punishment must be dreadful, 
 and far surpassing every species of misery con- 
 nected with the present state of the moral world. 
 
THR REALITY OF A FUTURE STATE. 307 
 
 On the other hand, a consideration of the infin- 
 .tely diversified sources of bliss, to which our 
 cttention has been directed, has a powerful ten- 
 dency to impress the minds of the saints with a 
 lively perception of the unbounded nature of 
 Divine benignity, and of " the love of God which 
 is in Christ Jesus our Lord." It is c .'fly in 
 connection with such expansive views of the 
 attributes and the government of vhe Deity, 
 that the love of God towards the Eedeemed, 
 appears "boundless," and " passing comprehen- 
 sion;" for it introduces them into a scene which 
 is commensurate with infinite duration, but is 
 boundless in its prospect of knowledge, of 
 felicity, and of glory. And, therefore, amidst 
 all the other employments of the heavenly state, 
 they will never forget their obligation to that 
 unmerited grace and mercy which keep their 
 souls from destruction, but will mingle with 
 their sublime investigations,— ascriptions of 
 ''blessing, honor and glory unto Him that 
 sitteth upon the Throne and unto the Lamb for 
 
 >» 
 
 ever. 
 
 The redeemed in heaven will enjoy perpetual 
 and uninterrupted felicity— the foundation of 
 this felicity will be laid in their complete free- 
 dom from sin, and their attainment of moral pera 
 foction— their renovated faculties will be 
 
 1 
 
308 
 
 MAN DISPLAYBD. 
 
 employed in oontemplating the Divine glory. 
 The Divine glory consists in the manifestation 
 of the Divine r>erfeotions ; the sensible display 
 of these perfections mil be given in the works 
 of creation ; in the intelligences which people 
 the material world, their orders, gradations, 
 history and present state ; in the variety of 
 scenery which the abodes of intelligence exhibit; 
 in the economy and moral order which prevail 
 among them, and in the various dispensations 
 of Divine Providence, in reference to all worlds 
 and orders of beings. The word and the works 
 of God, must always harmonize, and reflect a 
 mutual lustre on each other. What we find to 
 be actually existing in the visible scene of the 
 universe, can never contradict any of the state* 
 ments of Revelation, but, on the contrary, must 
 tend to elucidate some one or other of its inter- 
 eetiog communications. And, since we find in 
 our survey of the system of nature, and assem- 
 blage of astonishing objects which tend to raise 
 our conceptions of the Supreme Being, and of 
 the sublime and diversified nature of future 
 felicity, it becomes us to prosecute those trains 
 of thought which the analogies of nature and 
 Revelation suggest, in order to enlarge the 
 oapaeity of our minds, to exalt our ideas of eel- 
 •aiial bliss, and to prepare us fur more expui- 
 
THB BBALITY OP A FUTURl STATB. 
 
 30» 
 
 live and sublime contemplations, in that world, 
 vhere the physical and moral obstructions 
 which now impede our progress, and obscure 
 our intellectual views, shall be completely and 
 forever removed. 
 
 Importanee of Immortality. From the whole 
 of what we have stated on this department of 
 our subject, we may learn the value of an im- 
 mortal soul, and the importance which 
 ought to be attached to our immortal 
 destination. What a shadow doei humfttt 
 life appear, when contrasted with the scenes of 
 futurity ! What a small point in duration do 
 the revolutions of time present, when compared 
 with a boundless eternity ! What a limited 
 scene does this world, and all its glories exhibit 
 when set in competition with the extent and 
 splendor of that empire which stretches out into 
 immensity, and shall endure forever ! And is 
 man to be transported to other regions of the 
 universe, to mingle with the inhabitants of other 
 worlds, and to exist throughout an endless dura- 
 tion 1 What a noble principle does the human 
 mind appear, when we consider it as qualified 
 to prosecute so many diversified trains of thought, 
 to engage in so many sublime investigations, 
 to attain the summit of moral perfection, and 
 to expatiate at large, through the unlimited 
 
910 
 
 MAN DISPLAYKD. 
 
 dominions of the Almighty, "while eternal ages 
 are rolling on ! How important, then, ought 
 everything to be considered, which is connected 
 with the scene of our eternal destination ! If 
 these truths be admitted, reason and common 
 sense declare that a more interesting and mo- 
 mentous subject cannot possibly occupy the 
 mind of man. It is so profoundly interesting, 
 and connected with so many awful and glorious 
 consequences, that we must be utterly dead to 
 every noble and refined feeling, if we be alto- 
 gether indiflferent about it. If there be only a 
 bare probability that man is immortal, and that 
 the scenes to which I have alluded might pos- 
 sibly be realized, it ought to stimulate the most 
 anxious enquiries, and awaken all the powers 
 Md energies of our souls. For it is both our 
 duty and our highest interest to obtain light 
 and satisfaction, on a point on which our present 
 comfort and our ultimate happiness must depend. 
 But, if the light of nature acd the dictates of 
 Revelation both conspire to demonstrate the 
 eternal destiny of mankind, nothing can exceed 
 the folly and the infatuation of those who trifle 
 with their everlasting interests, and even try 
 every scheme, and prosecute every trivial object 
 that may have a tendency to turn aside their 
 thoughts from this im portant subject. Yet, how 
 
THE REAMTY OF A FUTURE STATE. 311 
 
 often do we find, in the conduct of the various 
 classes of mankind, the merest trifles set in 
 competition with the scenes of happiness or of 
 misery that lie beyond the grave. The grovel- 
 ling pleasures derived from horse racing, halls, 
 afld theatrical amusements, the acquisition of a 
 few paltry pounds or shillings, the rattling of dice 
 or the shuffling of a pack of cards, will absorb the 
 minds of thousands who profess to be rational 
 beings, while they refuse to spend one serioui 
 hour in reflecting on the fate of their Immortal 
 spirits, when their bodies shall have dropped 
 into the tomb. Nay, such is the indifference, 
 and even antipathy with which this subject is 
 treated by certain classes of society, that it is 
 considered unfashionable, and in certain cases 
 would be regarded as a species of insult, to in- 
 troduce into conversation, a sentiment or reflec- 
 tion on the eternal destiny of man. It is 
 astonishing, the carelessness that certain per- 
 sons exhibit in a matter which involves their 
 existence, their eternity, and their all. On the 
 contrary, we need but the perceptions of an 
 ordinary understanding to convince us that self 
 love, self-interest and the simplest light of rea 
 son, should inspire these sentiments. It requires 
 but little elevation of soul to discover, that 
 here there is no substantial delight ; that our 
 
112 
 
 MAN OISPLAYBO. 
 
 pleaaurea are but vanifcy ; that the ills of life ar« 
 innumerable, and that after all, death, which 
 threatens us every moment, muat, in a few years, 
 perhaps in a few days, place us in the eternal 
 condition of happiness or misery. It is, there- 
 fore, the imperative duty of every man who 
 makes any pretensions to prudence or rationality, 
 to endeavor to have his mind impressed witk 
 the conviction of the reality of a future and 
 invisible world, to consider its importance and 
 to contemplate in tho light of reason and reve- 
 lation, the grand and solemn scenes which it dis- 
 plays. While the least doubt remains upon his 
 mind in relation to the subject, he shoald give 
 himself no rest till it be dispelled. He should 
 explore every avenue ; he should prosecute 
 everv study from which light and information 
 may be obtained ; he should prosecute his 
 researches with the same earnestness and avidity 
 as a miser would, in digging for hidden trea- 
 sures ; and above all things, he should study 
 with deep attention and humility, the revelation 
 contained in the Holy Scriptures, with earnest 
 prayer to God for light and direction. 
 
 *' If thou criest after knowledge, and liftest 
 up thy voice for understanding ; if thou seekest 
 her as silver, and searchest for her as for hid 
 treasure, then shalt thou understand the fear of 
 
THH RBAI.ITV OF A PUTUEB «TAT1. 8l8 
 
 the Lord, and and the knowledge of God. For 
 the Lord givetb wisdom : out of his mouth cometH 
 knowledge and understanding. In all thy ways, 
 acknowledge him, and he shall direct thy paths. 
 Then shall thy light break forth in obscurity, 
 and thy darkness shall be as the noonday." In 
 ine, if we are thoroughly convinced of our rela- 
 tion to an eternal world, it will be our constant 
 endeavor to cultivate those heavenly disposi- 
 tions and virtues, and to prosecute that course 
 of action which will prepare us for the enjoy- 
 ment of the heavenly state. " For without hob- 
 BOSS no man can see the Lord;" and we are 
 assured « that no unclean thing can enter the 
 gates of the New Jerusalam," and that neither 
 "thieves, nor extortioners, nor the covetous, 
 Bor the effeminate, nor drunkards, nor revilers, 
 Bor idolaters, shall inherit the kingdom of God. 
 
 THB BND.